Dell TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300 Floorstanding Loudspeakers Enceintes colonnes Altavoces de piso Standlautsprecher Diffusori da pavimento Caixas acústicas de piso TSi 200 & TSi 100 Bookshelf Loudspeakers Enceinte d’étagère Altavoz de estantería Regallautsprecher Diffusori per Scaffale Caixas Acústicas para Estantes CS20 & CS10 Center Channel Loudspeakers Enceintes Centrale Altavoz de Canal Central Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher Diffusore per Canale Centrale Caixa Acústica do Canal Central Owner’s Manual -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux Codes Promo et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Accéder au Support : http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf -> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1501-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-5100cn-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-Mini-tour-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1300-B120-B130-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1955-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-6400-E1505-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-Tout-en-un-Dell-A920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M1710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-DL2000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5160-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Gen-2-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-300m-Guide-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-640M-E1405-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8500-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M2010-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-3000-Series-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-3500-Portable-Computer-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-5423-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-poweredge-r520-technical-guide

Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sans-Fil-Dell-TP713-Manuel-d-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Adamo-XPS

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietairexps-13-l321x_owner_manual_fr-fr

Dell-xps-13-l321x_setup_guide_fr-fr.pdf-Manuel

Dell-Storage-Center-5.5-Guide-de-configuration-systeme

Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-ALIENWARE

Dell-Vostro-410-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M14x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE

Dell-Configuration-de-votre-ecran-de-televiseur-LCD-Dell-W2607C-26-pouces

Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6-E-et-CERC-6-i-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300-Manuel

Dell-2145cn-Imprimante-multifonction-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Systems-Hardware-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook

Dell-Vostro-270-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3099597.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1130n_User's%20Guide_en-us.pdf ftp://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_cloud_products/poweredge-c8000_owner's%20manual3_en-us.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-2145cn_User's%20Guide_da-dk.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200i_Setup%20Guide_cs-cz.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_de-de.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-dp500_owner's%20manual3_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/Common/inspiron-5100_setup%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Vos3360/fr/OM/om_fr.pdf http://support.euro.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Alw_dt_Area_51/en/sm/sm_en.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m11x_Reference%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m18x_user's%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide9_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_poweredge/poweredge-2800_User's%20Guide12_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_equallogic/dell-dx6000_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide10_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_precision_mobile/precision-m4700_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_es-mx.pdf http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf

Owner’s Manual TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300 Floorstanding Loudspeakers Enceintes colonnes Altavoces de piso Standlautsprecher Diffusori da pavimento Caixas acústicas de piso TSi 200 & TSi 100 Bookshelf Loudspeakers Enceinte d’étagère Altavoz de estantería Regallautsprecher Diffusori per Scaffale Caixas Acústicas para Estantes CS20 & CS10 Center Channel Loudspeakers Enceintes Centrale Altavoz de Canal Central Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher Diffusore per Canale Centrale Caixa Acústica do Canal Central TSi SER EI S2 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.comPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 3 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This product was designed and manufactured to meet strict quality and safety standards. There are, however, some installation and operation precautions which you should be particularly aware of. 1. Read Instructions. All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the system is operated. 2. Retain Instructions. The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3. Heed Warnings. All warnings on the appliances and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4. Follow Instructions. All operating and use instructions should be followed. 5. Cleaning. Unplug the appliance from wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. 6. Attachments. Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. 7. Water and Moisture. Do not use these appliances near water—for example, near a bath tub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 8. Accessories. Do not place these appliances on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The audio/video products may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the products. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the appliances. Any mounting of the appliances should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use mounting accessories recommended by the manufacturer. 9. Ventilation. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the appliances and to protect them from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the products on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. 10. Power Sources. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking labels. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. 11. Grounding or Polarization. This product is equipped with polarized alternating-current line plugs (plugs having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. 12. Power Cord Protection. Power-supply cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against it, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliances. 13. Lightning. For added protection for this audio/video product during a lightning storm, or when it is left un-attended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. 14. Power Lines. An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of over-head power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. 15. Overloading. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. 16. Object and Liquid Entry. Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this audio/video product. 17. Servicing. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 18. Damage Requiring Service. Unplug this product from wall outlets and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged. b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product. c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation. e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance— this indicates a need for service. 19. Replacement Parts. When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or that the parts have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. 20. Safety Check. Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the products are in proper operating condition. 21. Carts and Stands. The appliances should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 22. This product is not intended for use outdoors. SAFE LIMITS OF OPERATION Polk Audio specifies the recommended amplification range for each of its passive (non-amplified) loudspeakers. Typically that specification will be expressed as a range of power such as 20-200 Watts (per channel). It is important to understand what those numbers mean when choosing a receiver or amplifier for your Polk loudspeakers. The lower number indicates the lowest continuous rated power that will yield acceptable performance in a typical listening environment. The higher number indicates the highest per channel power that should be used with your Polk speakers. That number should not be confused with a “Power Handling” specification and it does not imply that the speaker will safely handle that full amount of power on a long-term basis. We specify a wide range of power ratings because not all electronics manufacturers use the same method for rating power. In fact, high quality lower-rated amplifiers sound better and play louder than low quality units with higher power rating. Automobile horsepower is good analogy. Your car probably has far more horsepower than it needs for your daily commute and is likely capable of going well over 120mph (190km/hr). Having that extra power is good for on-ramp acceleration and danger avoidance (like getting away from brain-eating zombies) but that doesn’t mean that it is advisable to operate your car on North American highways at full power and maximum speed for an extended period of time. Just ask your local state trooper if you are in doubt. Similarly, we recommend using amplifiers and receivers with rated power above the Power Handling limits of our speakers because having extra power available for short term peaks is conducive to better sound quality, maximum dynamic range and effortless high volume output. But we strongly urge you not to use the full power of your amplifier or receiver for daily listening. Loudspeakers can be damaged when an amplifier, regardless of its wattage, is made to play at higher listening levels than its power can clearly produce. Operation at this level can result in very high levels of audible distortion originating in the amplifier, which can add a harsh, gritty sound to your listening material. If you hear distortion—turn the volume down or risk damaging your speakers. You can damage just about any speaker, regardless of power rating, if you drive an amplifier to or beyond the point of distortion. PRODUCT DISPOSAL Certain international, national and/or local laws and/or regulations may apply regarding the disposal of this product. For further detailed information, please contact the retailer where you purchased this product or the Polk Audio Importer/Distributor in your country. A listing of Polk Audio Importer/Distributors can be found on the Polk Audio website www.polkaudio.com or by contacting Polk Audio at: 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA—Phone: +1 410 358-3600. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE OR SERVICE If, after following the hookup directions,you experience difficulty, please double-check all wire connections. Should you isolate the problem to the speaker,contact the authorized Polk Audio dealer where you made your purchase, orcontact Polk Audio Customer Service 800-377-7655 (M-F, 9-6 EST, US & Canada only) orvia email polkcs@polkaudio.com. Outside the US & Canada,call 410-358-3600. More detailed information—including audio how-to articles,FAQs, and online manuals are available on our award-winning website www.polkaudio.com/home. Complete mounting instructionscome with each stand. TAKE INVENTORY Inside each speaker container, you should find the following: 1. One TSi floorstanding speaker, two bookshelf speakers or one center channel speaker 2. TSi Manual 3. Registration Card 4. Adhesive-backed rubber pads— (8 for bookshelf speakers or 4 center channel speaker) 5. Wall Mount Template (for TSi100 bookshelf speakers only) Important Note: If anything is missing or damaged, or if your speaker fails to operate, notify Polk Audio Customer Support Services immediately at 800-377-7655. ENGLISH4 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES Este producto ha sido diseñado y fabricado para satisfacer estrictas normas de calidad y seguridad. Sin embargo, hay ciertas precauciones de operación e instalación que usted debe tener en cuenta en particular. 1. Lisez toutes les consignes de sécurité et d’utilisation avant d’utiliser cet appareil. 2. Conservez les instructions de sécurité et d’opération pour référence future. 3. Observez les consignes contenues dans ce manuel et affichées sur le produit. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions d’opération et d’utilisation 5. Nettoyage. Débranchez l’appareil avant de le nettoyer. N’utilisez jamais de nettoyant liquide ou en aérosol. Utilisez un chiffon humide. 6. Accessoires. N’utilisez jamais d’accessoires non recommandés par le fabricant. Ils pourraient provoquer un danger. 7. Eau et humidité. N’utilisez jamais cet appareil près d’une source d’eau ou d’humidité - par exemple près d’une baignoire, d’un évier, d’un lavabo ou dans un sous-sol humide ou près d’une piscine ou autre source d’eau. 8. Accessoires. Ne placez jamais ce produit audio-visuel sur un charriot, socle, meuble ou support instable. Le produit pourrait tomber, s’endommager et/ou blesser grièvement un enfant ou un adulte. Utilisez uniquement un charriot, socle, meuble ou support spéci fié par le fabricant ou vendu avec le produit. Toute installation du produit doit se faire selon les directives du fabricant et en utilisant des accessoires recommandés par le fabricant. 9. Aération. Les ouvertures et les fentes situées sur le boîtier préviennent la surchauffe et assurent la fiabilité du produit et ne doivent jamais être couvertes ou obstruées. Elles ne doivent jamais être obstruées en plaçant le produit sur un lit, un sofa, un tapis ou autre surface similaire. Ce produit ne doit jamais être installé sur ou à proximité d’un radiateur ou d’un registre de chaleur. Ce produit ne doit pas être installé dans un meuble, une bibliothèque ou un bâti à moins d’assurer une aération adéquate ou d’observer les directives du fabricant. 10. Alimentation CA. Ce produit ne doit être utilisé qu’avec le type d’alimentation CA spécifié sur l’étiquette apposée au produit. Si vous ne connaissez pas le type d’alimentation utilisé dans votre région, communiquez avec le revendeur du produit ou avec votre fournisseur local d’électricité. 11. Mise à la terre et polarisation. Ce produit est muni d’une fiche d’alimentation CA polarisée (une des deux broches étant plus large que l’autre). Cette fiche ne peut être in sérée dans la prise de courant que d’une seule façon. C’est un dispositif de sécurité. Si vous ne parvenez pas à bien insérer la fiche dans la prise de courant, renversezla. Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à insérer la fiche dans la prise de courant, faites remplacer la prise obsolète par un électricien. Ne contournez jamais le dispositif de sécurité de mise à la terre de la fiche polarisée. 12. Protection du cordon d’alimentation CA. Les cordons d'alimentation CA doivent être disposés hors des zones passantes où ils risquent d’être écrasés, pincés ou endom magées, particulièrement à proximité des prises de courant, des blocs multiprises et à la sortie de l’appareil. 13. Foudre et surtension. Pour assurer la protection de ce produit contre la foudre ou la surtension lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé pour de longues périodes, débranchez son cordon d’alimentation de la prise de courant CA et déconnectez le système de câble ou d’antenne. 14. Lignes électriques. Une antenne extérieure ne doit pas être installée à proximité de lignes électriques aériennes ou autres dispositifs électriques ou d’éclairage sur lesquels elle pourrait tomber. Lors de l’installation d’une antenne extérieure, il est impératif de vousassurer que cette dernière ne pourra jamais entrer en contact avec de tels disposi tifs ou lignes électriques. Il pourrait y avoir danger de mort. 15. Surcharge. Ne surchargez jamais les prises de courant, les rallonges ou les blocs multiprises ; cela pourrait constituer un risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique. 16. Objets et liquides. N’insérez jamais d’objets dans les ouvertures de ce produit. Ils pourraient entrer en contact avec des points de voltage dangereux ou provoquer des courts-circuits ; cela pourrait provoquer un risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique. Ne renversez jamais deliquides sur le produit. 17. Service. Ne tentez jamais de réparer ce produit vousmême car ouvrir son boîtier ou en retirer le couvercle pourrait vous exposer à des voltages dangereux ou à d’autres dangers. Confiez tout service à un technicien qualifié. 18. Dommages et service. Débranchez l’appareil de la prise CA et contactez un réparateur qualifié lorsque : a. le cordon d’alimentation a été endommagé. b. un objet ou du liquide s’est introduit dans le produit. c. le produit a été exposé à la pluie ou à de l’eau. d. le produit ne fonctionne pas normalement selon les instructions du fabricant. Réglez uniquement les contrôles spécifiés dans le manuel de l’utilisateur car le réglage inapproprié de certains autres contrôles pourrait endommager le produit et requérir l’intervention d’un réparateur qualifié pour le remettre en ordree. le produit a subi une chute ou son boîtier a été endommagé. e. le produit ne semble pas fonctionner normalement — ce qui indique la nécessité de service. 19. Pièces de rechange - Lorsque des pièces de rechange sont requises, assurez-vous que le technicien de service utilise des pièces de rechange spécifiées par le fabricant ou des pièces ayant les mêmes caractéristiques que les pièces d'origine. Des substitutions non autoriséesrisquent de provoquer un incendie, des chocs électriques ou d’autres dangers. 20. Contrôle de sécurité - Après chaque contrôle technique ou réparation de cet appareil, demandez au technicien d'effectuer un contrôle pour assurer que l’appareil est en bon état de fonctionnement. 21. Chariots et socles. Les appareils doivent être utilisés uniquement avec des chariots ou des socles recommandés par le fabricant. Un appareil sur chariot doit être déplacé avec soin. Des arrêts soudains, une poussée excessive ou une surface inégale pourraient provoquer le renversement du chariot avec risque de blessures. 22. Ce produit n’est pas conçu pour utilisation extérieur. LIMITES D’OPÉRATION Polk Audio spécifie la gamme de puissance d’amplification recommandée pour chacun de ses haut-parleurs non amplifiés. Cette spécification est typiquement exprimée en watts par canal (par ex. 20-200 W/canal). Il est important de bien comprendre la signification de ces chiffres avant de choisir un amplificateur ou un récepteur pour vos haut-parleurs. Le premier chiffre indique la puissance nominale minimum requise pour assurer une performance convenable dans une pièce normale. Le deuxième chiffre indique la puissance nominale maximum admissible par vos haut-parleurs—ce chiffre ne doit pas être confondu avec la spécification de «capacité de puissance» et n’implique pas que le haut-parleur peut soutenir cette puissance de façon continue sans risque d’endommagement. Nous spécifions une gamme de puissance d’amplification étendue parce que les fabricants de composants électroniques n’utilisent pas toujours la même méthode pour déterminer la puissance admissible. En fait, les amplificateurs moins puissants de qualité supérieure donnent un meilleur rendement que les amplificateurs plus puissants de qualité inférieure. L’automobile et les chevaux-vapeur sont une bonne analogie. Votre automobile a beaucoup plus de chevaux-vapeur que ceux requis par son utilisation quotidienne, vous permettant probablement d’atteindre les 190 km/h ou plus! Vous ne roulez pas pour autant à fond la caisse en tout temps (du moins nous l’espérons). Cependant, cette réserve de puissance vous permet de bien accélérer sur les rampes d’accès, d’éviter les accidents et de doubler sécuritairement. C’est pour cette même raison que nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un amplificateur ou un récepteur d’une puissance nominale plus élevée que la capacité de puissance spécifiée pour vos haut-parleurs. En effet, cette réserve de puissance leur permettra de reproduire les crêtes sonores momentanées sans effort et sans distorsion, assurant une gamme dynamique maximale et une performance optimale, même à très haut volume. Il est quand même fortement déconseillé d’écouter votre chaîne audio «à fond la caisse» en tout temps. Un haut-parleur peut être endommagé lorsqu’un amplificateur, quelle que soit sa puissance, est poussé au delà de ses limites. L’amplificateur surchargé génère alors un niveau élevé de distorsion audible, le son devenant rauque et éraillé. Si vous entendez de la distorsion, baissez le volume sinon vous risquez d’endommager vos haut-parleurs. Un haut-parleur, quelle que soit sa capacité de puissance, risque d’être endommagé lorsque l’amplificateur est poussé au delà de ses limites de distorsion. RECUPERATION DU PRODUIT Certaines lois ou certains règlements internationaux, nationaux et/ou région-aux pourraient s’appliquer à la récupération de ce produit. Pour plus d’infor-mation, communiquez avec le revendeur de ce produit ou avec l’impor-tateur/distributeur de ce produit dans votre pays. Vous trouverez la liste des importateurs/distri-buteurs des produits Polk Audio sur le site www.polkaudio.com ou en communiquant avec Polk Audio: 5610 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA—Tél.: +1 410 358-3600. SERVICE OU ASSISTANCE TECHNIQUE Si, après avoir suivi toutes les instructions, vous éprouvez des difficultés, vérifiez toutes vos connexions. Si vous en concluez que le problème est relié au haut-parleur, communiquez avec votre revendeur Polk Audio ou contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk Audio au 1-800-377-7655 (L-V, 9-18, HNE, Canada et É.-U. seulement). À l’extérieur des É.-U. et du Canada, composez le 410-358-3600. Vous pouvez aussi nous contacter par courriel à l’adresse: polkcs@polkaudio.com. Pour plus d’information—incluant des chroniques pratiques, des FAQ et des manuels d’utilisation en ligne, visitez notre site web primé: www.polkaudio.com/home. INVENTAIRE Chaque boîte de haut-parleur devrait contenir: 1. Une enceinte colonne TSi, deux enceintes d’étagère ou une enceinte centrale 2. Un manuel TSi 3. Une carte d’enregistrement 4. Coussinets de caoutchouc autoadhésifs — (8 pour les enceintes d’étagère ou 4 pour une enceinte centrale) 5. Gabarit pour installation murale (pour les enceintes d’étagère TSi100 seulement) Note Importante: Si vous constatez des dommages ou l’absence de pièces, ou si votre enceinte ne fonctionne pas, contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk Audio au 800-377-7655. FRANÇAISPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 5 INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD Este producto ha sido diseñado y fabricado para satisfacer estrictas normas de calidad y seguridad. Sin embargo, hay ciertas precauciones de operación e instalación que usted debe tener en cuenta en particular. 1. Lea las instrucciones. Todas las instrucciones de seguridad y operación deben leerse antes de operar el sistema. 2. Guarde las instrucciones. Las instrucciones de seguridad y operación deben guardarse para poder consultarlas en el futuro. 3. Respete las advertencias. Todas las advertencias escritas en los aparatos y en las instrucciones de operación deben respetarse. 4. Siga las instrucciones. Todas las instrucciones de operación y uso deben seguirse. 5. Limpieza. Antes de limpiar el aparato, desenchúfelo del tomacorriente. No use limpiadores líquidos ni en aerosol. Limpie el producto con un paño húmedo. 6. Agregados. No utilice agregados que el fabricante del producto no haya recomendado, porque pueden causar peligros. 7. Agua y humedad. No use el aparato cerca del agua; por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, lavabo, fregadero de cocina o lavandería, en un subterráneo húmedo, ni cerca de una piscina o lugares similares. 8. Accesorios. No coloque el aparato en carritos, pedestales, trípodes, soportes o mesas inestables. El producto de audio/video puede caerse y causar lesiones graves a niños o adultos y daños graves al producto. Use el aparato solamente con el carrito, pedestal, trípode, soporte o mesa recomendado por el fabricante o vendido con el aparato. Todo montaje del aparato se debe hacer siguiendo las instrucciones del fabricante y con los accesorios de montaje recomendados por el fabricante. 9. Ventilación. Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja son para ventilar el aparato, asegurar su funcionamiento confiable y evitar que se sobrecaliente; por lo tanto, no se deben ni bloquear ni cubrir. Las aberturas no se deben bloquear nunca poniendo el aparato en una cama, un sofá, una alfombra u otra superficie similar. Este producto no se debe colocar nunca sobre un radiador o una rejilla de calefacción. Este producto no se debe instalar en una estructura empotrada, tal como una estantería o un librero, a menos que se le dé ventilación apropiada o se respeten las instrucciones del fabricante. 10. Fuentes de alimentación. Este producto debe funcionar conectado exclusivamente a una fuente de alimentación del tipo indicado en sus etiquetas. Si no está seguro del tipo de fuente de alimentación de su casa, consulte al distribuidor de aparatos o a la compañía local de electricidad. 11. (Sólo América del Norte) Conexión a tierra o polarización. Este producto viene equipado con enchufes de línea de alimentación de corriente alterna polarizados (una pata más ancha que la otra). Como medida de seguridad, este enchufe entra en el tomacorriente de una manera solamente. Si no puede insertar completamente el enchufe, déle vuelta. Si aun así no entra, consulte a un electricista para que cambie el tomacorriente obsoleto. No anule la seguridad implícita en el enchufe polarizado. 12. Protección del cordón de alimentación. Encamine el cordón de alimentación de manera que sea poco probable que sea pisado o aplastado por objetos que se le coloquen encima o se le apoyen, en particular cerca del enchufe, cerca del tomacorriente y en el punto en que el cordón sale del aparato. 13. Rayos. Para aumentar la protección de este producto de audio/video durante una tormenta eléctrica, o cuando se deje solo o no se use durante largos períodos de tiempo, desenchúfelo del tomacorriente y desconecte la antena o el sistema de cable. Esto evitará daños al producto causados por rayos o subidas de voltaje. 14. Líneas de alta tensión. El sistema de antena exterior no debe colocarse cerca de líneas de alta tensión suspendidas u otros circuitos de alimentación o luz eléctrica, ni donde al caer pueda hacer contacto con tales líneas o circuitos de alimentación. Cuando instale un sistema de antena externa, debe tener sumo cuidado de evitar tocar tales circuitos o líneas de alta tensión, pues tal contacto puede ser mortal. 15. Sobrecarga. No sobrecargue los tomacorrientes ni las extensiones, pues esto puede dar como resultado un peligro de incendio o descarga eléctrica. 16. Entrada de objetos y líquidos. Nunca meta objetos de ningún tipo en este producto a través de las aberturas, pues pueden hacer contacto con puntos de voltajes peligrosos o hacer cortocircuitos que podrían causar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica. Nunca derrame líquidos de ningún tipo sobre este producto de audio/video. 17. Servicio. No intente hacerle servicio a este producto usted mismo, pues abrirlo o quitarle las cubiertas puede exponerlo a usted a voltajes peligrosos u otros peligros. Encargue todo servicio al personal de servicio calificado. 18. Daños que requieren servicio. Desenchufe el producto y encargue el servicio al personal de servicio calificado cuando: a. Se haya dañado el enchufe o el cordón de alimentación. b. Hayan caído líquidos u objetos dentro del aparato. c. El producto haya sido expuesto a la lluvia o a la humedad. d. El producto haya dejado de funcionar normalmente a pesar de que se hayan seguido las instrucciones. Ajuste sólo los controles mencionados en las instrucciones de operación, pues ajustar incorrectamente otros controles puede causar daños y, a menudo, restablecer el funcionamiento normal del producto requerirá un extenso trabajo técnico calificado. e. El producto se haya dejado caer o la caja haya sido dañada. f. El producto manifieste un cambio notable de rendimiento; esto indica la necesidad de servicio. 19. Piezas de repuesto. Cuando se requieran piezas de repuesto, asegúrese de que el técnico de servicio haya utilizado las piezas de repuesto especificadas por el fabricante o que las piezas tengan las mismas características que la pieza original. Las sustituciones no autorizadas pueden dar como resultado un incendio, una descarga eléctrica u otros peligros. 20. Revisión de seguridad. Al terminar cualquier servicio o reparación de este producto, pídale al técnico de servicio que lleve a cabo verificaciones de seguridad para determinar que el producto esté en buenas condiciones de funcionamiento. 21. Carritos y pedestales. El aparato se debe utilizar solamente con el carrito o pedestal recomendado por el fabricante. Las combinaciones de aparato y carrito deben moverse cuidadosamente. Parar repentinamente, ejercer demasiada fuerza y pasar por superficies desniveladas puede hacer que la combinación de aparato y carrito se vuelque. Tenga cuidado cuando mueva la combinación de aparato y carrito para evitar lesiones causadas por volcamiento. 22. Este producto no es para usar al aire libre. LÍES SEGUROS DE OPERACIÓN Polk Audio especifica el intervalo de amplificación recomendado para sus altavoces pasivos (no amplificados). Por lo general, la especificación se expresa como un cierto intervalo de potencia, tal como 20 a 200 W (por canal). Es importante entender lo que estos números significan cuando se escoge un receptor o un amplificador para los altavoces Polk Audio. El número inferior indica la potencia nominal continua mínima que produce un rendimiento aceptable en un ambiente acústico normal. El número superior indica la potencia máxima por canal que se debe dar a los altavoces Polk Audio. Este número no debe confundirse con la “administración de potencia” y no implica que el altavoz administre indefinidamente con seguridad tal potencia máxima. Especificamos una amplia gama de valores nominales de potencia porque no todos los fabricantes de aparatos electrónicos utilizan el mismo método para establecer el valor nominal de potencia. De hecho, los amplificadores de alta calidad con valor nominal de potencia bajo suenan mejor y más fuerte que las unidades de baja calidad con valor nominal de potencia alto. La potencia de los automóviles en caballos de fuerza es una buena analogía. Su automóvil probablemente tiene muchos más caballos de fuerza de los que necesita para ir diariamente al trabajo y es capaz de desplazarse a velocidades de más de 120 mph (190 kph). Tener la potencia adicional es bueno para la aceleración en las rampas de entrada a las autopistas y para evitar el peligro, pero no significa que sea aconsejable conducir el automóvil por la carretera a toda velocidad y potencia durante largos períodos de tiempo. No lo es. Si lo duda, pregúntele a su mecánico local o a la policía. De manera similar, recomendamos que use amplificadores y receptores con valor de potencia nominal mayor que los límites de administración de potencia de nuestros altavoces, porque tener potencia adicional para máximos de poca duración conduce a mejor calidad de sonido, máxima gama dinámica y salida de alto volumen sin esfuerzo. Pero le recomendamos enfáticamente que no aplique a diario a sus altavoces la potencia máxima de su amplificador o receptor. Los altavoces se pueden dañar cuando se hace funcionar un amplificador, independientemente de su potencia en vatios, a más volumen del que puede producir con claridad. El funcionamiento a este volumen puede producir altos niveles de distorsión audible originada en el amplificador, lo cual puede agregar un sonido discordante y arenoso a lo que se está escuchando. Si oye distorsión, baje el volumen o arriésguese a dañar los altavoces. Casi cualquier altavoz se puede dañar, independientemente de su valor nominal de potencia, si se sube el volumen del amplificador o el receptor hasta la distorsión y más. ELIMINACION DEL PRODUCTO Es posible que haya leyes y/o reglamentos internacionales, nacionales y/o locales sobre la eliminación de este producto. Para obtener información más detallada, comuníquese con el distribuidor a quien le compró este producto de Polk Audio o al importador o distribuidor en su país. Puede obtener una lista de importadores y distri-buidores de Polk Audio en el sitio Web de Polk Audio, www.polkaudio.com, o comuni-cándose con Polk Audio: 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA. Teléfono: +1 410 358-3600. ASISTENCIA O SERVICIO TECNICO Si después de seguir las instrucciones de conexión usted sigue teniendo dificultades, vuelva a comprobar todas las conexiones de cables. Si logra aislar el problema en el altavoz, comuníquese con el distribuidor autorizado de Polk Audio donde compró el altavoz o con el Servicio al Cliente de Polk Audio llamando al 800-377-7655 (de lunes a viernes de 9 a.m. a 6 p.m., hora estándar del Este, sólo en EE.UU.) o por correo electrónico a polkcs@polkaudio.com. Fuera de los EE.UU., llame al 410-358-3600. Hay artículos sobre cómo hacer las cosas en audio, preguntas frecuentes y manuales en línea en nuestro galardonado sitio Web www.polkaudio.com/home. HAGA INVENTARIO Dentro de cada contenedor de altavoz, debe haber lo siguiente: 1. Un altavoz TSi de piso, dos altavoces de estantería o un altavoz de canal central 2. Un manual TSi 3. Una tarjeta de registro 4. Almohadillas adhesivas de goma (8 para altavoces de estantería o 4 para altavoces de canal central) 5. Una plantilla de montaje en la pared (sólo altavoces de estantería TSi100) Nota importante: Si alguna pieza falta o está dañada, o si el altavoz no funciona, comuníquese inmediatamente con Servicios de Apoyo al Cliente, llamando al 800-377-7655. ESPAÑOL6 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Dieses Produkt wurde nach den strengsten Qualitäts- und Sicherheitsnormen entworfen und hergestellt. Sie sollten aber bei der Installation und beim Betrieb einige Sicherheitshinweise beachten. 1. Lesen Sie die Anleitung durch. Sie sollten vor Inbetriebnahme des Systems alle Sicherheits- und Betriebshinweise lesen. 2. Heben Sie die Anleitung auf. Sie sollten die Sicherheits- und Betriebshinweise aufheben, um in Zukunft auf sie zugreifen zu können. 3. Beachten Sie die Warnungen. Alle Warnungen an den Geräten und in den Bedienungsanleitungen müssen befolgt werden. 4. Folgen Sie den Anweisungen. Alle Betriebsanweisungen müssen befolgt werden. 5. Reinigung. Ziehen Sie vor Reinigung des Geräts den Stecker aus der Steckdose. Verwenden Sie keine flüssigen Reinigungsmittel oder Sprays. Benutzen Sie zur Reinigung ein feuchtes Tuch. 6. Zubehör. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich vom Hersteller empfohlenes Zubehör, da anderes Zubehör Gefahren hervorrufen könnte. 7. Wasser und Feuchtigkeit. Verwenden Sie diese Geräte nicht in der Nähe von Wasser – beispielsweise nahe einer Badewanne, einem Waschbecken, einem Spülbecken, einem Waschkessel, in einem feuchten Keller, in der Nähe eines Swimmingpools usw. 8. Zubehör. Stellen Sie diese Geräte nicht auf einen Wagen, einen Ständer, ein Stativ, eine Halterung oder einen Tisch, wenn diese nicht stabil sind. Die Audio-/VideoProdukte könnten sonst herunterfallen und bei Kindern oder Erwachsenen schwere Verletzungen verursachen sowie die Produkte schwer beschädigen. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Wagen, Ständer, Stative, Halterungen oder Tische, die vom Hersteller empfohlen oder mit den Geräten verkauft wurden. Die Befestigung der Geräte sollte entspechend den Herstelleranweisungen erfolgen und es müssen vom Hersteller empfohlene Befestigungsteile verwendet werden. 9. Lüftung. Die Schlitze und Öffnungen am Gehäuse dienen der Lüftung und sichern den zuverlässigen Betrieb der Geräte und schützen sie vor Überhitzung. Deshalb dürfen diese Öffnungen nicht blockiert oder verdeckt werden. Man darf diese Öffnungen nie dadurch blockieren, dass man die Produkte auf ein Bett, ein Sofa, einen Teppich oder eine ähnliche Oberfläche stellt. Dieses Produkt sollte nie in der Nähe von Heizkörpern oder Warmlufteintrittsöffnungen aufgestellt werden. Dieses Produkt sollte nie in ein Bücherregal oder ein Rack eingebaut werden, es sei denn, es wurde für ausreichende Lüftung gesorgt oder die Herstelleranweisungen wurden befolgt. 10. Stromversorgung. Dieses Produkt darf nur mit der auf den Etiketten angegebenen Stromversorgung betrieben werden. Wenn Sie Fragen über die Stromversorgung in Ihrem Heim haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an einen Fachhändler oder das örtliche Stromversorgungsunternehmen. 11. Erdung oder Polarisierung (nur für Nordamerika). Dieses Produkt verfügt über polarisierte Wechselstrom-Stecker (eine Klinke ist dicker als die andere). Dieser Stecker passt nur auf eine Weise in die Steckdose. Dies stellt eine Sicherheitsfunktion dar. Wenn Sie den Stecker nicht voll einstecken können, sollten Sie ihn umdrehen. Wenn der Stecker immer noch nicht passt, sollten Sie die veraltete Steckdose durch einen Elektriker ersetzen lassen. Sie sollten die Sicherheitsfunktion des polarisierten Steckers nicht umgehen. 12. Schutz des Netzkabels. Das Netzkabel sollte so verlegt werden, dass es weder belastet noch durch darauf oder dagegen platzierte Objekte geknickt wird, vor allem bei Steckern, Zusatzsteckdosen und beim Ausgang aus dem Gerät. 13. Blitzschutz. Um dieses Audio-/Videoprodukt während eines Gewitters oder längerer Perioden zu schützen, in denen es unbeaufsichtigt ist und nicht benutzt wird, sollten Sie den Stecker herausziehen und das Antennen- oder Kabelsystem trennen. Dies verhindert durch Blitzschlag und Überspannungen verursachte Schäden am Produkt. 14. Stromleitungen. Ein Außenantennensystem sollte sich nicht in der Nähe von Stromleitungen oder anderen Stromkabeln befinden, oder an Stellen, von denen es auf solche Stromquellen fallen könnte. Bei der Installation einer Außenantenne sollte man extrem vorsichtig sein, keine Stromleitungen oder Stromkreise zu berühren, da dies tödliche Folgen haben könnte. 15. Überlastung. Überlasten Sie Steckdosen und Verlängerungskabel nicht, da dies zu Feuer oder Stromschlag führen könnte. 16. Eindringen von Objekten oder Flüssigkeiten. Schieben Sie nie Objekte durch Öffnungen in das Produkt, da diese unter Spannung stehende Teile berühren oder Kurzschlüsse erzeugen könnten, die zu Feuer oder Stromschlag führen. Lassen Sie nie irgendwelche Flüssigkeiten in dieses Audio-/Videoprodukt eindringen. 17. Wartung. Versuchen Sie nicht, dieses Produkt selbst zu warten, da Sie nach dem Öffnen und Entfernen der Abdeckungen gefährlichen Spannungen und anderen Gefahren ausgesetzt wären. Lassen Sie alle Wartungen von geschulten Kundendiensttechnikern durchführen. 18. Schäden, die eine Wartung erfordern. Trennen Sie das Produkt vom Stromnetz und lassen Sie unter folgenden Bedingungen eine Wartung von geschulten Kundendiensttechnikern durchführen: a. Wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschädigt ist. b. Wenn Flüssigkeit in das Produkt eingedrungen ist oder Objekte hineingefallen sind. c. Wenn das Produkt Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt war. d. Wenn das Produkt nicht richtig funktioniert, obwohl Sie der Betriebsanleitung folgen. Stellen Sie nur die von der Betriebsanleitung behandelten Regler ein, da eine Fehleinstellung anderer Regler zu Schäden führen kann und dann oft umfangreiche Reparaturen durch einen Kundendiensttechniker nötig werden. e. Wenn das Produkt fallengelassen oder das Gehäuse beschädigt wurde. f. Wenn sich die Leistung des Produkts deutlich ändert – deutet dies daraufhin, dass eine Wartung nötig ist. 19. Ersatzteile. Wenn Ersatzteile benötigt werden, müssen Sie sicherstellen, dass der Kundendiensttechniker vom Hersteller empfohlene oder gleichwertige Ersatzteile verwendet. Ein unzulässiger Austausch kann zu Feuer, Stromschlag oder anderen Gefährdungen führen. 20. Sicherheitsüberprüfung. Nach Abschluss einer Wartung oder Reparatur dieses Produkts sollten Sie den Kundendiensttechniker bitten, eine Sicherheitsüberprüfung durchzuführen, um festzustellen, ob das Produkt betriebsbereit ist. 21. Wagen und Ständer. Das Gerät sollte nur mit einem vom Hersteller empfohlenen Wagen oder Ständer verwendet werden. Gerät und Wagen sollten immer vorsichtig bewegt werden. Schnelles Anhalten, zuviel Kraftanwendung und unebene Oberflächen können dazu führen, dass Gerät und Wagen umfallen. Beim Schieben des Wagens/Geräts sollten Sie vorsichtig sein, damit Wagen und Gerät nicht umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. 22. Dieses Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz im Freien vorgesehen. SICHERE BETRIEBSGRENZWERTE Polk Audio legt für jeden seiner passiven (nicht verstärkten) Lautsprecher einen empfohlenen Verstärkungsbereich fest. Normalerweise wird dieser Wert als Leistungsbereich ausgedrückt, wie etwa 20- 200 W (pro Kanal). Es ist wichtig, dass Sie bei der Auswahl eines Receivers oder Verstärkers für Ihre PolkLautsprecher verstehen, was diese Zahlen bedeuten. Die niedrigere Zahl ist die niedrigste Dauerleistung, die in einer typischen Hörumgebung einen akzeptablen Sound bietet. Die höhere Zahl verweist auf die höchste Leistung (pro Kanal), die mit Ihren Polk-Lautsprechern verwendet werden sollte. Diese Zahl sollte nicht mit der Belastbarkeit verwechselt werden und sagt nicht aus, dass der Lautsprecher diese Leistung langfristig verkraften kann. Wir geben einen breiten Belastungsbereich an, da nicht alle Elektronikhersteller die gleichen Messmethoden verwenden. Hochwertige Verstärker mit niedriger Belastbarkeit klingen sogar besser und lauter als minderwertige Verstärker mit hoher Belastbarkeit. Die PS-Leistung eines Autos wäre ein guter Vergleich. Ihr Auto hat wahrscheinlich viel mehr PS als für die tägliche Fahrt zur Arbeit nötig ist und könnte mehr als 190 km/h erreichen. Diese Leistung ist für die Beschleunigung bei der Einfahrt in die Autobahn und bei der Vermeidung von Gefahrensituationen nützlich, aber es ist nicht empfehlenswert, längere Zeit mit Volltempo zu fahren. Wirklich. Fragen Sie einfach Ihren Automechaniker, wenn Sie das nicht glauben. Wir empfehlen analog dazu Verstärker und Receiver mit einer Leistung, die über der Belastbarkeit unserer Lautsprecher liegt, da die für kurze Leistungsspitzen verfügbare zusätzliche Leistung eine bessere Klangqualität, einen maximalen Dynamikbereich und eine mühelose Wiedergabe hoher Lautstärken ermöglicht. Aber Sie sollten auf keinen Fall die volle Leistung Ihres Verstärkers oder Receivers für den Dauerbetrieb verwenden. Wenn ein Verstärker, ungeachtet seiner Leistung in Watt, lautere Musik abspielt, als er ohne Verzerrung produzieren kann, kann dies die Lautsprecher beschädigen. Bei einem Betrieb mit dieser Lautstärke kann der Verstärker sehr hohe, hörbare Verzerrungen erzeugen, welche die Musik rau und grob klingen lassen können. Wenn Sie Verzerrungen hören, sollten Sie die Lautstärke reduzieren, damit Ihre Lautsprecher nicht beschädigt werden. Sie können praktisch jeden Lautsprecher (ungeachtet der Belastbarkeit) beschädigen, wenn Sie einen Verstärker bis zu dem Punkt aufdrehen, wo Verzerrungen eintreten, oder noch darüber. ENTSORGUNG Die Entsorgung dieses Produkts kann bestimmten internation-alen, nationalen und/oder örtlichen Gesetzen und/oder Vorschriften unterliegen. Detaillierte Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie von dem Fachhändler, bei dem Sie dieses Produkt gekauft haben, oder vom Polk Audio-Importeur/Vertrieb in Ihrem Land. Eine Liste von Importeuren/ Vertriebsfirmen für Polk Audio erhalten Sie auf der Polk Audio-Website www.polkaudio.com oder von Polk Audio, 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA – Telefon: +1 410 358-3600. TECHNISCHER KUNDENDIENST UND SERVICE Wenn Sie Probleme haben, nachdem Sie den Installationsanweisungen gefolgt sind, sollten Sie alle Kabelverbindungen nochmals prüfen. Wenn Sie zu dem Schluss kommen, dass das Problem am Lautsprecher liegt, kontak-tieren Sie bitte den autorisierten Polk Audio-Händler, bei dem Sie den Lautsprecher gekauft haben, oder rufen den Polk Audio-Kundendienst unter 800-377-7655 (M-F, 9-18 Uhr USOstküstenzeit, nur USA) an oder senden eine E-Mail an polkcs@polkaudio.com. Von außerhalb der USA rufen Sie +1 410-358-3600 an.Detaillierte Anweisungen, Antworten auf häufig gestellte Fragen und Online-Handbücher finden Sie auf der preisgekrönten Website www.polkaudio.com/home. INHALT In jeder Lautsprecherpackung sollten Sie Folgendes finden: 1. Ein TSi-Standlautsprecher, zwei Regallautsprecher oder ein Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher 2. TSi-Betriebsanleitung 3. Registrierungskarte 4. Selbstklebenden Gummifüßchen – (8 für Regallautsprecher oder 4 für Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher) 5. Wandbefestigungsschablone (nur für TSi100-Regallautsprecher) Wichtiger Hinweis: Falls Sie Schäden oder fehlende Teile bemerken, oder Ihr Lautsprecher nicht funktioniert, kontaktieren Sie bitte sofort den Polk Audio-Kundendienst unter +800-377-7655 (nur USA und Kanada, ansonsten +410-358-3600). DEUTSCHPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 7 ISTRUZIONI IMPORTANTI DI SICUREZZA Questo prodotto è stato progettato e costruito in conformità a rigorosi standard di qualità e sicurezza; tuttavia occorre tenere presenti alcune precauzioni relative all’installazione e all’uso. 1. Prima di mettere in funzione l’impianto, leggere per intero le istruzioni per l’uso e la sicurezza. 2. Conservare le istruzioni per l’uso e la sicurezza. 3. Attenersi alle avvertenze apposte all’apparecchio e a quelle riportate nelle istruzioni per l’uso. 4. Seguire scrupolosamente tutte le istr 5. Pulizia: usare un panno umido per pulire l’apparecchio; prima di pulirlo scollegarlo dalla presa di corrente. Non usare né detergenti liquidi né aerosol. 6. Accessori: non utilizzare accessori non raccomandati dal produttore, in quanto possono creare pericoli. 7. Acqua e umidità: non usare l’apparecchio vicino all’acqua, ad esempio presso vasche da bagno, catini, lavandini, piscine, scantinati bagnati o luoghi simili. 8. Accessori: non collocare l’apparecchio su carrelli, sostegni, treppiedi, staffe, tavoli che non ne assicurino la stabilità; se cade, un apparecchio audio o video può causare gravi lesioni personali o danni alle cose. Usare solo una base raccomandata dal produttore o venduta insieme con l’apparecchio. Per qualsiasi operazione di fissaggio si devono seguire le istruzioni del produttore e adoperare gli accessori raccomandati. 9. Ventilazione: l’apparecchio ha varie feritoie per la ventilazione che ne assicurano il funzionamento affidabile prevenendo il surriscaldamento dei componenti e che non devono essere né coperte né ostruite, ad esempio posandolo su un letto, un divano, un tappeto o superfici simili. L’apparecchio non va mai messo vicino a un radiatore o a una bocchetta di riscaldamento né collocato in una struttura già predisposta, come uno scaffale o un rack, a meno che non si garantisca una ventilazione adeguata e si seguano le istruzioni del produttore. 10. Alimentazione: l’apparecchio deve essere alimentato solo alla tensione e corrente indicate sulla targa dati. Se non si è sicuri dei valori della tensione e corrente erogate dalle prese di corrente, consultare il rivenditore o la società dell’energia elettrica. 11. Messa a terra o polarizzazione: l’apparecchio è dotato di una spina polarizzata (ossia con uno spinotto più largo dell’altro) per corrente alternata, che può essere inserita nella presa di corrente in un solo modo a scopo di sicurezza. Se è impossibile inserire bene la spina, girarla; se ancora risulta impossibile inserirla, rivolgersi a un elettricista per fare sostituire la presa di corrente obsoleta. Non annullare la caratteristica di sicurezza della spina. 12. Cavo di alimentazione: collocarlo in modo da ridurre quanto più possibile il rischio che faccia inciampare o sia schiacciato da altri oggetti; prestare particolare attenzione al punto di entrata della spina nella presa di corrente e al punto di connessione tra il cavo e l’apparecchio. 13. Fulmini: per ulteriore protezione durante i temporali o se si lascia l’apparecchio incustodito e inutilizzato per lunghi periodi, scollegarlo dalla presa di corrente e scollegare l’antenna o il cavo dell’impianto. Si prevengono così danni causati da fulmini e sovracorrenti nella rete di alimentazione. 14. Linee elettriche: non collocare un impianto dotato di antenna esterna presso linee elettriche aeree o altri circuiti di alimentazione o illuminazione oppure in un punto da cui potrebbe andare a contatto di tali linee o circuiti. Quando si installa un impianto con antenna esterna occorre fare estrema attenzione a evitare di toccare tali linee o circuiti, in quanto il contatto può causare la morte. 15. Sovraccarico: per prevenire incendi e scosse elettriche, non sovraccaricare prese di corrente o prolunghe. 16. Entrata di oggetti e liquidi: non inserire mai oggetti di nessun tipo nell’apparecchio attraverso le feritoie, perché potrebbero toccare punti ad alta tensione o cortocircuitare componenti, causando incendio o scosse elettriche. Evitare di versare liquidi di qualsiasi tipo sull’apparecchio. 17. Manutenzione: non cercare di eseguire la manutenzione di questo prodotto, in quanto aprendo o rimuovendo le coperture si può essere esposti ad alte tensioni o altri pericoli. Rivolgersi sempre a personale qualificato. 18. Danni che richiedono un intervento: scollegare l’apparecchio dalla presa di corrente e rivolgersi a personale qualificato nei seguenti casi. a. Danni alla spina o al cavo di alimentazione. b. Si è versato un liquido sull’apparecchio o è caduto un oggetto al suo interno. c. L’apparecchio è rimasto esposto alla pioggia o all’acqua. d. L’apparecchio non funziona normalmente quando si seguono le istruzioni per l’uso. Agire solo sui comandi descritti nelle istruzioni, in quanto un uso improprio di altri comandi potrebbe causare danni e spesso richiedere un intervento significativo da parte di un tecnico qualificato. e. L’apparecchio è caduto o l’involucro è stato danneggiato. f. L’apparecchio presenta una variazione notevole rispetto alle prestazioni previste; ciò indica la necessità di una manutenzione. 19. Ricambi: accertarsi che il tecnico addetto alla manutenzione usi ricambi specificati dal produttore o aventi le stesse caratteristiche dei componenti originali. Una sostituzione non autorizzata può causare incendio, scosse elettriche o altri pericoli. 20. Verifica di sicurezza: una volta completate eventuali operazioni di manutenzione o riparazione, richiedere al tecnico addetto di eseguire le verifiche necessarie per stabilire che l’apparecchio funzioni correttamente. 21. Carrelli e sostegni: l’apparecchio deve essere adoperato solo con un carrello o un sostegno raccomandato dal produttore. Se l’apparecchio è collocato su un carrello, il sistema va spostato con cautela; un arresto brusco, l’applicazione di una forza eccessiva o una superficie irregolare possono farlo ribaltare e causare lesioni personali. 22. Questo prodotto non è concepito per l’uso all’aperto. LIMITI DI SICUREZZA IN RELAZIONE AL FUNZIONAMENTO Polk Audio specifica l’intervallo di amplificazione raccomandato per ciascuno dei suoi diffusori passivi (non amplificati). In genere tale specifica viene espressa come un intervallo di potenza, ad esempio 20-200 watt (per canale). È importante capire il significato di questi valori quando si deve scegliere un ricevitore o un amplificatore per un diffusore Polk. Il valore minimo indica il livello più basso di potenza continua che assicura prestazioni accettabili in un tipico ambiente di ascolto, mentre il valore massimo indica il livello più alto di potenza per canale che deve essere applicato con un diffusore Polk e non va confuso con la “potenza nominale” né implica che al diffusore si possa applicare tale livello di potenza a lungo termine. Polk Audio specifica un ampio intervallo di potenza in quanto non tutti i produttori di apparecchi elettronici usano lo stesso metodo per specificare la potenza nominale; infatti, il suono di amplificatori di alta qualità è migliore e più alto del suono di amplificatori di qualità inferiore, anche quando questi ultimi hanno potenze nominali maggiori. La potenza di un’automobile offre una buona analogia. Un’automobile può sviluppare una potenza di gran lunga superiore a quella necessaria per il normale uso quotidiano in città e può raggiungere una velocità superiore a 160 km/h. Poter disporre di questa potenza supplementare è utile quando si deve accelerare su una rampa d'accesso di autostrada o per evitare un pericolo, ma ciò non significa che sia opportuno viaggiare in autostrada alla massima potenza e velocità per lunghi periodi di tempo, come un meccanico o la polizia stradale potrebbero subito confermare. Analogamente, è consigliabile adoperare amplificatori e ricevitori con potenza nominale superiore a quella dei diffusori, in quanto poter disporre di una certa potenza supplementare per picchi di breve durata consente di ottenere qualità migliore del suono, massima gamma dinamica e uscita senza problemi ad alto volume. Ma suggeriamo vivamente di non fare funzionare l’amplificatore o il ricevitore alla massima potenza per l’ascolto prolungato. I diffusori possono danneggiarsi se l’amplificatore, indipendentemente dalla sua potenza nominale, viene fatto funzionare a livelli di ascolto superiori a quelli generabili con nitidezza; i livelli molto alti e udibili della distorsione che si genererebbe in queste condizioni nell’amplificatore potrebbero aggiungere ai suoni tonalità stridenti. Se il suono è distorto, bisogna abbassare il volume per non rischiare di danneggiare i diffusori. Facendo funzionare un amplificatore oltre il punto di distorsione si può danneggiare un diffusore indipendentemente dalla sua potenza nominale. SMALTIMENTO DEL PRODOTTO Seguire le norme internazionali, nazionali e locali per lo smal-timento di questo prodotto. Per ulteriori informazioni, contattare il proprio rivenditore oppure l’importatore/distributore nel proprio Paese. Per ottenere un elenco di import-atori/distributori, visitare il sito Web Polk Audio www.polkaudio.com oppure contattare Polk Audio all’indirizzo 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA -Telefono: +1 410 358-3600. SERVIZIO DI ASSISTENZA Se dopo aver seguito le istruzioni per il collegamento si hanno problemi, controllare di nuovo tutte le connessioni. Una volta isolato il problema al diffusore, contattare il rivenditore Polk Audio presso cui lo si è acquistato o il centro di assistenza Polk Audio al numero 800-377-7655 (lunedì-venerdì, dalle 09.00 alle 18.00, fuso orario EST, solo negli Stati Uniti) o per e-mail all’indirizzo polkcs@polkaudio.com. Fuori degli Stati Uniti chiamare il numero 001-410-358-3600. Per ulteriori informazioni, tra cui articoli pratici sui sistemi audio, domande frequenti (FAQ) e manuali online, visitare il nostro sito Web www.polkaudio.com/home. CONTENUTO La scatola di ciascun sistema deve contenere i seguenti componenti: 1. Un diffusore da pavimento TSi, due diffusori da scaffale e un diffusore del canale centrale 2. Manuale del TSi 3. Scheda di registrazione 4. Piedini in gomma con striscia adesiva – (8 per i diffusori da scaffale o 4 per il diffusore del canale centrale) 5. Dima per il fissaggio a parete (solo per i diffusori da scaffale TSi100) Nota Bene: Se mancano componenti o si rilevano danni oppure se il diffusore non funziona, contattare immediatamente il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero 800-377-7655. ITALIANO8 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com INSTRUÇÕES DE SEGURANÇA IMPORTANTES Este produto foi projetado e fabricado para atender a rigorosos padrões de qualidade e segurança. Entretanto, existem algumas precauções de instalação e operação específicas que o usuário deve conhecer: 1. Leia a instruções. Todas as instruções de segurança e operação devem ser lidas antes de usar o sistema. 2. Guarde as instruções. As instruções de segurança e operação devem ser guardadas para consulta futura. 3. Fique atento aos avisos. Todos os avisos afixados aos aparelhos e presentes nas instruções de operação devem ser observados. 4. Siga as instruções. Todas as instruções de operação e uso devem ser seguidas. 5. Limpeza. Desligue o aparelho da tomada elétrica antes de limpá-lo. Não use produtos de limpeza líquidos nem aerossóis. Use um pano úmido para a limpeza. 6. Acessórios. Não use acessórios não recomendados pelo fabricante do produto, pois podem colocar a segurança em risco. 7. Água e umidade. Não use estes aparelhos próximos de água – por exemplo, próximos de uma banheira, lavabo, pia de cozinha ou tanque de lavar roupa, em um porão úmido ou próximos de uma piscina ou locais semelhantes. 8. Bases de apoio. Não coloque estes aparelhos sobre carrinhos, pedestais, tripés, suportes ou mesas instáveis. Os produtos podem cair, causando ferimentos graves em crianças ou adultos, bem como ficar danificados. Use apenas com um carrinho, pedestal, tripé, suporte ou mesa recomendado pelo fabricante ou vendido com os aparelhos. Toda instalação deve ser feita segundo as instruções do fabricante e deve-se usar os acessórios de instalação recomendados pelo fabricante. 9. Ventilação. Existem ranhuras e aberturas nas caixas para ventilação para assegurar o funcionamento confiável dos aparelhos e protegê-los contra superaquecimento. Estas aberturas não devem ser bloqueadas nem cobertas. Os produtos nunca devem ser colocados sobre uma cama, sofá, tapete ou superfícies semelhantes, pois as aberturas podem ser bloqueadas. Este produto nunca deve ser colocado próximo de um radiador ou saída de ar quente e não deve ser colocado em uma superfície embutida, como uma estante ou prateleira, a não ser que haja ventilação adequada ou as instruções do fabricante tenham sido observadas. 10. Fontes de alimentação. Este produto deve ser alimentado apenas pelo tipo de fonte de alimentação identificada nas etiquetas de especificação. Se tiver dúvidas quanto ao tipo de fonte de alimentação de sua residência, consulte o revendedor do aparelho ou a companhia de energia elétrica local. 11. Aterramento ou polarização. Este produto está equipado com plugue polarizado para linha de corrente alternada (um pino mais largo que o outro). Este plugue só se encaixará na tomada elétrica em uma posição específica. Este é um recurso de segurança. Se não conseguir inserir o plugue totalmente na tomada, tente na posição inversa. Se o plugue não se encaixar, entre em contato com um eletricista para trocar a tomada obsoleta. Não anule a função de segurança do plugue polarizado. 12. Proteção do cabo de alimentação. O cabo de alimentação elétrica deve ser posicionado de maneira a evitar que seja pisoteado ou prensado por artigos que encostem nele. Deve-se dar atenção especial ao plugue, à extremidade conectada à tomada e à extremidade fixada ao aparelho. 13. Raios. Para maior proteção para este produto de áudio/vídeo durante uma tempestade elétrica ou quando for deixado sozinho e não for usado por longos períodos de tempo, desligue-o da tomada e desconecte a antena ou o sistema de cabo. Isto evitará que o produto seja danificado devido a raios e sobretensão na corrente elétrica. 14. Cabos elétricos. Não se deve instalar um sistema de antena externa próximo a cabos elétricos suspensos nem a outros tipos de circuitos de iluminação ou alimentação elétrica, nem onde possa cair sobre tais cabos ou circuitos elétricos. Ao instalar um sistema de antena externa, deve-se tomar muito cuidado para que não toque em tais cabos ou circuitos elétricos, pois o contato com eles pode ser fatal. 15. Sobrecarga. Não sobrecarregue as tomadas e extensões elétricas, poisisso pode gerar risco de incêndio ou choque elétrico. 16. Entrada de objetos e líquido. Nunca force nenhum tipo de objeto neste produto pelas aberturas, pois podem tocar em pontos com níveis de tensão elétrica perigosos ou curto-circuitar componentes e provocar incêndio ou causar choque elétrico. Nunca derrame qualquer tipo de líquido sobre este produto de áudio/vídeo. 17. Manutenção. Nunca tente fazer a manutenção deste produto por conta própria, pois poderá se expor a tensões perigosas ou a outros riscos ao abrir ou retirar as coberturas da unidade. Toda manutenção deve ser realizada por pessoal de manutenção qualificado. 18. Danos que exigem reparos. Desligue este produto da tomada elétrica e envie-o a pessoal de assistência técnica qualificado para serviços de manutenção nos seguintes casos: a. Quando o cabo ou o plugue de alimentação elétrica estiver danificado. b. Caso líquido tenha sido derramado ou objetos tenham caído dentro do produto. c. Se o produto tiver sido exposto à chuva ou água. a. Se o produto não funcionar normalmente ao seguir as instruções de operação. Ajuste apenas os controles descritos nas instruções de operação, pois o ajuste incorreto de outros controles pode causar danos e, em geral, requerer uma quantidade significativa de trabalho por parte de um técnico qualificado para restaurar o funcionamento normal do produto. e. Se o produto sofreu uma queda ou seu invólucro tiver sido danificado. f. Quando o produto apresentar uma mudança clara em desempenho—isto indica a necessidade de serviços de manutenção. 19. Peças de reposição. Quando for necessário trocar alguma peça, certifique-se de que o técnico use peças de reposição especificadas pelo fabricante ou que as peças tenham as mesmas características que a peça original. A troca não autorizada pode resultar em incêndio, choque elétrico ou outros riscos. 20. Verificação de segurança. Após a conclusão de qualquer serviço ou reparos feitos a este produto, solicite ao técnico que faça testes de segurança para determinar se está funcionando corretamente. 21. Carrinhos e pedestais. Os aparelhos só devem ser usados com um carrinho ou pedestal recomendado pelo fabricante. Quando usados em conjunto, mova o aparelho e o carrinho com cuidado. Paradas repentinas, excesso de força e superfí cies desniveladas podem fazer com que o aparelho e o carrinho virem. Ao usar o carrinho, tome cuidado ao movê-lo com o aparelho para evitar se ferir caso caia. 22. Este produto não se destina ao uso ao ar livre. LIMITES SEGUROS DE OPERAÇÃO A Polk Audio especifica a faixa de amplificação para cada uma de suas caixas acústicas passivas (não amplificadas). Esta especificação é normalmente expressa como uma faixa de potência, como 20-200 W (por canal). É importante entender o significado desses números ao escolher um receiver ou um amplificador para as caixas acústicas Polk. O número menor indica a potência nominal contínua mais baixa que produzirá um desempenho aceitável em um ambiente de audição comum. O número maior indica a potência mais elevada por canal que deve ser usada com as caixas acústicas Polk. Este número não deve ser confundido com uma especificação de “potência máxima permissível” e não significa que a caixa acústica terá capacidade de reprodução a longo prazo desta quantidade de potência. Especificamos uma ampla gama de classificações porque nem todos os fabricantes de equipamentos eletrônicos usam o mesmo método de classificação de potência. Na verdade, amplificadores de alta qualidade com menor classificação têm reprodução sonora melhor e mais alta do que unidades de baixa qualidade com classificação mais elevada. A potência do motor de um automóvel é uma boa analogia. Seu carro provavelmente tem muito mais potência do que precisa para suas viagens diárias e provavelmente pode atingir uma velocidade bem acima de 190 km/h. Ter esta potência adicional é útil para acelerar ao entrar em uma rodovia e evitar perigos (como fugir de zumbis que se alimentam de cérebros), mas não significa que é aconselhável dirigilo nas estradas à plena potência e máxima velocidade durante um período prolongado. Se estiver em dúvida, pergunte à polícia rodoviária. De maneira semelhante, recomendamos o uso de amplificadores e receivers com potência nominal acima dos limites da potência máxima permissível das caixas acústicas, pois a potência extra disponível para picos de curta duração promove melhor qualidade de som, máxima faixa dinâmica e repro-dução de alto volume natural. No entanto, recomendamos enfaticamente que não use a potência plena do amplificador ou receiver para as reproduções sonoras cotidianas. Os alto-falantes podem ser danificados quando um amplificador, independentemente de sua potência, for operado a níveis de reprodução mais elevados do que consegue produzir. A operação nesse volume pode resultar em níveis muito elevados de distorção audível a partir do amplificador, o que pode acrescentar um som desarmonioso e estridente ao áudio sendo reproduzido. Se ouvir distorção, reduza o volume ou as caixas acústicas poderão ser danificadas. É possível danificar praticamente qualquer caixa acústica, independentemente de sua potência, se o amplificador for utilizado além do ponto de distorção. DESCARTE DO PRODUTO Algumas leis ou regula-mentos internacionais, nacionais e/ou locais podem reger os procedimentos para descarte deste produto. Para obter informações mais detalhadas, entre em contato com a loja onde adquiriu o produto ou com o importador ou distribuidor da Polk Audio em seu país. Para obter uma lista dos importadores/distribuidores da Polk Audio, visite nosso website em www.polkaudio.com ou entre em contato com a Polk Audio pelo endereço 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA— Telefone: +1 410 358-3600. AJUDA OU ASSISTENCIA TECNICA Se tiver alguma dificuldade depois de seguir as orientações de instalação, verifique as conexões dos cabos. Caso consiga isolar o problema ao alto-falante, entre em contato com o revendedor autorizado Polk Audio onde adquiriu o produto ou com o Serviço de Atendimento ao Cliente da Polk Audio ligando para 1-800-377-7655 (de segunda a sexta-feira, das 9h00 às 18h00 do horário de Nova York— apenas nos EUA) ou por e-mail pelo endereço polkcs@polkaudio.com. Caso esteja em outro país, ligue para 1-410-358-3600. Nosso website premiado contém informações mais detalhadas, incluindo artigos informativos com procedimentos passo a passo, perguntas freqüentes e manuais eletrônicos. Para obter essas e outras informações sobre áudio, visite www.polkaudio.com/home. VERIFIQUE O CONTEUDO Cada embalagem de caixa acústica contém: 1. Uma caixa acústica de piso TSi, duas caixas acústicas para estante ou uma caixa acústica de canal central 2. Manual da TSi 3. Cartão de registro 4. Suportes de borracha com adesivo—(8 para caixas acústicas de estante ou 4 para caixa acústica de canal central) 5. Modelo para instalação em parede (apenas para caixas acústicas de estante TSi100) Observação importante: Se algum componente estiver danificado ou faltando, ou se a caixa acústica não funcionar, avise imediatamente os Serviços de Suporte ao Cliente da Polk Audio pelo número 1-800-377-7655. PORTUGUESPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 9 FIGURE 2 (CS20 & CS10) Most popular placement, above the TV screen. TSi Series Center Speakers are magnetically shielded for safe placement near TV or video monitors. If you notice video distortion or discoloration, immediately move the speakers away from the video source and call Polk Audio Customer Service 800-377-7655 (US and Canada) or polkcs@polkaudio.com. La ubicación más común es encima de la pantalla del televisor. Los altavoces centrales de la serie TSi tienen blindaje magnético para poder ubicarlos con seguridad cerca de monitores de televisión o de video. Si nota que hay distorsión o descoloración de la imagen, aleje inmediatamente los altavoces de la fuente de video y contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk Audio au 800-377-7655. Vous pouvez aussi nous contacter par courriel à l’adresse: polkcs@polkaudio.com. La ubicación más común es sobre la pantalla del televisor. Los altavoces de canal central de la serie TSi tienen blindaje magnético para que se puedan colocar sin problema cerca de monitores de televisión o video. Si nota distorsión o decoloración de la imagen, aleje inmediatamente los altavoces de la fuente de video y comuníquese con el Servicio al Cliente de Polk Audio llamando al 800-377-7655 (en EE.UU. y Canadá) o enviando un mensaje por correo electrónico a polkcs@polkaudio.com. Populärste Platzierung über dem Fernsehbildschirm. Lautsprecher der TSi-Serie sind magnetisch abgeschirmt und können problemlos in der Nähe von Fernsehern oder Videomonitoren aufgestellt werden. Wenn Sie aber Bildverzerrungen oder Farbfehler bemerken, sollten Sie die Lautsprecher sofort weiter weg von der Videoquelle aufstellen und den Kundendienst von Polk Audio kontaktieren (+800-377-7655 in den USA und Kanada, oder polkcs@polkaudio.com). La collocazione più comune è quella sopra il televisore. I diffusori per canale centrale TSi sono schermati magneticamente e quindi possono essere collocati vicino a schermi televisivi o monitor, ma se si osservano alterazioni del colore o distorsioni dell’immagine, allontanarli immediatamente dall’apparecchio video e contattare il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero 800- 377-7655 (negli Stati Uniti o in Canada) o per e-mail: polkcs@polkaudio.com. A localização mais comum é em cima da tela de televisão. As caixas acústicas centrais da série TSi são magneticamente blindadas para que possam ser colocadas com segurança próximas de televisores ou monitores de vídeo. Se notar distorção ou descoloração da imagem, afaste imediatamente as caixas acústicas da origem do vídeo e ligue para o Serviço de Atendimento do Cliente da Polk Audio pelo número 1-800-377-7655 (EUA e Canadá) ou envie um e-mail para polkcs@polkaudio.com. OR F GI URE 2 FIGURE 1 (TSi 500, TSi 400, TSi 300, TSi 200 & TSi 100) Create an equilateral triangle between the speakers and the listening position. Toe-in to your listening preference. If you notice video distortion or discoloration, immediately move the speakers away from the video source and call Polk Audio Customer Service 800-377-7655 (US and Canada) or polkcs@polkaudio.com. Créez un triangle équilatéral entre les deux enceintes et votre position d’écoute puis orientez les enceintes selon vos préférences. Cependant, si vous constatez de la distorsion ou décoloration vidéo, éloignez immédiatement l’enceinte de l’écran et contactez le service à la clientèle de Polk Audio au (800) 377-7655 (É.U. et Canada) ou par courriel: polkcs@polkaudio.com. Forme un triángulo equilátero con los altavoces y la posición del oyente. Oriente los altavoces de acuerdo con su preferencia. Si nota distorsión o decoloración de la imagen, aleje inmediatamente los altavoces de la fuente de video y comuníquese con el Servicio al Cliente de Polk Audio llamando al 800-377-7655 (en EE.UU. y Canadá) o enviando un mensaje de correo electrónico a polkcs@polkaudio.com. Bilden Sie ein gleichseitiges Dreieck aus den Lautsprechern und Ihrer Hörposition. Drehen Sie die Lautsprecher wie gewünscht nach innen. Wenn Sie aber Bildverzerrungen oder Farbfehler bemerken, sollten Sie die Lautsprecher sofort weiter weg von der Videoquelle aufstellen und den Kundendienst von Polk Audio kontaktieren (+800-377-7655 in den USA und Kanada, oder polkcs@polkaudio.com). Disporre i diffusori in modo da formare un triangolo equilatero con il punto di ascolto e orientarli secondo le proprie preferenze. Ma se si osservano alterazioni del colore o distorsioni dell’immagine, allontanarli immediatamente dall’apparecchio video e contattare il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero 800-377-7655 (negli Stati Uniti o in Canada) o per e-mail: polkcs@polkaudio.com. Crie um triângulo equilátero entre as caixas acústicas e a posição favorita do ouvinte. Ajuste a convergência segundo sua preferência de reprodução sonora. Se notar distorção ou descoloração da imagem, afaste imediatamente as caixas acústicas da origem do vídeo e ligue para o Serviço de Atendimento do Cliente da Polk Audio pelo número 1-800-377-7655 (EUA e Canadá) ou envie um e-mail para polkcs@polkaudio.com. Left Speaker Right Speaker F GI URE 110 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com FIGURE 4 (TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300) Bi-wiring, or using separate speaker wire connections for high and low frequency sections. Remove flat metal jumpers. Bi-câblage: l’utilisation de câbles distincts pour alimenter séparément les composants des hautes et des basses fréquences de vos enceintes. Retirez les cavaliers métalliques plats. Cableado doble. Conexiones de cable de altavoz separadas para las secciones de frecuencias altas y frecuencias bajas. Quite los puentes de metal planos. Bi-wiring, oder die Verwendung separater Lautsprecherdrähte für den Hoch- und Niederfrequenzbereich. Nehmen Sie flache Metallschaltdrähte heraus. Cablaggio doppio, ossia uso di connessioni separate per le sezioni ad alta e a bassa frequenza. Rimuovere i ponticelli metallici piatti. Bi-cabeamento, ou uso de conexões de cabos de caixas acústicas separadas para as seções de alta e baixa freqüência. Retire os jumpers de metal planos. F GI URE 4 FIGURE 3 Using binding post connections. Utilisation des bornes de connexion. Uso de conexiones con tornillos de presión. Verwendung von Anschlussklemmen. Uso dei terminali cilindrici. Uso de conexões roscadas. To use Banana Plugs (US only): Carefully pry out the binding post plugs to expose banana plug holes. (This is for US owners only.) Tighten hex nut. Serrer l’écrou. Enrosque la tuerca de nuevo. Sechskantmutter festschrauben. Serrare il dado esagonale. Aperte a porca hexagonal. Do not insert insulated section of speaker wire. Ne pas insérer la partie isolée du fil du haut-parleur. No inserte la parte aislada del cable de altavoz. Isolation des Lautsprecherdrahtes nicht in das Loch schieben. Non inserire nel foro un tratto isolato di cavo. Não insira a seção isolada do cabo da caixa acústica. F GI URE 3 Loosen hex nut. Desserrer l’écrou. Afloje la tuerca hexagonal. Sechskantmutter lösen. Allentare il dado esagonale. Solte a porca hexagonal. Insert speaker wire through hole. Insérer le fil du hautparleur dans le trou. Inserte el cable de altavoz a través del agujero. Lautsprecherdraht durch das Loch schieben. Inserire nel foro il cavo dell’altoparlante. Insira o cabo da caixa acústica através do orifício.Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 11 FIGURE 6 (TSi 200, TSi 100, CS20 & CS10) Basic Bookshelf and Center Speaker hookup diagram. Set Bookshelf and Center Speakers to “small” in your receiver’s Bass Management settings. Diagramme de connexion des enceintes d’étagère et de l’enceinte centrale. Pour les enceintes d’étagère et centrale, du menu de «gestion des graves» de votre récepteur (Bass Management settings), sélectionnez «small». Diagrama básico de cableado de altavoces de estantería y de canal central. En la administración de bajos del receptor, fije en “pequeño” (small) la configuración de los altavoces de estantería y de canal central. Grundlegendes Anschlussdiagramm für Regal- und Center-Lautsprecher. Stellen Sie den Regal- und CenterLautsprecher im Bass-Management-Menü Ihres Receivers auf „Small“ (Klein) ein. Schema di collegamento base dei diffusori da scaffale e per canale centrale. Nella configurazione di gestione dei bassi del ricevitore, impostare il suono dei diffusori da scaffale e per canale centrale su “livello basso.” Diagrama de conexão básica das caixas acústicas para estante e central. Configure as caixas acústicas para estante e central como “small” nos ajustes de controle de graves do receiver. F GI URE 6 FIGURE 5 (TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300) Bi-amping, or using separate amplifiers for the low and high frequency sections of your speakers. Remove flat metal jumpers. Bi-amplification: l’utilisation d’amplis distincts pour alimenter séparément les composants des hautes et des basses fréquences de vos enceintes. Retirez les cavaliers métalliques plats. Amplificación doble. Amplificadores separados para las secciones de frecuencias altas y frecuencias bajas de los altavoces. Quite los puentes de metal planos. bi-amping, oder die Verwendung von unterschiedlichen Verstärkern für niedrige und hohe Frequenzen der Lautsprecher. Nehmen Sie flache Metallschaltdrähte heraus. Amplificazione doppia, ossia uso di amplificatori separati per le sezioni ad alta e a bassa frequenza dei diffusori. Rimuovere i ponticelli metallici piatti. Bi-amplificação, ou uso de amplificadores separados para as seções de baixa e alta freqüência das caixas acústicas. Retire os jumpers de metal planos. F GI URE 5 F GI URE 7 FIGURE 7 (TSi 200, TSi 100, CS20 & CS10) Adhesive-backed rubber pads: peel and stick in corners of speaker enclosure. Tampons autoadhésifs en caoutchouc: retirez la pellicule protectrice et appliquez les tampons aux quatre coins des enceintes. Almohadillas adhesivas por ambos lados: quíteles el recubrimiento y péguelas en las esquinas de la caja de altavoz. Selbstklebenden Gummifüßchen: abziehen und an den Ecken des Lautsprechergehäuses befestigen. Piedini in gomma con striscia adesiva: staccare la striscia e attaccare i piedini agli angoli della cassa. Suportes de borracha com adesivo: retire a proteção da superfície com adesivo e cole nos cantos da base da caixa acústica. TSi 200 & TSi 100 CS20 & CS1012 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com FIGURE 9a & 9b (TSi 100) Use #10 panhead screw for wall stud (9a), use #10 wall anchors with appropriate weight rating + screw for no wall stud (9b). Leave screws 1/4"- 1/8" (4mm) exposed. Utilisez des vis #10 à tête cylindrique pour fixation sur un montant de mur (9a). Utilisez des ancres de fixation #10 à portance appropriée avec vis conforme s’il n’y a pas de montant à l’endroit choisi (9b). Laissez les vis dépasser de 1/4" (6mm) à 1/8" (4mm). Utilice tornillos n° 10 con cabeza troncocónica en paredes con parales internos (9a). Utilice tornillos y anclas de pared n° 10 con valor nominal de peso adecuado en paredes sin parales internos (9b). Deje que el tornillo sobresalga de 1/4 de plg. a 1/8 de plg. (6mm a 4mm). Verwenden Sie eine Flachkopfschraube (Nr. 10) für Wände mit Ständerprofil (9a), bzw. Dübel und Schrauben ausreichender Stärke für Wände ohne Ständerprofil (9b). Lassen Sie die Schrauben 4 mm herausstehen. Se la parete è di legno, usare viti a testa tronco-conica N. 10 (9a), altrimenti usare viti e tasselli N. 10 (9b) adatti al peso da sostenere. Lasciare le viti da 1/4" - 1/8" (4 mm) esposte. Use um parafuso de cabeça cilíndrica no 10 para viga de parede (9a); use buchas de parede no 10 com classificação de peso apropriada + parafuso para locais sem viga de parede (9b). Deixe 4 mm dos parafusos expostos. [a] [b] F GI URE 9 FIGURE 10 (TSi 100) Slide the speaker down on the screw head to catch the keyhole slots. Glissez l’enceinte sur les têtes de vis jusqu’à ce que les encoches en trou de serrure s’enclenchent. Deslice el altavoz sobre las cabezas de los tornillos hasta engancharlos en las ranuras en forma de cerradura de los altavoces. Schieben Sie den Lautsprecher auf die Schraube herunter, so dass diese in das Befestigungsloch einrastet. Fare scorrere il diffusore verso il basso sulla testa delle viti, in modo che queste si inseriscano nelle apposite scanalature. Deslize a caixa acústica para baixo sobre as cabeças dos parafusos para que se encaixem nas ranhuras em forma de fechadura. F GI URE 10 FIGURE 8 (TSi 100) Use template to mark mounting location. Utilisez le gabarit pour marquer le lieu de fixation. Marque la ubicación de montaje con la plantilla. Verwenden Sie die Schablone zur Markierung der Befestigungsstelle. Usare la dima per contrassegnare il punto di fissaggio. Use o modelo para marcar a localização da instalação. F GI URE 8Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 13 F GI URE 11 FIGURE 11 Clean cabinet with a damp cloth. Do not use furniture polish on veneer. Nettoyez l’enceinte aven un chiffon humide. N’utilisez pas de poli à meubles. Limpie la caja con un paño húmedo. No limpie la caja con lustramuebles. Gehäuse mit feuchtem Tuch reinigen. Verwenden Sie keine Möbelpolitur für das Gehäuse. Pulire la cassa con un panno umido. Non utilizzare prodotti lucidanti per mobili. Limpe a caixa com um pano úmido. Não use polidor de móveis na caixa. SPECIFICATIONS For performance specifications on the TSi Series Speakers, visit our website www.polkaudio.com. FICHE TECHNIQUE Pour la fiche technique des enceintes TSi Series, visitez notre site web: www.polkaudio.com. ESPECIFICACIONES Para ver especificaciones de rendimiento de los altavoces de la serie TSi, visite nuestro sitio Web www.polkaudio.com. DATEN Sie finden die Leistungsdaten der TSi-Lautsprecherserie auf unserer Website: www.polkaudio.com. DATI TECHNICI Per i dati tecnici dei diffusori TSi visitare il nostro sito web, www.polkaudio.com. ESPECIFICAÇOES Para obter informações sobre as especificações das caixas acústicas da série TSi, visite nosso website em www.polkaudio.com.14 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com LIMITED FIVE YEAR WARRANTY Polk Audio, Inc., warrants to the original retail purchaser only. This warranty will terminate automatically prior to its stated expiration if the original retail purchaser sells or transfers the product to any other party. Polk Audio, Inc., warrants, to the original retail purchaser only, that the LOUDSPEAKER(S), PASSIVE CROSSOVER COMPONENT(S) and ENCLOSURE on this Polk Audio Loudspeaker Product will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of original retail purchase from a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer. Furthermore, Polk Audio, Inc., warrants, to the original retail purchaser only, that any AMPLIFIER OR OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENT that may be included in this Polk Audio Loudspeaker Product will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three (3) years years from the date of original retail purchase from a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer. To allow Polk Audio to offer the best possible warranty service, please register your new product online at: www.polkaudio.com/registration or call Polk customer service 800-377-7655 in the USA and Canada (outside the USA: 410-358-3600) within ten (10) days of the date of original purchase. Be sure to keep your original purchase receipt. Defective Products must be shipped, together with proof of purchase, prepaid insured to the Polk Audio Authorized Dealer from whom you purchased the Product, or to the Factory at 2550 Britannia Boulevard, Suite A, San Diego, California 92154. Products must be shipped in the original shipping container or its equivalent; in any case the risk of loss or damage in transit is to be borne by you. If upon examination at the Factory or Polk Audio Authorized Dealer it is determined that the unit was defective in materials or workmanship at any time during this Warranty period, Polk Audio or the Polk Audio Authorized Dealer will, at its option, repair or replace this Product at no additional charge, except as set forth below. All replaced parts and Products become the property of Polk Audio. Products replaced or repaired under this warranty will be returned to you, within a reasonable time, freight prepaid. This warranty does not include service or parts to repair damage caused by accident, disaster, misuse, abuse, negligence, inadequate packing or shipping procedures, commercial use, voltage inputs in excess of the rated maximum of the unit, cosmetic appearance of cabinetry not directly attributable to defect in materials or workmanship, or service, repair, or modification of the Product which has not been authorized or approved by Polk Audio. This warranty shall terminate if the Serial number on the Product has been removed, tampered with or defaced. This warranty is in lieu of all other expressed Warranties. If this Product is defective in materials or workmanship as warranted above, your sole remedy shall be repair or replacement as provided above. In no event will Polk Audio, Inc. be liable to you for any incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the Product, even if Polk Audio, Inc. or a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the above limitation and exclusion may not apply to you. All implied warranties on this Product are limited to the duration of this expressed Warranty. Some states do not allow limitation on how long an implied Warranty lasts, so the above limitations may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights which vary from state to state. This Warranty applies only to Products purchased in Canada, the United States of America, its possessions, and U.S. and NATO armed forces exchanges and audio clubs. The Warranty terms and conditions applicable to Products purchased in other countries are available from the Polk Audio Authorized Distributors in such countries. GARANTIE LIMITÉE DE 5 ANS La garantie de Polk Audio, Inc., n’est valide que pour l’acheteur au détail original. La garantie sera automatiquement annulée avant sa date d’expiration spécifiée si l’acheteur original vend ou transfère le produit à tout autre parti. Polk Audio, Inc., garantit - à l’acheteur au détail original seulement - que le ou les HAUT-PARLEUR(S), COMPOSANTE(S) DE FILTRE PASSIF et CAISSON(S) de ce produit Polk Audio seront exempts de tout défaut attribuable aux pièces d’origine et à la main d’oeuvre pour une période de cinq (5) ans à partir de la date de l’achat au détail original chez un revendeur agréé Polk Audio. En outre, Polk Audio, Inc., garantit - à l’acheteur au détail original seulement - que TOUT AMPLIFICATEUR OU TOUT AUTRE COMPOSANTE ÉLECTRONIQUE qui pourrait faire partie ce produit Polk Audio sera exempt de tout défaut attribuable aux pièces d’origine et à la main d’oeuvre pour une période de cinq (3) ans à partir de la date de l’achat au détail original chez un revendeur agréé Polk Audio. Pour permettre à Polk Audio de vous offrir le meilleur service de garantie possible, veuillez enregistrer votre nouveau produit en ligne à l’adresse web: www.polkaudio.com/registration - ou contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk au 800-377-7655 aux États-Unis et au Canada (à l’extérieur des É.U.:410-358-3600) dans les dix (10) jours suivant la date de l’achat original. Assurez-vous de conserver votre reçu d’achat original. Les produits défectueux doivent être expédiés, avec une preuve d’achat, francs de port et assurés, au revendeur agréé Polk Audio de qui vous avez acheté le produit, ou à l’usine Polk Audio, 2550 Britannia Boulevard, Suite A, San Diego, California 92154. Les produits doivent être expédiés dans leur carton d’expédition original ou dans un contenant équivalent. Le propriétaire doit assumer tout risque de perte ou de dommage en transit. Si, suite à l’examen du produit à l’usine Polk ou chez le marchand agréé Polk Audio, il est déterminé que la défectuosité est imputable aux matériaux d’origine ou à la main d’oeuvre au cours de la période de la garantie spécifiée, Polk Audio ou le revendeur Polk Audio, à sa guise, réparera ou remplacera le produit sans frais additionnels et selon les conditions décrites ci-dessous. Toute pièce ou produit remplacé devient la propriété de Polk Audio. Les produits réparés ou remplacés sous la garantie vous seront expédiés francs de port dans un délai raisonnable. Cette garantie n’inclut pas le service ou les pièces nécessaires à la réparation des dommages provoqués par accident, désastre, abus, négligence, mode d'expédition ou emballage inadéquat, utilisation commerciale, tensions supérieures au maximum prescrit pour l’unité, aspect visuel du meuble non directement attribuable à un défaut de pièces d’origine ou de main d’oeuvre, ou par le service, la réparation, ou toute modification du produit qui n’a pas été autorisé ou approuvé par Polk Audio. Cette garantie sera annulée si le numéro de série sur le produit a été enlevé, altéré ou falsifié. Cette garantie prend préséance sur toutes autres garanties énoncées. Si la défectuosité de ce produit est imputable aux pièces d’origine ou à la main d’oeuvre selon les conditions de la garantie exprimées ci-dessus, votre seul recourt sera la réparation ou le remplacement selon les conditions décrites ci-dessus. Dans aucun cas Polk Audio, Inc. pourra-t-elle être tenue responsable pour tout dommage accessoire ou indirect causé par l’utilisation ou par l’incapacité d’utilisation du produit, même si Polk Audio, Inc. ou un revendeur agréé Polk Audio, a été avisé de la possibilité de tel dommage, ou pour toute réclamation par tout autre parti. Certains états ne permettant pas l’exclusion ou la limitation des dommages indirects, les limitations et exclusions exprimées ci-dessus pourraient ne pas s'appliquer dans votre cas. Toutes les garanties tacites sur ce produit sont limitées à la durée de la garantie énoncée. Certains états ne permettant pas la limitation de la durée d’une garantie tacite, les limitations ci-dessus pourraient ne pas s’appliquer dans votre cas. Cette garantie vous accorde des droits légaux spécifiques; vous pourriez également avoir d’autres droits qui pourraient varier d’état en état. Cette garantie s’applique seulement aux produits achetés au Canada, aux États-Unis d’Amérique et ses possessions, et dans les clubs audio et d’échange des forces armées des É.U. et de l’OTAN. Les modalités et les conditions de garantie applicables aux produits achetés dans d’autres pays sont disponibles chez les distributeurs agréés Polk Audio établis dans ces pays.Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 15 ENGLISH Polk Audio is a Directed Electronics company which trades on NASDAQ under the symbol DEIX. Investor information can be found at http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA are registered trademarks of Britannia Investment Corporation used under license by Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs & miDock are trademarks of Britannia Investment Corporation used under license by Polk Audio, Incorporated. FRANÇAIS Polk Audio est une compagnie de la Directed Electronics inscrite à la NASDAQ sous le symbole DEIX. Pour des informations boursières visitez: http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sont des marques de commerces déposées de la Britannia Investment Corporation utilisées sous license par Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs et miDock sont des marques de commerce de la Britannia Investment Corporation utilisées sous license par Polk Audio, Incorporated. ESPANOL Polk Audio es una empresa de Directed Electronics, la cual tiene operaciones bursátiles en el índice NASDAQ bajo el símbolo DEIX. Hay información para inversionistas en http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar y SDA son marcas comerciales registradas de Britannia Investment Corporation usadas por Polk Audio Incorporated bajo licencia. Polk Audio Designs y miDock son marcas comerciales de Britannia Investment Corporation usadas por Polk Audio Incorporated bajo licencia. DEUTSCH Polk Audio ist ein Unternehmen der Directed Electronics-Gruppe, die bei NASDAQ unter dem Symbol DEIX gehandelt wird. Investoreninformationen finden Sie unter http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sind eingetragene Marken der Britannia Investment Corporation, die unter Lizenz von Polk Audio, Incorporated verwendet werden. Polk Audio Designs & miDock sind Marken der Britannia Investment Corporation, die unter Lizenz von Polk Audio, Incorporated verwendet werden. ITALIANO Polk Audio è un’azienda Directed Electronics, quotata sul listino NASDAQ con il simbolo DEIX. Per informazioni concernenti gli investitori visitare il sito http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sono marchi registrati di Britannia Investment Corporation utilizzati su licenza da Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs e miDock sono marchi registrati di Britannia Investment Corporation, utilizzati su licenza da Polk Audio, Incorporated. PORTUGEUSE A Polk Audio é uma empresa da Directed Electronics, negociada na NASDAQ com o símbolo DEIX. Informações para investidores estão disponíveis em http://investor.directed.com. Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket, I-Sonic, SurroundBar e SDA são marcas registradas da Britannia Investment Corporation usadas sob licença pela Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs e miDock são marcas comerciais da Britannia Investment Corporation usadas sob licença pela Polk Audio, Incorporated.5601 METRO DRIVE BALTIMORE, MARYLAND 21215 800-377-7655 (US & CAN, OUTSIDE US 410-358-3600) WWW.POLKAUDIO.COM User Manual Technical Support Worldwide: www.sandisk.com/support Knowedgebase: http://kb.sandisk.com Forum: http://forums.sandisk.com/sansa For more information on this product, please visit www.sandisk.com/support/clipplus Clip+UM809-ENG Table of Contents Safety Tips & Cleaning Instructions........................................ 1 Sansa® Clip+ MP3 Player Overview ........................................ 2 Features ........................................................................................2 Minimum System Requirements ........................................................2 Package Contents............................................................................3 Sansa® Clip+ at a Glance .................................................................3 Main Menu Options ..........................................................................4 Playback Screen..............................................................................5 Battery ..........................................................................................5 Basic Usage ............................................................................ 7 Power Button..................................................................................7 Power On ............................................................................................. 7 Power Off ............................................................................................. 7 Lock Function........................................................................................ 7 Reset................................................................................................... 8 Connecting to your Computer ...........................................................8 Removing the player from your computer:..........................................9 Loading Content ................................................................... 10 Loading Music............................................................................... 10 Drag and Drop (Windows)......................................................................10 Drag and Drop (Mac) ............................................................................10 Windows Media Player ...........................................................................11 Playing Content .................................................................... 16 Playing Music................................................................................ 16 Playing music from a preloaded microSD™ Card ................................ 18 microSD™ card with content ..................................................................18 slotMusic™ card ...................................................................................18 slotRadio™ card ...................................................................................19 FM Radio............................................................................... 20 Listening to FM Radio..................................................................... 20 Programming FM Presets................................................................ 20 Recording ............................................................................. 21 Voice Recording ............................................................................ 21 Deleting Music Files.............................................................. 22Table of Contents Settings ................................................................................ 23 Music Options ............................................................................... 23 Repeat................................................................................................23 Shuffle................................................................................................23 Music EQ .............................................................................................23 Replay Gain .........................................................................................23 Audiobook Options ........................................................................ 24 Ch. Mode.............................................................................................24 Speed.................................................................................................24 Radio Options ............................................................................... 24 Delete All Presets .................................................................................24 FM Region ...........................................................................................24 FM Mode .............................................................................................24 System Settings............................................................................ 24 Backlight.............................................................................................24 Power Saver ........................................................................................25 Sleep..................................................................................................25 Language ............................................................................................25 Date & Time ........................................................................................25 Brightness ...........................................................................................25 Volume ...............................................................................................25 Reset Factory Settings ..........................................................................25 Info ....................................................................................................25 USB Mode ...........................................................................................26 Format................................................................................................26 Press and Hold .....................................................................................26 Tips & Troubleshooting......................................................... 27 Learn More, Service, and Warranty Information................... 29 Getting Technical Support .............................................................. 29 SanDisk Limited Warranty .............................................................. 29 End User License Agreement........................................................... 331 Safety Tips & Cleaning Instructions 1 This chapter provides you the safety tips and cleaning instructions for your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Safety Tips & Cleaning Instructions Read the safety instructions carefully before using your Sansa® MP3 player. 1. Read this entire manual to ensure proper usage. 2. Keep this User Manual for future reference. 3. Do not use headphones/earphones while driving, cycling, or operating any motorized vehicle. This may create a traffic hazard and may be illegal in some areas. It can also be dangerous to play your music with headphones/earphones at high volume while walking, or engaged in other activities. You should exercise extreme caution and discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. 4. Avoid using headphones/earphones at high volume. Hearing experts advise against continuous loud and extended music play. Keep the volume at a moderate level, so that you are better able to hear outside sound and are considerate of the people around you. 5. Keep your player away from sinks, drinks, bathtubs, showers, rain, and other sources of moisture. Moisture can cause electric shocks with any electronic device. 6. Follow these tips to keep your player working well for a long time: • Clean your player with a soft lint-free cloth. • Do not allow young children to use your player unsupervised. • Never force any connector into the ports of your player or your computer. Make sure your connectors are the identical shape and size before you connect. • Do not disassemble, crush, short-circuit or incinerate battery as it may cause fire, injury, burns or other hazards. Disposal Instructions Do not dispose of this device with unsorted waste. Improper disposal may be harmful to the environment and human health. Please refer to your local waste authority for information on return and collection systems in your area. 2 Sansa® Clip+ Overview 2 This chapter helps you familiarize yourself with the features and functionality of your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Sansa® Clip+ MP3 Player Overview Congratulations on your purchase of a Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player! Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player is a sleek and wearable MP3 player with a removable clip and a 1.0” display screen. Additionally, you can listen to FM radio broadcasts and enjoy a built-in microphone for voice recordings. The Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player comes with a built-in rechargeable battery which can last up to 15 hours during typical use.* Features • Digital audio player – supports MP3, WAV, WMA, secure WMA, FLAC, Ogg-Vorbis, and audiobook files. • slotRadio TM playback - plays slotRadio TM cards • FM radio – includes an integrated FM radio with digital tuner for listening to livebroadcast FM radio programs. • Voice recorder – supports voice recording function with built-in microphone. • EQ effect – select an EQ mode to personalize your music experience. • Internal memory – store data on the internal memory. • microSD™ card slot – add a microSD™ card for additional storage or insert a slotMusic™ or slotRadio™ card with pre-loaded content. • Music subscription compatible - works with most subscription services using WMDRM10, such as Rhapsody® . • Supports gapless playback. Minimum System Requirements • Windows XP SP2 or Mac OS 10.3 (mass storage class) • Windows Media Player v10 (for playlist creation and synchronizing library and device) • Intel Pentium class PC or higher • USB 2.0 port for hi-speed transfers and charging *Based on continuous playback at 128 Kbps MP3; actual life and performance may vary depending upon usage and settings; battery not replacaeable. Package Contents Please unpack your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 Player and check that the following were included: • Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player • Earphones • USB 2.0 Cable • Quick Start Guide Sansa® Clip+ MP3 Player at a Glance 1 Display screen Displays the information and status here 2 Up/Play/Pause Press to move up one item, play, or pause 3 Left/Previous/Rewind Press for previous track, rewind, or move left 4 Select Press to select the item 5 Down/Submenu Press to move down or to open sub-menu options 6 Right/Forward Press for next track, fast forward, or move right 7 Home Returns to the Main Menu; press-and-hold to lock or unlock 8 microSDHC™ card slot Insert microSD™, microSDHC™, slotMusic™ or slotRadio™ card Sansa® Clip+ Overview 3 here 9 Earphone Port Connect earphones here to listen 10 Power Press-and-hold to turn the player on or off 11 Microphone Built-in microphone for voice recording 12 USB Port Plug USB cable here to connect to the computer 13 Volume Up Turns up the volume 14 Volume Down Turns down the volume 15 Clip Attach player to clothes, a bag, or another convenient place. Main Menu Options Music – browse and listen to music, audio books, or recordings Radio (if applicable) – listen to FM broadcast radio and save presets Voice – record voice using built-in microphone Settings – view or customize the Sansa player features slotRadio – playback slotRadio™ cards Sansa® Clip+ Overview 4 Playback Screen 1 Shuffle Indicates that the Shuffle function is enabled 2 Repeat Indicates that the Repeat function is enabled 3 Current/Total Tracks Displays the current track number and the total number of tracks 4 Battery Indicator Displays the battery status 5 Artist Name Displays the artist name 6 Title Displays the track name 7 Play Time Displays the elapsed time 8 Progress Bar Displays the progress of the current track 9 Play/Pause Displays the music or recording playback status Battery The Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player comes with an internal rechargeable battery. To use the player for the very first time, remember to fully charge the battery. You can charge your Sansa® player through the USB port of your computer, a car adapter (not included), or AC adapter (not included). Charging To charge the battery, please follow these steps: 1. Connect the larger end of the USB cable into an available USB port on the PC. 2. Connect the smaller end of the USB cable into the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. 3. The computer must be on for most USB ports to charge your battery. Your Sansa® will show connected and the yellow charging indicator will appear. The battery level indicator will blink while charging. You will not be able to play music while the player is connected to a computer. 4. To stop recharging, disconnect the USB cable. Sansa® Clip+ Overview 5 Sansa® Clip+ Overview 6 The battery can also be charged using an AC adapter (not included) or a car adapter (not included). You will be able to play your device while charging with one of the adapters. If your device is not recognized by your computer, make sure you have Windows Media™ Player version 10 or higher installed. You can also change the USB Mode to MSC if you do not have Windows Media Player. For Mac, ensure that USB Mode is set to Auto Detect or MSC mode. See Section 9 – Settings for more details. NOTE: Some low-power USB ports may not be able to provide enough charge power. Also note that the rechargeable battery included inside the player is not replaceable. 3 Basic Usage This chapter provides you the basic usage instructions for your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Basic Usage Power Button The power button is located on the top of the player. It can turn the player on or off, lock or unlock the buttons, or reset the player. Power On Press the Power button once to turn on the player. The Main Menu will appear after it has been booted up. Power Off Press and hold the Power button for approximately 2 seconds to turn off the player. Lock Function All function keys will be disabled once Lock is engaged by pressing-and-holding the Home button once while the player is powered on. All the buttons on the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player will not operate when Lock is active. Please note that the Lock function only works when the player is on. The following message will appear on the display screen if any buttons is pressed while the player is in the locked position. Music should continue to play even if the player is locked. To unlock the player, press-and-hold the Home button until an “Unlocked” message appears. 7 Reset If the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player freezes up for any reasons, press the Power button and hold it for approximately 15 seconds. This is similar a power down of the player. However, be aware that once you perform the reset, any adjustments you made during the last operation will be lost. Connecting to your Computer To connect the Sansa® player to your PC, follow these instructions: 1. Connect the larger end of the USB cable into an available USB port on the PC. 2. Connect the smaller end of the USB cable into the dock connector of the player. 3. The player will show “Connected” on its display screen. 4. The player will appear in My Computer as Sansa Clip+. (In Mac OS, the player will appear on your desktop as a removable disk named SANSA CLIPP.) NOTE: For Mac OS, the Clip+ player must be set to Auto Detect or MSC mode in the USB Mode settings. See Section 9 – Settings for more details. Auto Detect or MTP mode Basic Usage 8 Basic Usage MSC mode Removing the player from your computer: WARNING: Do not disconnect the player while it’s transferring data. Disconnecting the player from the computer while data are being transferred may damage the player. Windows – Simply disconnect the USB cable from the player after you have finished charging, transferring, firmware upgrading, or synchronizing files. Mac – Eject the removable disk by dragging the icon to the Trash and then disconnect the USB cable. 94 Loading Contents 10 This chapter shows you how to transfer music files from your computer to your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Loading Content Loading Music You can transfer music from your computer to the Sansa® MP3 player using the drag-anddrop method or using music management software like Windows Media Player. Drag and Drop (Windows) Follow these steps to drag-and-drop music to your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player: 1. Connect your Sansa® Clip+ player to your PC. 2. Select Open device to view files using Windows Explorer on initial connection or by going to My Computer. 3. Double-click on the Sansa Clip+ MP3 player. 4. Double-click on Internal Memory. 5. Double-click on the Music folder. 6. Drag and drop music files from your computer to the Sansa® MP3 player’s Music folder. You can also drag and drop files to a microSD™ card inside your player by going to My Computer > Sansa Clip+ > External uSD Card. You can only drag and drop files to the card if you have write permissions for the card. Drag and Drop (Mac) Follow these steps to drag-and-drop music to your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player: 1. Connect your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player to your Mac computer. 2. Double-click on the removable disk named SANSA CLIPP that appears on your desktop. 3. Double-click on the Music folder. 4. Drag and drop music files from your computer to the player’s Music folder. NOTE: Remember to eject the removable disk before disconnecting your player. You can also drag and drop files to a microSD™ card inside your player by doubleclicking the second removable disk that appears when you connect your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. NOTE: The second removable disk will display with the card’s name, just as if you connected it via a card reader. You can only drag and drop files to the card if you have write permissions for the card. Windows Media Player Before you can create playlists and transfer (or synchronize) them to your Sansa® MP3 player, you need to show Windows Media Player where your songs are located. Adding Music Files to Library… 1. To add music files to WMP 11’s library, follow these steps: 2. Click the arrow below the Library tab. 3. Make sure Music is selected then click Add to Library… 4. In the Add to Library dialog box, select one of these options then click OK. - My personal folders: Use this option to monitor the digital media files stored in your personal Music folder as well as any files stored in the public Music folders that everyone who uses your computer has access to. - My folders and those of others that I can access: Use this option to monitor the digital media files stored in your personal Music folder, the files stored in the public Music folders, as well as the files stored in the personal Music folders that belong to other users on your computer. Creating Playlists To create playlists for Windows Media Player, follow these steps: Loading Contents 111. Launch Windows Media Player. 2. Clear the List pane by clicking the Clear List Pane button. 3. Click the arrow below Library Tab then select Create Playlist. 4. Type in the name of your Playlist. 5. Click Songs from your Library then drag them to the List Pane. 6. To re-arrange the songs, drag them up or down in the List Pane. Loading Contents 127. Click Save Playlist. Transferring Playlists To transfer playlists to your Sansa® MP3 player, follow these steps: 1. Connect your Sansa® player to the PC. 2. Select Sync digital media files to this device using Windows Media Player on initial connection. 3. Right-click on Sansa Clip+, and then select Set Up Sync. Loading Contents 134. Click to select the Sync this device automatically check box. 5. Select Personal Playlists from the dropdown menu on the left pane. 6. Highlight any playlists that you want to transfer to your player, click Add then Finish. 7. Synchronization will start as soon as you click Finish. To see sync status, click on the Sansa Clip+ MP3 player, and then click Sync Results. Loading Contents 14Loading Contents 155 Playing Contents 16 This chapter shows you how to play music on your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Playing Content Playing Music Follow these steps to play music, audiobooks, and voice recordings: 1. Select Music from the Main Menu. Voice recordings are located in Recordings. 2. Select Play All, Recently Added, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, My Top Rated, Playlists, Podcasts, Audiobooks, Recordings (Voice), or Folders. 3. Highlight and select the desired track or file to play. 4. Press the >>| button to skip to the next song or press-and-hold to fast forward. 5. Press the |<< button once to go back to the beginning of the current song or press |<< button twice to go back to the previous song. Press-and-hold the |<< button to rewind. 6. The following options are available during music playback by pressing the Submenu button (but not during slotRadio™ card playback, which permits skipping but not repeating of songs). Add song to GoList 1. Select Add Song to GoList. 2. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Remove song from GoList This option is only available when the current song is already added to the GoList. 1. Select Remove Song from GoList. 2. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Rate Song 3. Select Rate Song. 4. Press the Up or Down button to select a rating. 5. Press Select. 6. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Repeat 1. Move down to Repeat. 2. Press Select to toggle and choose a repeat mode: • Off: No repeat of tracks • Song: Repeat the current track • All: Repeat all selected tracks 3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Shuffle 1. Move down to Shuffle. 2. Press the Select button to toggle between Shuffle on and Shuffle off (to play songs in random order, set Shuffle to ON). 3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Music EQ The Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player provides various EQ modes such as: Rock, Pop, Jazz, Classical, Funk, Hip Hop, Dance, Full Bass, Full Treble, and Custom. 1. Select Music EQ. 2. Select an equalizer mode. 3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen. Replay Gain Replay Gain is a method of maintaining a constant perceived volume level during playback. For more information on Replay Gain, please visit our Knowledgebase (kb.sandisk.com). 1. Select Replay Gain. 2. Press select on Mode to apply Replay Gain on Song, Album, or disable Replay Gain. 3. Press select on Pre-Gain to select the Replay Gain level. 4. Press the |<< button once to return to the previous menu or press |<< button twice to return to the playback screen. Delete Song 1. Select Delete Song. 2. Select Yes to confirm. Track Info 1. Select Track Info. 2. Press the Up or Down button to scroll through the track information. 3. Press the |<< button once to return to the previous menu or press |<< button twice to return to the playback screen. Playing Contents 17Playing music from a preloaded microSD™ Card Note: The microSD logo will appear upside-down when properly oriented to insert into the microSD card slot. microSD™ card with content 1. Insert a microSD card with content into the microSD card slot. The player will display the message: “Refreshing your media.” 2. Select Music. 3. Select Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres or Recently Added to navigate to the music you wish to listen to. 4. Alternately, from the Music menu, select Folders > External uSD Card, and select either Play All or continue navigating through the folders to the file name of the song you want. Individual songs will display with a card icon to indicate they are stored on the external microSD™ card. Artists and Albums will not display an icon. slotMusic™ card 1. Insert a slotMusic™ card into the microSD™ card slot. The player will display the message: “Refreshing your media.” 2. Select the slotMusic icon that appears in the main menu. This replaces the slotRadio icon that normally appears in the menu. 3. All songs on the card will be listed. Select a song to begin playing through the slotMusic album. Playing Contents 18Playing Contents slotRadio™ card slotRadio™ cards contain hundreds of songs arranged into playlists called Channels. Your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player can play slotRadio cards, but playback behavior will differ from your standard media per the instructions below. You can also go to www.slotradio.com to learn more about slotRadio cards and available titles. 1 Current/Total Channels Display the current channel number and the total number of channels 2 Battery Indicator Display the battery status 3 Channel Name Display the channel name 4 Artist Name - Title Display the song’s artist name and title 1. Insert a slotRadio™ card into the microSD™ card slot. The player will display the message: “Refreshing your media.” 2. From the Main Menu, select slotRadio. 3. Press the Select button to begin playing. 4. Press the Submenu button to skip to the next channel. 5. Press the >>| button to skip to the next song within a channel. 6. Press >|| to pause or resume playback. Pressing select toggles the screen view from now playing to a graphic equalizer to the next song preview. NOTE: In slotRadio™ mode, the |<< button will not function. You cannot restart a song or go to the previous song. All songs eventually repeat randomly on their own. 196 FM Radio 20 This chapter provides you instructions on how to listen to FM broadcast radio and to program the preset stations on the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. FM Radio The Sansa® MP3 player includes an integrated FM radio for listening to live broadcast FM stations. Listening to FM Radio To listen to live broadcast FM station, follow these steps: 1. From the Main Menu, select FM Radio. 2. A radio frequency menu will appear. 3. Press |<< or >>| to adjust and search for the desired frequency, or select preset by pressing Select. 4. For fast search, press and hold the |<< or >>| buttons. Programming FM Presets You can program up 40 preset stations. To program the preset stations on your player, follow these steps: 1. Press the Submenu button in Radio mode. 2. Select Add Preset to save current frequency into presets. 3. Select Delete Preset to remove current frequency from presets. This option is only available when the current frequency is already added. 4. Select Auto Presets to allow the player to automatically search and store stations with the strongest broadcast signals as the preset favorite stations. 5. Select View All Presets to view all stored presets. a. Select Delete All Presets to erase all stored preset stations. 7 Recording (if applicable) 21 This chapter shows you how to use your Sansa® Clip+MP3 player’s built-in microphone. Recording Voice Recording The Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player has a built-in microphone allowing you to record your own voice, an interview, or other speech. To start voice recording, follow these steps: 1. From the Main menu, select Voice. 2. Select Record Now. 3. To pause recording, press the >|| button. 4. To resume, press the >|| button again. 5. To stop recording, press Select. A pop-up window will appear on the screen. Select Yes to save recording. The recording will be saved in the RECORD/VOICE folder. 6. Press |<< button to return to the previous menu. NOTE: For Home and Personal Use This product is intended to be used for recording and playback for your home and personal enjoyment. Copying and commercial use of copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner may be prohibited by law. Use of your media player, in compliance with all copyright and applicable intellectual property laws, remains the responsibility of the user of the product.8 Deleting Music Files 22 This chapter shows you how to delete contents on your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Deleting Music Files There are 2 ways to delete music files. You can delete them from the player directly or using the computer. To delete music files directly from the Sansa® MP3 player, follow these steps: 1. In playback mode, press Submenu button. 2. Select the Delete Song item. To delete music files using a computer, follow these steps: 1. Connect your Sansa® to the computer. 2. Select Open device to view files using Windows Explorer on initial connection. 3. Locate the folder where your music files are stored. 4. Highlight and delete the music files or folder. 9 Settings 23 This chapter shows you how to customize your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player’s settings Settings You can personalize your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player by selecting Settings from the Main Menu. Music Options From the Settings menu, select Music Options. Repeat 1. Move down to Repeat. 2. Press Select to toggle and choose a repeat mode: • Off: No repeat of tracks • Song: Repeat the current track • All: Repeat all selected tracks Shuffle 1. Move down to Shuffle. 2. Press Select to toggle between Off and On. Music EQ 1. Select Music EQ. 2. Select a desired equalizer mode. Replay Gain 1. Select Replay Gain. 2. Select Mode (Off, Song or Album) and a Pre-Gain volume (0dB to 12dB) to increase the player’s volume output for songs with replay gain information stored in their ID3 tags. This helps normalize the volume across tracks with varying loudness levels. You can learn more about Replay Gain at http://www.replaygain.org/. Audiobook Options From the Settings menu, select Audiobook Options. Ch. Mode When Chapter Mode is on, it allows you to skip chapters in an audiobook by pressing the |<< or >>| button. 1. Highlight Ch. Mode. 2. Press the Select button to toggle between Off and On. Speed 1. Highlight Speed. 2. Press the Select button to toggle between Normal, Fast, and Slow audiobook playback. Radio Options From the Settings menu, select Radio Options. Delete All Presets 1. Select Delete All Presets. 2. Select Yes to confirm. FM Region 1. Press Select on FM Region to toggle between USA or World. FM Mode 1. Press Select on FM Mode to toggle between Stereo or Mono. System Settings From the Settings menu, select System Settings. Backlight After being idle for a predefined time, the player will trigger the backlight timer program automatically to turn off the backlight. You can press any button to reactivate the backlight. 1. Select Backlight. 2. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired backlight timer (5 seconds to 1 hour). 3. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Settings 24Power Saver The Power Saver function turns the player off automatically when it has been idle for a defined period of time. 1. Select Power Saver. 1. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired time (off to 120 minutes) before power off. The player will not enter the power saver mode if it is set to off. 2. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Sleep The Sleep function turns the player off automatically after a defined period of playback time. 2. Select Sleep. 3. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired playback time before power off. The player will not enter the sleep mode if it is set to off. 4. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Language 1. Select Language. 2. Select a desired language. Date & Time 1. Select Date & Time. 2. Set the Month, Date, Year, Hour, Minute, and time format. Brightness To adjusting the display brightness for better viewing in different lighting environment, follow these steps: 1. Select Brightness. 2. Press the |<< or >>| button to set the contrast level. 3. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Volume 1. Select Volume. 2. Select Normal or High, and then press Select button. Reset Factory Settings 1. Select Reset Factory Settings. 2. Confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Info This displays information regarding your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player (such as firmware version, available/free memory, number of contents loaded in the player, and the battery status) Settings 25Settings 26 USB Mode USB Mode determines how your player communicates with your computer. Auto Detect is selected by default. You can also choose to always connect in MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) or MSC (Mass Storage Class) modes. Windows can use MTP or MSC mode, but Mac OS will only work with MSC mode. If you set the USB Mode to Auto Detect, make sure you are running Windows Media Player version 10 or higher. 1. Select USB Mode. 2. Select Auto Detect, MTP, or MSC. Format WARNING: Formatting will erase all your data. 1. Select Format. 2. Confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No. Press and Hold Determine whether pressing and holding the select button during playback will add a song to the GoList or allow you to rate the song. (Note that neither choice will function during playback of a slotRadio™ card.) 1. Select Press and Hold. 2. Select Add Song to GoList or Rate Song. 10 Tips & Troubleshooting 27 This chapter helps you get the most from your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player with tips and troubleshooting. Tips & Troubleshooting What music file formats does the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player support? The Sansa® MP3 Player will support MP3, WAV, WMA, secure WMA, FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, and audiobook formats. How do I drag music files to my Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player? As long as the files are WMA, MP3, FLAC, or Ogg Vorbis, they can be dragged into the Music folder. Secure WMA files cannot be dragged and dropped. Use Windows Media™ Player 10 or higher to sync protected files. Which bit rates will the Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player support? The Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player will support 64-320Kbps for MP3 and 32-192Kbps for WMA. FLAC and Ogg Vorbis are variable bit rate. Why should I update the firmware? You should always update the player to the latest firmware to ensure that it functions correctly and has all the latest features. Visit www.sandisk.com/clipplus to download the Sansa Firmware Updater. Some of my music files are on my player, but cannot be played. When I select them, another song begins to play. What is wrong? You may not have purchased the rights to play the song on an additional device. To test this, try to play a song that you have copied from an older CD and converted to MP3 format. If you can play that song, but not the song that will not play, then you need to purchase the rights to play the song. Is the player compatible with podcasts? As long as the podcasts are in MP3 format and an appropriate bit rate (32-320 kbps), then the player should be capable of playing the files.Why does my player say unknown artist/album? Normally this is because the ID3 tags or WMA meta-data information is missing. On your computer, right-click the song, choose Properties, Summary tab then Advanced. Then you can input the data such as Artist, Album, Song Title, Track Number, Genre, and Year. How do I reset my Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player? Press-and-hold the Power button for approximately 20 seconds, and then release the power button. Why can't I drag and drop OGG files to my Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player using Windows Media Player? To drag and drop OGG files to the Sansa® Clip player, you need to upgrade your Windows Media Player to version 11. Why won’t my Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player play music? Check to verify if the audio file type is supported. If the file type is supported, make sure that the file is not corrupted and that its license is up to date. Why isn’t my Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player being charged or detected by my computer when I connect it? Verify that you are using Windows Media Player version 10 or higher, reset your player, and try again. Tips & Troubleshooting 28This chapter provides information to help you get service and support for your Sansa® Clip+ MP3 player. Learn More, Service, and Warranty Information Getting Technical Support Before you contact Technical Support, we encourage you to read the Tips & Troubleshooting section to see if your question is covered there. If you have questions about the use or features of your Sansa player as well as other SanDisk products, please visit our Knowledgebase at kb.sandisk.com. You can also call the SanDisk Technical Support Center for US: 1-866-SanDisk (1-866-726- 3475), Worldwide: see www.sandisk.com/support for local country phone numbers. When you call us for support, please include as much information as you can from your packaging material. This will allow us to help you more quickly. SanDisk Manufacturer’sLimited Warranty SanDisk warrants to the end user, that this product, excluding content and or software supplied with or on the product, will be free from material defects in manufacture, will conform to SanDisk’s published product specifications and be fit for normal use during the Warranty Period specified in the table commencing on the date of purchase provided that the product is legally placed on the market. To make a warranty claim please contact SanDisk at the telephone number in the table or support@SanDisk.com within the Warranty Period and provide proof of purchase (showing date and place of purchase and name of the reseller) and product name, type and number. You may return the product after first obtaining a Return Material Authorization number and following any other guidelines listed. For further information see www.sandisk.com and select “support”. SanDisk may at its option repair this product or provide you with an equivalent product; and if unable to repair or replace the product, will refund the purchase price. SanDisk will not be liable for indirect or consequential damage (including loss of data), or for damage caused by improper use (including use in an incompatible device and use not in accordance with the instructions), or by improper installation, unprofessional repair, modification or accident. This constitutes SanDisk’s entire liability which will never exceed the price you paid for it, plus the necessary costs you made for the warranty claim. SanDisk products must not be used in applications where failure could threaten injury or life, such as life support systems. SANDISK DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. IF SANDISK CANNOT DISCLAIM IMPLIED WARRANTIES UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, THEN TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE, SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY DURATION ON Tips & Troubleshooting 29ANY REPLACED PRODUCT WILL BE THAT PORTION OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REMAINING ON YOUR ORIGINAL PRODUCT. National, state and local laws may grant you other rights that are not affected by this warranty. Warrantor N. America, Canada, S. America: SanDisk Corporation 601 McCarthy Boulevard Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 1-866-SANDISK (1-866-726-3475) Europe, Middle East & Africa & Asia Pacific: SanDisk International, Ltd., Lakeshore Drive, Swords, Co Dublin, Ireland Tel: +353-1-813-6070 Japan: SanDisk Limited (SDKK) 8F Nisso 15 Bldg. 2-17-19 Shin-Yokohama Kohoku-ku, Yokohama, Japan 222-0033 Product Name Warranty Period (Years) SanDisk Extreme® Line SanDisk Extreme® III SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Extreme® III 30MB/s Edition SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Extreme® SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (30****) SanDisk Extreme® CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (30****) SanDisk Extreme® III CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Extreme® IV CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (30 EMEA***) SanDisk Extreme® FireWire® Reader 3 SanDisk Extreme® USB 2.0 Reader 2 SanDisk Extreme® Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo™ Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Extreme® Ducati Edition SD™ Plus Card; SanDisk Extreme® Ducati Edition CompactFlash® Card; and SanDisk Extreme® Ducati Edition USB Flash Drive. Lifetime** (30****) SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II Line SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II SD™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) Tips & Troubleshooting 30SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk Ultra®/SanDisk Ultra® II SanDisk® Video HD™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***) SanDisk® Multi-Use (Standard Line) SanDisk® SD™ Cards 5 SanDisk® SDHC™ Cards 5 SanDisk® Memory Stick PRO Duo™ Cards 5 SanDisk® xD-Picture Card™ Type M Cards 1 SanDisk® microSD™ and SanDisk® microSDHC™ Cards 5 Gaming SanDisk® Gaming SD™ Cards for Wii™ Cards 5 SanDisk® Gaming Memory Stick PRO Duo™ Cards 5 Nintendo® DSi™ SDHC™ Cards 5 Netbook SanDisk® SDHC™ Cards 5 Cruzer® Line SanDisk® Cruzer® Micro USB Flash Drive 2 SanDisk® Cruzer® Micro Skin USB Flash Drive 2 SanDisk® Cruzer® Titanium USB Flash Drive 5 Mobile Line SanDisk® microSD™ and SanDisk® microSDHC™ Cards 5 SanDisk® microSD™ Mobile Memory Kit 5 SanDisk® Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) Cards 5 SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ microSD™ Cards 10 SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ microSDHC™ Cards 10 SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) Cards 10 SanDisk® Mobile Premier microSD™ Cards 10 SanDisk® Mobile Premier microSDHC™ Cards 10 Tips & Troubleshooting 31SanDisk® Mobile Premier Mobile Memory Kit 10 MobileMate™ Micro Reader 2 MobileMate™ SD™ Plus Reader 2 MobileMate™ SD™ Plus Reader 2 MobileMate™ Memory Stick® Plus Reader 2 Audio Visual Players Sansa® Clip Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA Sansa® View Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA Sansa® Fuze™ Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA slotMusic™ Player 90 (days) U.S.; 2 EMEA slotRadio™ Player 1 U.S.; Canada slotRadio™ To Go Player and Card 90 (days) U.S.; 2 EMEA ** Lifetime *** EMEA and regions not recognizing lifetime **** Germany and regions not recognizing lifetime For Technical Support over the Internet, visit: www.sandisk.com and select “support” Technical Support in the United States and Canada can be contacted by calling: 1-866-726-3475. Technical Support in other regions can be obtained by contacting: Support Argentina (AR) #08006662931 Australia (AU) 866 680 4007 Belarus (BY) 8-800101-- 8008539045 Brazil (BR) #08008914506 Chile (CL) #1230-020-0404 China (CN) North China (CN) South 10800 852 1251 10800 152 1251 Columbia (CO) #018005180538 Estonia (EE) + 1 407 253 3479 France (FR) +33 (0) 171 230 328 Germany (DE) +49 (0) 69 50072840 Greece (GR) 407 253 3476 Hong Kong (H/K) 30027886 India (IN) 0008001003277 Israel (IL) 1 809 440513 Italy (IT) +(39) 026-9682-725 Japan (JP) 866 349 2698 Korea (KR) 080-688-0880 Mexico (MX) #0018662122012 Netherlands (NL) (31) 202 015 029 Tips & Troubleshooting 32New Zealand (NZ) + 1 866 698 0701 Portugal (PT) +351 214159093 Romania (RO) + 1 407 253 3477 Russia (RU) +7 (8) 495-795-0847 Saudi Arabia (SA) 866 514 2521 Singapore (SG) 800-852-3607 South Africa (ZA) 0800980949 Spain (ES) +34 914534311 Sweden (SE) 020-79 52 02 Switzerland (CH) 0800 564811 Taiwan (TW) 00801-85-6062 Turkey (TR) 902124140820 UAE/Dubai (AE) 8000 4414358 UK (GB) +44 (0) 207-365-4193 End User License Agreement SANDISK CORPORATION END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ THE TERMS OF THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”). BY DOWNLOADING, USING OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND, IF APPLICABLE, PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE WAS INCLUDED WITH YOUR PURCHASE OF HARDWARE, YOU MUST RETURN THE ENTIRE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PACKAGE IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE WAS ACCESSED ELECTRONICALLY, CLICK “NOT ACCEPT” TO STOP THE DOWNLOAD PROCESS. The firmware, computer programs, device drivers, data or information (“Software”) is provided to each person who downloads, uses or installs the Software (“you” or “your”) under the terms of this Agreement between you and SanDisk Corporation (“SanDisk,” “we,” or “us”), and may be subject to additional terms and conditions in an agreement between you and SanDisk’s third party licensors (“Licensors”). The Software is owned by SanDisk or its Licensors. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. 1. Software License. Subject to the terms and conditions contained herein, SanDisk grants to you a limited, non-exclusive, non-sub licensable, transferable in accordance with these terms, royalty-free license under SanDisk’s intellectual property rights to use the Software in executable form solely for your personal use only with a SanDisk product and only on a single computer or other hardware device at any given time (the "License"). The Software is “in use” when it is either downloaded, copied, loaded into RAM or installed into the hard disk or other permanent memory of a computer or other hardware device. 2. Restrictions. SanDisk and its Licensors retain all rights in the Software not expressly granted to you. You may not modify, adapt, translate or create derivative works (new versions) of the Software. No source code is provided under this Agreement. You may not Tips & Troubleshooting 33reverse engineer, disassemble, decompile, rent, lease, or encumber the Software, or recreate or discover the source code of the Software. You may not embed or combine the Software within any other software product or device. The Software contains proprietary and confidential information of SanDisk and its Licensors, which you agree not to discover or reveal to others. Any and all permitted copies of the Software that you make or distribute must be unmodified, must contain all of the original Software’s proprietary notices, and must include or be accompanied by this Agreement. You may not separate the Software into component parts for sublicense, distribution or transfer to a third party. 3. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” WITH NO WARRANTIES AND NEITHER SANDISK NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, IN LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, OR EQUIVALENTS UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY JURISDICTION. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU, AND NOT SANDISK, ITS LICENSORS OR RESELLERS, ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. 4. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL SANDISK OR ITS LICENSORS, OR THEIR RESPECTIVE DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, CONSULTANTS, LICENSORS, LICENSEES OR AFFILIATES, BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE DOWNLOAD, DISTRIBUTION, USE OR PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SANDISK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ANY REMEDY PROVIDED FOR HEREUNDER IN ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL SANDISK’S OR ITS LICENSORS’ TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID TO US FOR THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE. 4. The Software is provided with “RESTRICTED RIGHTS.” Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 52.227-14 and DFARS 252.227- 7013 et seq. Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgement of SanDisk’s proprietary rights therein. Contractor or Manufacturer is SanDisk Corporation, 601 McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, CA 95035. 5. Transfer. If you sell or otherwise transfer the SanDisk product that incorporates the Software as a whole, you may transfer the Software as fully integrated into such product provided that you also supply this Agreement to the purchaser or recipient of the product, at which time all of your rights under this Agreement will immediately cease. Except as stated above, you may not assign or transfer this Agreement in part or in whole, and any attempt to do so shall be void. 6. Termination. We may terminate this Agreement and the license immediately and without notice if you breach it. Upon termination of this Agreement, you must delete or destroy all copies of the Software. 7. High Risk Activities. The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed or intended for use in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, or any other application in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or property damage (collectively, “High Risk Activities”). SANDISK AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK Tips & Troubleshooting 34Tips & Troubleshooting 35 ACTIVITIES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LIABILITIES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM SUCH USE. 8. General. This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties with respect to your use of the Software. If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. This Agreement is governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California and controlling U.S. federal law without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. Any action or proceeding arising from or relating to this Agreement shall be adjudicated in the state or federal courts of Santa Clara County, California, and the parties hereby agree to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of such courts. You will not remove or export from the United States or re-export from anywhere any part of the Software or any direct product thereof to any country in violation of U.S. Export Administration Regulations, or a successor thereto, except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws and regulations including, without limitation, those of the U.S. Department of Commerce. Any waivers or amendments of this Agreement shall be effective only if made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of each party. You agree that the Licensors are third party beneficiaries of this Agreement to enforce your performance of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The provisions of Sections 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement. FCC Regulation This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and then on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 2. Correct the equipment to a different outlet so that the equipment and receiver are on different branch circuits. 3. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. Copyright Safety information About this user’s guide Features of your new product Introduction Getting started Network setup (Dell 1130n only) Basic setup Media and tray Printing Management tools Maintenance Troubleshooting Supplies Specifications Appendix Glossary www.dell.com | www.support.dell.com Dell 1130 Dell 1130nadjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special media Macintosh common Macintosh problems driver installation for network connected adjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special mediaCopyright Information in this document is subject to change without notice. ©2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Toner Management System are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 1.00Safety information These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. Operating environment Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Operating method Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. Children may be burned. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. It can cause damage to the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. It could cause damage to the machine. Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. You may get hurt. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution When moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at least two people. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG [a] or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger.Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. [a] AWG: American Wire Gauge Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. Children may get hurt. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. You may get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. It can cause damage to the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. This could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. The machine should only be repaired by Dell service technician. Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. It can cause an explosion or fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.About this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. Read the safety information before using the machine. If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See Troubleshooting.) Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See Glossary.) All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below: Document is synonymous with original. Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide: Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute (“Crossreference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information. (See Finding more information.) Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. Material name Description Quick Install Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies. Printer Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing. (See Using help.) Dell website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Dell websites www.dell.com or support.dell.com.Features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. Special Features Print with excellent quality and speed You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 600 dpi (Dell 1130) and up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Dell 1130n) effective output. Dell 1130 prints up to 18 ppm, A4-sized paper or up to 19 ppm, letter sized paper. Dell 1130n prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper and letter-sized paper. Handle many different types of printable material Manual tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The 250-sheet tray supports plain paper. Create professional documents Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. (See Using watermarks.) Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See Printing posters.) You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. (See Using overlay.) Save time and money To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual). (See Printing on both sides of paper (Manual).) Print in various environments You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh systems. Your machine is equipped with a USB interface. The Dell 1130n comes with a built-in Network interface, 10/100 BaseTX. IPv6 This machine supports IPv6 (Dell 1130n only).Features by Models The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Features by models include: FEATURES Dell 1130 Dell 1130n Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● [a] ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ● [a] USB 1.1 ( ●: Included, Blank: Not available)Introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine: This chapter includes: Machine overview Control panel overview Understanding the control panel Machine overview Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Document output tray 6 Manual feeder 2 Control panel 7 Manual feeder guide 3 Front cover handle 8 Output support 4 Front cover 9 Toner cartridge 5 Tray 1 Rear viewThis illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Rear cover 3 USB port 2 Network Port [a] 4 Power receptacle [a] Dell 1130n only. Control panel overview This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Jam Shows the status of jam occurrence of your machine. (See LEDs.) 2 Online/Error Shows the status of your machine. (See LEDs.) 3 Cancel Stops an operation at any time. Also there are more functions. (See Understanding the control panel.) 4 Power Turns power on or off. (See Understanding the control panel.) Understanding the control panel LEDs The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status. LED Status Description Jam ( ) Orange On A paper jam has occurred. (See Clearing paper jams.) Online/Error ( ) Off The machine is off-line.Green On The machine is in power saver mode. The machine is on-line and can receive data from the computer. Blinking When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer. When the LED blinks rapidly , the machine is printing data. Red On The cover is open. Close the cover. There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. The machine has stopped due to a major error. Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact your service representative. The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life [a] . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. Toner is low. Replace the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life [a] of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner. (See Redistributing toner.) [a] Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED turned on and the printer stops printing. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or re-manufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will be appear in the Printer Status Monitor program window. If the problem persists, call for service. Buttons (Cancel button) By pressing the (cancel button), you can: Function Description Printing demo page [a] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Printing a demo page.) Printing configuration sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks fast, and release. (See Printing a machine report.) Printing a cleaning sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Cleaning the inside.) Cancel print job Press (cancel button) during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. Manual print Press (cancel button) each time you load a sheet of paper in the manual tray when you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application. [a] When you print the demo page for Dell 1130, configuration sheet is printed as well. [b] Dell 1130n only (Power button) This button must be used to turn the machine on/off. Turning on the machine 1. Plug in the power cord. 2. Press (power) on the control panel.If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for 1 second.Getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Setting up the hardware Printing a demo page Supplied software System requirements Installing USB connected machine’s driver Sharing your machine locally Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below: Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays. The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing. (See Altitude adjustment.) Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.3. Remove tape holding the machine. 4. Install the toner cartridge. 5. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) 6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 7. Turn the machine on. (See Turning on the machine.) This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails. Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly. To print a demo page: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 2 seconds. Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software using the supplied CD. The software CD provides you with the following software. OS Contents Windows Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Printer Status Monitor: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. Printer Settings Utility (Dell 1130n only): This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer desktop. Dell Toner Management System™: Displays the status of the printer and the name of the job when send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System™window also displays the level of toner remaining and allows you to order replacement toner cartridge. Firmware Update Utility: This program helps you to update printer’s firmware. SetIP (Dell 1130n only): Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. Macintosh Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Linux Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. System requirements Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Microsoft® Windows® Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024 MB) 15 GB Windows 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors 512 MB (2048 10 GB2008 R2 (2 GHz or faster) MB) Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. Administrator rights are required to install the software. Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM Requirements (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 Intel Processors PowerPC G4/ G5 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 Intel Processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 Intel Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB Linux Item Requirement (recommended) Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) Installing USB connected machine’s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Only use an USB cable shorter than 3 m (118 in. ). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window should appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive and click OK.If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. Then, click Next. The Custom allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the on-screen instructions. If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following window will appear.After connecting the machine, click Next. If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No on the following screen. The installation starts and a test page will not print at the end of the installation. The installation window in this user guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use. 5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7. 6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 7. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for printing on a Macintosh computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 15. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will automatically be installed as well. The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer easily in UI based management tool. (See Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.) 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh If you still failed to run the software CD type the followings in sequence: [root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.5. When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager. Installing the driver in the text mode: If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to install the driver, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the terminal screen. The installation is completed. When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instructions above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal screen. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. Click Uninstall. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Finish. Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print.1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4. Right click your printer icon. 5. For Windows XP/Server 2003/ Server 2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 6. Select the Sharing tab. 7. Check the Change Sharing Options. 8. Check the Share this printer. 9. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7. Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4. Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4. Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (Dell 1130n only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Network environment Introducing useful network programs Using a wired network Installing network connected machine’s driver IPv6 Configuration Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine: Item Requirements Network interface Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Network operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7/2008 Server R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols TCP/IPv4 DHCP, BOOTP DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec (See IPv6 Configuration.) Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings in network environment. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. Embedded Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to: Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. Customize machine settings. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. (See IP setting using SetIP Program) TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IP setting using SetIP Program This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2. Double click Security Center. 3. Click Windows Firewall. 4. Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1. Insert the supplied software CD provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD/DVD drive.) 3. Double-click Application > SetIP. 4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Dell Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as Embedded Web Service. Restoring factory default settings You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment. Restoring factory default settings using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network. 4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. Installing network connected machine’s driver Windows You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below. This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK. If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a network printer. Then, click Next. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the guide on the window. 5. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer. To verify your printer’s IP address, print a Network Configuration page. (By pressing the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds, then release. (Example IP Address is 13.121.52.104) To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update. For Windows operating system, Start > Control Panel and start windows firewall, and deactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. Click Finish. After the driver setup, you may enable firewall. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click IP Printer. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field. 16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Install Linux Driver 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop. 4. Double-click the Linux folder. 5. Double-click the install.sh icon. 6. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 8. Select Network printer and click Search button. 9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 10. Select your machine and click Next. Add network Printer 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click Add Printer… 3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4. Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6. Select your machine and click Next. Input the printer description and Next7. 8. When the add printer is done, click Finish. IPv6 Configuration TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems not working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again. (See Restoring factory default settings.) To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address: The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.) Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. Manual address configuration 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click TCP/IP. 4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5. Select the Router Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6. Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines is displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL . 2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report.3. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]) Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.Basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: Altitude adjustment Setting the default tray and paper Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only) Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print.Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine. 1. High 1 2. High 2 3. High 3 4. Normal For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 3. Click the Apply button. This can also be adjusted via Embedded Web Service. Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job.In the computer Windows 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Click Paper tab. 6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type. 7. Press OK. Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Print. 3. Go to Paper Feed pane. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Go to Paper Feed. 6. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 7. Go to Paper pane. 8. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 9. Click Print to print. Using power saving feature When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power. For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select the time you want, in the Power Save drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Click Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list, and then click Apply. Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided software CD. 2. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Emulation Type. 4. Select your preferred font. 5. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only) Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. This chapter includes: Selecting print media Changing the tray size Loading paper in the tray Printing on special media Using the output support Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine. Guidelines to select the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: Poor print quality Increased paper jams Premature wear on the machine. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide. Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements. The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used. (See Print media specifications.) Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Type Source Simplex printing For details about paper size, see Print media specifications. For details about paper type, see Print media specifications. tray 1 manual tray Duplex printing (Manual) [a] Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond, Archive tray 1 [a] 75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lb bond) only Changing the tray size The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.1. Support guide 2. Paper length guide 3. Guide lock 4. Paper width guide 1. With one hand press and hold the guide lock, and with the other hand, hold the paper length guide and support guide together. Slide the paper length guide and support guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot. 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. Insert the paper into the tray. 3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack. 4. Squeeze the paper width guides and slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray. Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm curl. Loading paper in the tray Tray 1 1. Pull out the paper tray . And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading. (See Changing the tray size.) 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 3. And place paper with the side you want to print facing down. 4. Set the paper type and size for the tray 1. (See Setting the default tray and paper.) If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. (See Print media specifications.) Manual tray The manual tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper. Tips on using the manual tray If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press (cancel button) each time you print a page and load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the manual tray. To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing. This also applies to other types of print media. Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems. (See Print media specifications.) Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual tray. 1. Load the paper in the manual tray.Do not force the paper beyond the surface with mark when loading. When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline. (See Printing on special media.) When papers overlap when printing using manual tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again. When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically. 2. Squeeze the manual tray paper guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew. 3. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 4. Open Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 5. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 6. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 7. Start printing in application. If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the (cancel button). Repeat this step for every page to be printed. Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray. When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray. (See Print media specifications.) Types Tray 1 Manual tray Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Bond ● Color ● CardStock ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Preprinted ● Cotton ● Recycled ● ● Archive ● ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved. 2Plain: 60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lb) Normal plain paper. Thick: 90 (24 lb) thick paper. Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper. Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond. Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper. CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock. Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) labels. Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency paper. Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope. Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper. Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper. Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled. Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this option. Envelope Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the printer first and center of the manual tray. If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, crease or black bold lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing. 1. Pressure lever When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jam may occur. Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air. Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged. Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. Do not use stamped envelopes. Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1. Acceptable 2. Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet. Transparency To avoid damaging the machine, only use transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully. To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet. To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines. When selecting labels, consider the following factors: Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F). Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction. Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine. Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 127 mm (5.00 inches) long. In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. If media weight is over 160 g/m2 (43 lb), try printing in the rear cover (face up). Letterhead/Preprinted paper Single-sided Double-sided Tray1 Face down Face up Manual tray Face up Face down Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. Photo Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. Glossy Load one paper to the manual tray at a time, glossy side facing up. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only. Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). Using the output support The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The printer sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output tray, make sure that the rear cover is closed.If you are using A5 paper, fold the output tray. Otherwise, printed pages might be mis-aligned or jammed.Printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: Printer driver features Basic printing Opening printing preferences Using help Using special print features Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Printing to a file (PRN) Macintosh printing Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features: Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver Feature Windows Machine quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Different source for first page ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications. (See System requirements.) When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamationmark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. Macintosh basic printing. (See Macintosh printing.) Linux basic printing. (See Linux printing.) The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list. The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting. (See Opening printing preferences.) 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows: 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 and Vista, double-click your machine. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing on the control panel. Opening printing preferencesYou can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using a favorite setting The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for Dell tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. 3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete. You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list.Using help Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. Using special print features Special print features include: Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Printing posters. Printing booklets (Manual). Printing on both sides of paper (Manual). Change percentage of your document. Fitting your document to a selected paper size. Using watermarks. Using overlay. Advanced Options. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Specification of the page layout: Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages. Printing on both sides of paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper. (See Print media specifications.) We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. The Double-Sided Printing (Manual) feature is available only for the tray 1. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. None Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4. Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list. 6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4. Click Update to save the changes. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Deleting a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlay An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image. 1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. 2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears. 4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.) 6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document: 1. Create or open the document you want to print. 2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Openingprinting preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints on your document. The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay. Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list. 3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4. Click Delete. 5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Advanced Options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Graphics tab. This options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. Advanced (Dell 1130n only): You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button. True Type Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document. Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe®. Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting. Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting. Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen. Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per pagewithout a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print outputs. The values are Normal, Light, and Dark. For Dell 1130n, you change darknesss in the Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Changing the default print settings Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. To create a file: 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system. Macintosh printing This chapter explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. USB connected (See Macintosh.) Network connected (See Macintosh.) Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version. Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, thesharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document. Darkness: This option allows you to enhance printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark. Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings Printer Settings tab provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features: Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Reprint When Jammed: When this option is checked, the machine retains the image of a printed page until the machine signals that the page has successfully exited the machine. If a paper jam occurs, the printer will reprint the last page sent from the computer after you have cleared the jam. (Dell 1130 only) Power Save: When this option is checked, the machine turns to the power save mode after the selected time. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Linux printing Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using lpr. 3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties. 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window.General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns. Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position. Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens.The following five tabs display at the top of the window: General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: Introducing useful management tools Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Using the Printer Status Monitor Introducing useful management tools Using the printer settings utility Firmware update utility Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only). Using the Printer Status Monitor. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Your Embedded Web Service window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Embedded Web Service, an embedded web server. Use Embedded Web Service to: View the machine’s device information and check its current status. Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. Change printer preference. Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. Get support for using the machine. To access Embedded Web Service: 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Embedded Web Service overview Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as the machine’s IP address, remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and so on. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, enabling EtherTalk and so on. Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting security information. Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending email. You can also connect to Dell website or download drivers by selecting Link. E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to the specified e-mail address automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup. 4. Set required settings. Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail notification function. After setting the network environment, select the recipient list. And just by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to receive an alert. 5. Click Apply. Setting the contact information Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to use E-mail notification option. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Select Support. 4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or E-mail address. 5. Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. Using the Printer Status Monitor The Printer Status Monitor program can only be used in the Windows system. Printer Status Monitor is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Printer Status Monitor is installed automatically when you install the machine software. To use this program, you need the following system requirements: Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with your machine. (See System requirements.) Understanding Printer Status Monitor If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Printer Status Monitor. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Status Monitor. The Printer Status Monitor program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information. 1 Printing Status The Printer Status Monitor displays the current status of the printer. 2 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). 3 Order Supplies Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online. 4 Help me When error occurs, Help me button appears. You can directly open troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Troubleshooting Guide. Changing the Printer Status Monitor Program Settings Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. Using the Dell Toner Management System™ The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer (printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and the toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer. . Using the printer settings utility When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed. To open the Printer Settings Utility. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features. For more information, click the help icon button. Firmware update utility Firmware Update Utility allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Firmware Update Utility. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer. Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1. Printers Configuration 2. Ports ConfigurationTo use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printer tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine. The printer control buttons are, as follows: Refresh: Renews the available machines list. Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. Refresh: Renews the classes list. Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. Port configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. Refresh: Renews the available ports list. Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: Printing a machine report Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) Cleaning a machine Storing the toner cartridge Tips for moving & storing your machine Printing a machine report You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. A configuration page prints out. For Dell 1130 this information is provided on the demo page. Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, the LED blinks red. You can set the option for this LED to blink or not. 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Toner Low Alert. Select the appropriate setting and then click Apply. Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer. Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Printing a cleaning sheet (Dell 1130n only) If you are experiencing blurred or smeared printouts, you can clear the problem by printing a cleaning sheet, provided by your machine. To print the cleaning sheet: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 10 seconds. OPC cleaning sheet: Cleans the OPC drum of the toner cartridge. This process will produce a page with toner debris, which should be discarded. Your machine automatically picks up a sheet of paper from the tray and prints out a cleaning sheet with dust or toner particles on it. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat surface To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area. While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. 4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotton black. 5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover. 6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Dell suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Dell toner cartridge.Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge: Inside the protective bag from the original package. Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine. Do not store consumables in; Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%. An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. Direct sunlight or room light. Dusty places. A car for a long period of time. An environment where corrosive gases are present. An environment with salty air. Handling instructions Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Dell and refilled toner cartridge Dell does not recommend or approve the use of non-Dell brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Dell’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Dell brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. Tips for moving & storing your machine When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality. When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: Redistributing toner Tips for avoiding paper curls Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams Solving other problems Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life: White streaks or light printing occurs. The LED blinks red. If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out. 3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed. Tips for avoiding paper curls 1. Open the rear cover. 2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side. 1. Pressure lever Keep the rear cover opened during printing. Only use when the printout has more than 20 mm curl. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines. Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See Loading paper in the tray.) Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. Do not mix paper types in a tray. Use only recommended print media. Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing up in the manual tray. Clearing paper jams If a paper jam occurs, the LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. To resume printing after clearing paper jams, you must open and close the front cover. To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.In tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not exit, go to the next step. 2. Pull out tray. 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. (See Inside the machine.) 4. Insert tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes. In the manual tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine. 2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it down. 2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. 3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing automatically resumes. In exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray. If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step. 3. Open the rear cover. 4. Pull the pressure levers down and remove the paper. Return the pressure levers to their original position.1. Pressure lever If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 5. Pull the fuser cover levers down and remove the paper. Return the fuser cover levers to their original position. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 6. Close the rear cover. 7. Open and close front cover, printing automatically resumes. Solving other problems The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, call for service. Power problems Click this link to open an animation about power problems. Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Plug in the power cord and press (power) on the control panel. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. For Local PrintingFor Network Printing (Dell 1130n only) Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. (See Print media specifications.) Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. (See Print media specifications.) Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual tray. An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the following: The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact your service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct. (See Opening printing preferences.) The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) The machine is malfunctioning. Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative. Checking an error message is also possible from the Printer Status Monitor on your computer. The machine does not print. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Get more hard disk space and print the document again. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen. (See Opening printing preferences.) A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only).Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF file correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. (See Redistributing toner.) If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cart The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative. Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page: A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. (See Print media specifications.) The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick. (See Opening printing preferences.) If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. White Spots If white spots appear on the page: The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean theinside of your machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) The paper path may need cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If white vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: Change to a lighter weight paper. (See Print media specifications.) Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Toner smear If toner smears on the page: Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper. (See Print media specifications.) Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around. The paper may not meet paper specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin. (See Opening printing preferences.) An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the correct altitude setting to your machine. (See Altitude adjustment.) Common Windows problemsCondition Suggested solutions “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” - > “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. I encounter error “Cannot open port device file” when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat® Reader®. Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages.Supplies This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: How to purchase Available supplies Replacing the toner cartridge Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. How to purchase To order Dell-authorized supplies and accessories visit www.dell.com/supplies, or contact your local Dell dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.dell.com or support.dell.com, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: Type Average yield [a] Part name Standard capacity toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages 3J11D High capacity toner cartridge Approx. 2,500 pages 2MMJP [a] Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge. Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life: The Printer Status Monitor program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. The machine stops printing. At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine. (See Available supplies.) 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out.3. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 4. Remove the paper protecting the toner cartridge by pulling the packing tape. 5. Locate the sealing tape at the end of the toner cartridge. Carefully pull the tape completely out of the cartridge and discard it. The sealing tape should be longer than 60 cm when correctly removed. Holding the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape straight to remove it from the cartridge. Be careful not to cut the tape. If this happens, you cannot use the toner cartridge. Refer to the helpful pictures on the cartridge wrapping paper. 6. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.8. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.Specifications This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications. This chapter includes: Hardware specifications Environmental specifications Electrical specifications Print media specifications The specification values here are based on preliminary data. See www.dell.com or support.dell.com for current information. Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 197 mm (7.76 inches) Depth 389 mm (15.31 inches) Width 360 mm (14.17 inches) Weight Machine with consumables Dell 1130: 7.25 Kg (15.98 lbs) Dell 1130n: 7.30 Kg (16.09 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.23 Kg (2.70 lbs) Plastic 0.19 Kg (0.42 lbs) Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level [a] Ready mode 26 dB(A) Printing mode Dell 1130: 49 dB(A) Dell 1130n: 50 dB(A) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F) Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH Storage (unpacked) 10 to 80% RH [a] Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty. Item Description Power rating [a] 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 360 W Ready mode Dell 1130: Less than 45 W Dell 1130n: Less than 60 W Power save mode Dell 1130: Less than 4.5 WDell 1130n: Less than 6.5 W Power off mode Less than 0.8 W [a] See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine. Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Print media weight [a] /Capacity [b] Tray1 Manual tray Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 0 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) Not available in tray1. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 60 to 70 g/m2 (16to 19 lb bond) to 19 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Transparency Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 138 to 146 g/m2 (36.81 to 38.91 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Labels [c] Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement, PostCard 4x6 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 105 to 163 g/m2 ( 28 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm (3.00 x 5.00 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) [a] If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lb), load a paper into the tray one by one. [b] Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. [c] Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).Appendix Dell technical support policy Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus). Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1. Visit support.dell.com, and verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. 2. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page, and select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Warranty and return policy Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the Product Information Guide.Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g 802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephoneline noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). IntranetA private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11- 4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as anaid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped. An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is thenetwork address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Dell™ Inspiron™ 1150 Manual del propietario Modelo PP08LNotas, Avisos y Precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos, y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. Abreviaturas y siglas Para obtener una lista completa de las abreviaturas y siglas, consulte el archivo Dell™ Inspiron™ Help (Ayuda de Dell™ Inspiron™). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los sistemas operativos de Microsoft® Windows® no son aplicables. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo. © 2004 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, AccessDirect, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile y DellNet son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. que Dell Inc. utiliza bajo licencia. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP08L Noviembre de 2004 N/P F7577 Rev. A01Contenido 3 Contenido Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vista lateral derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vista posterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Problemas con el correo electrónico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Instalación de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Supresores de sobrevoltaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cómo apagar el equipo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Medidor de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Si la batería no se carga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Si la batería dura poco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Reprogramación del botón. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Métodos abreviados del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Bandeja de CD o de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Administración de energía. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft ® Windows ® . . . . . 35 Superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Personalización de la superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Caracteres inesperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Problemas con los CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD . . . 39Contenido 5 Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Cómo copiar CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Consejos prácticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Asistente para configuración de redes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Problemas con la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Establecimiento del tipo de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows ® XP . . . . . 45 7 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con el escáner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con las unidades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible . . . . . 55 Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas con la tarjeta PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas generales del programa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Un programa se bloquea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Un programa no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Aparecen mensajes de error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Solución de otros problemas técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se moja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se cae o se daña . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ¿Qué es un controlador?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Identificación de controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Volver a instalar los controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP . . . . . . . 60 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . . 61 Restauración de su sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . . . . 62 8 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Módem y minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo cambiar el módem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Unidad de CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 9 Apéndice Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Contenido 7 Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visión general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema . . . . . . . 87 Pantallas de configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema . . . . . . . . . 88 Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Velocidad variable del ventilador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” . . 90 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” . . . . . 90 Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mLocalización de información 9 Localización de información NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones no estén disponibles para su equipo o en determinados países. NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará • Información sobre la garantía • Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.) • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información reglamentaria • Información ergonómica • End User License Agreement (Contrato de licencia de usuario final) Guía de información del producto Dell™ • Cómo instalar mi equipo Diagrama de instalación10 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Consejos sobre la utilización de Microsoft® Windows® • Cómo reproducir CD y DVD • Cómo utilizar el modo de espera y el modo de hibernación • Cómo cambiar la resolución de la pantalla • Cómo limpiar el equipo Archivo de ayuda 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías del usuario. 3 Haga clic en Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas están situadas en el panel inferior de su equipo. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el equipo cuando utilice support.dell.com o póngase en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. • Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 11 • Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y preguntas más frecuentes • Comunidad — debates en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, llamada de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación • Servicio y asistencia — Historial de asistencia y estado de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica • Referencia — Documentación del equipo, detalles en la configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica • Descargas — Controladores certificados, revisiones y actualizaciones de software • —Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del equipo, también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS. NSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del sistema operativo y asistencia para las unidades de disquete de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell™, procesadores Intel® Pentium® M, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. El software detecta automáticamente su equipo y sistema operativo e instala las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración. Sitio web Dell Support — support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región para ver el sitio web de asistencia adecuado. NOTA: Los clientes de empresas, instituciones gubernamentales y educativas también pueden utilizar el sitio web personalizado Dell Premier Support de premier.support.dell.com. Es posible que este sitio web no esté disponible en todas las regiones. • Cómo utilizar Windows XP • Documentación de mi equipo • Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por ejemplo, un módem) Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará12 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mDescripción del equipo 13 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior SE G U R O D E L A P A N T A L L A — Mantiene la pantalla cerrada. PA N T A L L A — Para obtener más información sobre la pantalla, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Seguro de la pantalla Pantalla Altavoces (2) Indicadores de estado del teclado Teclado Indicadores de estado del dispositivo Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctil Botón de alimentación Botón Dell AccessDirect14 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL TECLADO Los indicadores luminosos verdes situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente: TE C L A D O — El teclado incluye tanto un teclado numérico como la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® . Para obtener información sobre los métodos abreviados de teclado, consulte la página 34. AL T A V O C E S — Para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces integrados, pulse los métodos abreviados de teclado de control del volumen. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 34. Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado. Se enciende cuando Bloq Mayús está activado. Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está activado. 9 ADescripción del equipo 15 INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Luz verde continua: la batería se está cargando. Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado). – Luz naranja parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja. – Luz naranja continua: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja. BO T O N E S D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Los botones de la superficie táctil ofrecen las mismas funciones que un mouse. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. SU P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — La superficie táctil y sus botones ofrecen las mismas funciones que un ratón. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. Se enciende al encender el equipo. Parpadea o se apaga en modo de administración de energía. Se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos. AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague nunca el equipo si el indicador parpadea. Parpadea para indicar el estado de carga de la batería.16 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m BO T Ó N D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo (consulte la página 28). Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague totalmente (esto puede tardar unos segundos). BO T Ó N DE L L™ AC C E S SDI R E C T™ — Pulse este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como herramientas educativas y de soporte. Si lo desea, puede reprogramar el botón para que inicie el programa que prefiera. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 33). Vista lateral izquierda RA N U R A P A R A T A R J E T A PC — Admite una PC Card, como un módem o un adaptador de red. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de tarjetas PC en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Ranura para la PC Card Conectores de audio (2) Unidad CD o DVDDescripción del equipo 17 CONECTORES DE AUDIO UN I D A D D E CD O DVD — Admite una unidad de CD, una unidad de DVD, una unidad de CD-RW o una unidad combinada CD-RW/DVD. Vista lateral derecha BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. Conecte los auriculares o los altavoces al conector Conecte un micrófono al conector Batería/ compartimento de la batería Conector para módem Rejillas de ventilación Ranura para cable de seguridad18 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. RA N U R A P A R A C A B L E D E S E G U R I D A D — Sirve para conectar al equipo un dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado. Para obtener más información, consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo. AVISO: Antes de comprar un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo. Conecte la línea telefónica al conector de módem. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 19 Vista posterior RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. CO N E C T O R P A R A E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Conecte un adaptador de CA al equipo. NOTA: Utilice sólo el adaptador de CA proporcionado con el equipo. El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado. Conectores USB (2) Conector de red Conector de vídeo Conector del adaptador de CA Rejillas de ventilación Conector del adaptador de CA Adaptador de CA20 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo. No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma eléctrica puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de un maletín. AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable. CONECTORES USB CONECTOR DE VÍDEO CONECTOR DE RED AVISO: El conector de red es ligeramente más grande que el conector de módem. Para evitar dañar el equipo, no conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. Conecta dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una impresora. Conecta un monitor externo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Conecta el equipo a una red. Los indicadores luminosos del conector indican la actividad de las comunicaciones de red con cable e inalámbricas. Para obtener información sobre el uso del adaptador de red, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 21 Vista inferior CU B I E R T A D E L A M I N I T A R J E T A PCI/M Ó D E M — Cubre el compartimento que contiene el módem y la minitarjeta PCI. Consulte la página 71. BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. SE G U R O D E L I B E R A C I Ó N D E L A B A T E R Í A — Libera la batería. Consulte la página 31 para obtener instrucciones. CU B I E R T A D E L M Ó D U L O D E M E M O R I A — Cubre el compartimiento que contiene los módulos de memoria y el pasador de liberación de la unidad de CD o DVD. Consulte la página 68. UN I D A D D E D I S C O D U R O — Almacena software y datos. Cubierta del módulo de memoria Seguro de liberación de la batería Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI Batería/ compartimento de la batería Unidad de disco duro Rejilla de ventilación22 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mConfiguración de su equipo 23 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país. Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), como por ejemplo, AOL o MSN. El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet: • Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica. Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL y de módem por cable. • Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea telefónica existente. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente. • Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea de TV por cable local. Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem por cable, póngase en contacto con su ISP para obtener instrucciones de configuración. Configuración de la conexión a Internet Para configurar una conexión para AOL o MSN: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga doble clic en el icono MSN Explorer o AOL del escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® . 3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. Si el escritorio no contiene ningún icono MSN Explorer o AOL, o si desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Internet Explorer. Aparece la ventana Asistente para conexión nueva 3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.24 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correspondiente: • Si no dispone de un ISP y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de proveedores de servicios Internet [ISP]. • Si el ISP ya le ha proporcionado la información de configuración, pero no ha recibido el CD de instalación, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente. • Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios Internet [ISP]. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, siga con el step 6. De lo contrario, siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP. 6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada dentro de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Utilice la información de configuración proporcionada por el ISP para realizar la configuración. Si conectarse a la internet le está dando problemas, consulte el apartado “Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet”. Si no puede conectarse a internet pero lo ha podido hacer anteriormente, puede ser que el ISP esté sufriendo una interrupción de servicio. Póngase en contacto con su ISP para comprobar el estado de servicio o intente conectarse más tarde. Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet AVISO: Conecte el módem únicamente a una toma de teléfono de pared analógica. Si conecta el módem a una red de telefonía digital, se dañará. AVISO: Los conectores de módem y de red tienen un aspecto similar. No conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. NOTA: Si se puede conectar con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), esto quiere decir que el módem funciona correctamente. Si está seguro de que el módem funciona correctamente y, aun así, tiene problemas, póngase en contacto con su ISP. CO M P R U E B E L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y conéctela a un teléfono. Espere el tono de marcado. Asegúrese de que tiene un servicio telefónico por tonos. Intente conectar el módem a otra clavija de teléfono. Las velocidades de conexión lentas pueden deberse a ruido telefónico, así como a las condiciones de la línea telefónica o de la red. Póngase en contacto con su compañía telefónica o su administrador de red para obtener más información.Configuración de su equipo 25 CO N E C T E E L M Ó D E M D I R E C T A M E N T E A L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Si dispone de otros dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, por ejemplo, un contestador automático, una máquina de fax, un supresor de sobrevoltaje o un divisor de línea, omítalos y utilice la línea telefónica para conectar el módem directamente a la toma de teléfono de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N — Verifique que la línea telefónica está conectada al módem. CO M P R U E B E L A L Í N E A T E L E F Ó N I C A — Pruebe a utilizar otra línea telefónica. Si utiliza una línea con una longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta. TO N O D E M A R C A D O I R R E G U L A R — Si tiene servicio de buzón de voz, es posible que oiga un tono de marcado irregular cuando tenga mensajes. Póngase en contacto con la compañía telefónica para obtener instrucciones sobre la restauración del tono de marcado. DE S A C T I V E L A L L A M A D A E N E S P E R A (T E L É F O N O D E R E T E N C I Ó N D E L L A M A D A) — Consulte en la documentación de la compañía telefónica las instrucciones sobre cómo desactivar esta función. A continuación, ajuste las propiedades de la conexión de acceso telefónico a redes. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware, en Opciones de teléfono y módem, seleccione la ficha Reglas de marcado y, a continuación, haga clic en Editar.... 3 En la ventana Editar ubicación, asegúrese de que la opción Deshabilitar llamada en espera al marcar: está activada y, a continuación, seleccione el código adecuado según aparece en la guía telefónica. 4 Haga clic en Aplicar y en Aceptar. 5 Cierre la ventana Opciones de teléfono y módem. 6 Cierre la ventana Panel de control. CO M P R U E B E Q U E E L M Ó D E M S E C O M U N I C A C O N WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware y, a continuación, en Opciones de teléfono y módem. 3 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems. 4 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem. 5 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y en Consultar módem para comprobar que el módem se comunica con Windows. Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente. Problemas con el correo electrónico CO M P R U E B E Q U E E S T Á C O N E C T A D O A IN T E R N E T — Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si la opción Trabajar sin conexión está activada, desactívela y conéctese a Internet. Instalación de una impresora AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo. Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones: • Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados • Conectar la impresora al equipo26 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta • Ponerse en contacto con el fabricante para obtener asistencia técnica Cable de la impresora Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin ningún cable, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado, asegúrese de que sea compatible con la impresora. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del equipo. Conexión de una impresora USB NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido. 1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho. 2 Instale el controlador de la impresora, si es necesario. Consulte la documentación incluida con la impresora. 3 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje. Problemas con la impresora CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Asegúrese de que el cable de la impresora está conectado correctamente al equipo (consulte la página 26). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. Cable de la impresora USB Conector USB del equipo Conector USB de la impresoraConfiguración de su equipo 27 CO M P R U E B E Q U E L A I M P R E S O R A E S T Á E N C E N D I D A — Consulte la documentación que se proporciona con la impresora. CO M P R U E B E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A I M P R E S O R A — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio. 2 Haga clic en Panel de control. 3 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware. 4 Haga clic en Ver impresoras o impresoras de fax instaladas. Si aparece el modelo de la impresora, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de la impresora. 5 Pulse Propiedades y, a continuación, pulse la ficha Puertos. Asegúrese de que la opción Imprimir en los siguientes puertos es USB 001 (Puerto de la impresora). VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Consulte la página 59. Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la alimentación eléctrica: • Supresores de sobrevoltaje • Acondicionadores de línea • Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) Supresores de sobrevoltaje Los supresores de sobrevoltaje y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra sobrevoltajes ayudan a evitar los daños derivados de los picos de voltaje, que pueden producirse durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico o inmediatamente después de las interrupciones en la alimentación eléctrica. El nivel de protección suele ser proporcional al precio del supresor de sobrevoltaje. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobrevoltaje proporcionan cobertura de garantía para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de sobrevoltaje. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección. Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes dispositivos. AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobrevoltaje no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el equipo de la toma de corriente. Muchos supresores de sobrevoltaje disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem. Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobrevoltaje para obtener instrucciones sobre la conexión del módem. AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobrevoltaje ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico.28 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Acondicionadores de línea AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de CA a un nivel bastante constante. Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado. NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, puede conectarlos a un enchufe múltiple independiente que proporcione protección contra sobrevoltajes. Un SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones y las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Cómo apagar el equipo AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo. NOTA: Si lo prefiere, en vez de apagar el equipo, puede configurarlo para que entre en el modo de suspensión o de hibernación. Para obtener más información, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos, salga de todos los programas, haga clic en el botón Inicio y luego en Apagar equipo. 2 En la ventana Apagar equipo, haga clic en Apagar. El equipo se apaga cuando concluye el proceso de cierre del sistema.Uso de la batería 29 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería NOTA: Las baterías de los equipos portátiles sólo están cubiertas durante el primer año de validez de la garantía limitada del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre la garantía de Dell de su equipo, consulte la Guía de información del producto. Utilice una batería para suministrar energía al equipo cuando no esté conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como equipamiento estándar. NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga) disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo. El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería varía en función de las condiciones de funcionamiento. La autonomía de la batería puede reducirse significativamente cuando se realizan, entre otras, las siguientes operaciones: NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica mientras se graba en un CD. • Uso de unidades ópticas, especialmente unidades de DVD y CD-RW. • Uso de dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, tarjeta PC o dispositivos USB. • Uso de configuraciones de pantalla de mucho brillo. • Uso de protectores de pantalla 3D u otros programas que utilizan mucha energía, como juegos 3D y programas de ingeniería. • Ejecución del equipo en modo de rendimiento máximo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Puede establecer las opciones de administración de energía para que se le avise cuando la carga de la batería esté baja. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería de iones de litio está diseñada para funcionar con equipos Dell™. No utilice la batería de otros equipos en su equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149 °F). Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. 30 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Comprobación de la carga de la batería La ventana y el icono del medidor de energía de Microsoft® Windows® , y la advertencia de batería baja proporcionan información sobre la carga de la batería. Medidor de energía El medidor de energía de Windows indica la carga que le queda a la batería. Para consultar el medidor de energía, pulse dos veces en el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más información sobre la ficha Medidor de energía, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, aparece un icono . Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el modo de hibernación se activa automáticamente. Cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 % de la carga, una ventana emergente se lo advierte. Para obtener más información sobre alarmas de bajo nivel de carga de batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Carga de la batería NOTA: el adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Cuando se conecta el equipo a un enchufe de alimentación eléctrica o se instala una batería mientras el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, éste comprueba la carga y la temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la carga. Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el verde y el naranja, la batería está demasiado caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma de corriente y espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente y continúe cargando la batería. NOTA: Puede dejar la batería en el equipo todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería impiden que se sobrecargue.Uso de la batería 31 Para obtener más información sobre la resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Extracción de una batería PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, desconecte el módem del enchufe telefónico de pared. 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado o conectado a una toma de corriente eléctrica. 2 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de la batería. 3 Extraiga la batería. Instalación de una batería Inserte la batería en el compartimento de la batería hasta que el pasador haga un “clic”. Almacenamiento de una batería Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un periodo prolongado de almacenamiento, deberá cargar la batería completamente antes de utilizarla. Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería NOTA: Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener información sobre el modo de espera. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Seguro de la batería Batería32 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera; pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Si el equipo no se enciende, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante unos segundos. CA R G U E L A B A T E R Í A — Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado. 1 Vuelva a instalar la batería. 2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente. 3 Encienda el equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E E S T A D O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si el indicador parpadea en color naranja o muestra un color naranja continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. Si el indicador parpadea en colores verde y naranja, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para cargarla. Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconéctelo de la toma de corriente y, a continuación, espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color naranja, puede que la batería esté defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) o busque la palabra clave en espera en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 10. VU E L V A A C O L O C A R L O S M Ó D U L O S D E M E M O R I A — Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se enciende pero en la pantalla no se ve nada, vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). Si la batería no se carga AP A G U E E L E Q U I P O — El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Si la batería dura poco CO N S U L T E E L A P A R T A D O “RE N D I M I E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A” E N L A P Á G I N A 29 — El tiempo de funcionamiento puede reducirse significativamente bajo determinadas condiciones. OP T I M I Z A C I Ó N D E L R E N D I M I E N T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R Y C O N S U M O D E E N E R G Í A — Consulte la página 88.Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 33 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™ Presione este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como las herramientas de soporte técnico y de formación o el explorador de Internet predeterminado. Reprogramación del botón Para cambiar la configuración del botón reprogramable o buscar información sobre el uso del botón: 1 Pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. 2 Pulse la ficha AccessDirect. 3 Pulse el botón Ayuda y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Teclado numérico El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas. Teclado numérico34 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado numérico está activo. Para utilizar la función numérica cuando el teclado numérico esté activado, pulse y la tecla que desee. Para desactivar el teclado numérico, pulse de nuevo. Métodos abreviados del teclado Funciones del sistema Bandeja de CD o de DVD Funciones de la pantalla Administración de energía Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas de Windows Activa y desactiva el teclado numérico Activa y desactiva el bloqueo de desplazamiento Expulsa la bandeja fuera de la unidad. Cambia la imagen de vídeo a la siguiente opción de pantalla. Entre las opciones están la pantalla integrada, un monitor externo y las dos pantallas a la vez. Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. y tecla de flecha hacia arriba Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) y tecla de fecha hacia abajo Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede reprogramar este método abreviado de teclado para activar otro modo de administración de energía utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana Propiedades de Opciones de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 9Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 35 Funciones de los altavoces Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de los caracteres, pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Aumenta el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Disminuye el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Activa y desactiva los altavoces integrados y los altavoces externos (si los hay) Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Maximiza todas las ventanas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Ejecuta el Explorador de Windows Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de búsquedaPC si el equipo está conectado a una red Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema36 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Superficie táctil La superficie táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento del dedo para permitir desplazar el cursor por la pantalla. Utilice la superficie táctil y sus botones del mismo modo que un mouse. • Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil. • Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para presionar el botón izquierdo de la misma. • Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque abajo-arribaabajo en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque abajo, deje el dedo sobre la superficie táctil y deslícelo por la superficie para mover el objeto seleccionado. • Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor en él y, a continuación, toque dos veces la superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces. Personalización de la superficie táctil Puede desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración utilizando la ventana Propiedades del ratón. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 En la ventana Propiedades del ratón, pulse la ficha Configuración de dispositivo. Para desactivar la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo y pulse Deshabilitar. Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctilUso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 37 Para cambiar la configuración de la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo, pulse Configuración, seleccione la configuración que desee y, a continuación, pulse Aplicar. 4 Pulse Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana y, a continuación, pulse de nuevo Aceptar para salir de la ventana Propiedades del ratón. Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón CO M P R U E B E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 Ajuste la configuración. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L M O U S E — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del ratón y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar el cable firmemente. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el mouse, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo. PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L M O U S E , E X A M I N E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el mouse. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo. Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el mouse debe estar defectuoso. RE I N S T A L E E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Consulte la página 59. Problemas con el teclado externo NOTA: Cuando conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su funcionalidad. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L T E C L A D O — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del teclado y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar correctamente el cable. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), espere 1 minuto y vuelva a encenderlo. 2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado parpadean durante la rutina de arranque. 3 En el escritorio de Windows® , pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas, seleccione Accesorios y pulse Bloc de notas. 4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. 38 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O, E X A M I N E E L T E C L A D O I N T E G R A D O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el teclado externo. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas , Accesorios y Bloc de notas. 5 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Caracteres inesperados DE S A C T I V E E L T E C L A D O N U M É R I C O — Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté encendido.Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 39 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD Para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar CD y DVD en el equipo, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Problemas con los CD o DVD Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD NOTA: Debido a los diferentes tipos de archivo que se utilizan en todo el mundo, no todos los DVD funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD. La vibración de las unidades de CD de alta velocidad es normal y puede ocasionar ruido. Dicho ruido no indica ningún defecto en la unidad o el CD. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O Z C A L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S C O — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. ASEGÚRESE DE QUE EL CD ESTÉ BIEN ENCAJADO EN EL EJE DE LA BANDEJA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D O E L D I S C O — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado (consulte la página 28). 2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte frontal de la unidad; empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja. 3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga.40 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual • Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando. • Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente. Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar DE S A C T I V E E L M O D O D E S U S P E N S I Ó N E N WI N D O W S A N T E S D E G R A B A R E N U N CD-RW — Busque la palabra clave en espera en el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A V E L O C I D A D D E G R A B A C I Ó N A U N A V E L O C I D A D I N F E R I O R — Consulte los archivos de ayuda relativos al software de creación de CD. SA L G A D E L R E S T O D E P R O G R A M A S A B I E R T O S — Para mitigar el problema, salga del resto de programas abiertos antes de grabar en el CD-RW. Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E L V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S ® — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. AJ U S T E E L V O L U M E N U T I L I Z A N D O M É T O D O S A B R E V I A D O S D E T E C L A D O — Pulse para desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos NOTA: El control de volumen de algunos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen no está puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado. CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E Q U E L O S A L T A V O C E S E S T Á N E N C E N D I D O S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. PR U E B E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Conecte el cable de audio del altavoz al conector de salida de línea del equipo. Asegúrese de que el control de volumen de los auriculares esté activado. Reproduzca un CD de música. EJ E C U T E L A A U T O P R U E B A D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — En algunos sistemas de altavoces, el altavoz para bajas Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 41 frecuencias incluye un botón de autoprueba. Consulte la documentación incluida con los altavoces con el fin de obtener las instrucciones para realizar autoprueba. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Cómo copiar CD y DVD NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al crear un CD. Esta sección se aplica sólo a equipos que disponen de una unidad de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R o una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW. Las siguientes instrucciones indican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD. También puede utilizar Sonic RecordNow con otros fines, como la creación de CD de archivos de audio en el equipo y la creación de CD de archivos MP3. Si desea obtener instrucciones, consulte la documentación de Sonic RecordNow incluida en su equipo. Abra Sonic RecordNow, haga clic en el icono de signo de interrogación de la parte superior derecha de la ventana y, a continuación, haga clic en RecordNow Help (Ayuda de RecordNow) o RecordNow Tutorial (Guía de aprendizaje de RecordNow). Cómo copiar un CD o DVD NOTA: Si dispone de una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW y tiene problemas de grabación, compruebe si hay revisiones de software disponibles en el sitio web de soporte de Sonic: support.sonic.com. NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no se pueden copiar con Sonic RecordNow. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→ RecordNow! 2 Haga clic en la ficha de datos o de audio, según el tipo de CD que desee copiar. 3 Haga clic en Exact Copy (Copia exacta). 4 Para copiar el CD o DVD: • Si tiene una unidad de CD o DVD, asegúrese de que la configuración sea correcta y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo lee el CD o DVD de origen y lo copia en una carpeta temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo. Cuando se le solicite, inserte un CD o DVD vacío en la unidad de CD o DVD y haga clic en OK (Aceptar). • Si dispone de dos unidades de CD o DVD, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el CD o DVD de origen y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo copia los datos del CD o DVD en el CD o DVD vacío.42 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Después de finalizar la copia del CD o DVD de origen, se expulsa automáticamente el CD o DVD que ha creado. Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos La unidad de CD-RW puede grabar dos tipos distintos de medios de grabación: discos CD-R y CD-RW. Utilice CD-R vacíos para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos. Después de crear un CD-R, no puede grabar en ese CD-R de nuevo sin cambiar el método de grabación (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice discos CDRW vacíos para grabar en CD, borrar, regrabar o actualizar datos en los CD. Consejos prácticos • Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft® Windows® para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o CD-RW sólo después de haber iniciado Sonic RecordNow y haber abierto un proyecto de RecordNow. • Utilice discos CD-R para grabar los CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo normales. Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para automóvil. • No se pueden crear DVD de audio con Sonic RecordNow. • Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en equipos en que se haya instalado software de BMP3. • No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW vacío al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un archivo de 650 MB en un CD vacío de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita 1 ó 2 MB del CD vacío para finalizar la grabación. • Utilice un CD-RW vacío para practicar la grabación en CD hasta que se familiarice con las técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW vacíos para probar un proyecto de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R vacío. • Consulte el sitio web de asistencia técnica de Sonic en support.sonic.com para obtener más información.Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 43 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red Antes de conectar el equipo a una red, es preciso instalar un adaptador de red y conectar un cable de red. Para conectar el cable de red: 1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del equipo. NOTA: Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para asegurarse de que está bien encajado. 2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como una toma de red de pared. NOTA: No utilice un cable de red en una toma telefónica de la pared. Asistente para configuración de redes El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP proporciona un asistente para la configuración de la red que le guiará en el proceso de compartición de archivos, impresoras o una conexión de Internet entre equipos en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes. 2 En la pantalla de bienvenida, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.44 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este equipo está conectado directamente a Internet, se activará el servidor de seguridad integrado que incluye Windows XP. 4 Complete la lista de comprobación y los preparativos necesarios, y vuelva a la pantalla del Asistente para configuración de red. 5 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Problemas con la red NOTA: Un indicador de conexión verde o parpadeante también podría indicar la presencia de un enlace de red inalámbrica en el área. CO M P R U E B E E L C O N E C T O R D E L C A B L E D E R E D — Asegúrese de que el conector del cable de red está bien conectado al conector del equipo y al enchufe de red de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L O S I N D I C A D O R E S D E R E D D E L C O N E C T O R D E R E D — El color verde indica que la conexión de red está activa. Si el indicador de estado no está en verde, pruebe a reemplazar el cable de red. El color ámbar indica que el controlador del adaptador de red está cargado y que el adaptador detecta actividad. CA M B I E E L C A B L E D E R E D — Pruebe a utilizar otro cable. Si hay más de un conector de red disponible, intente enchufar el cable en un conector diferente. RE I N I C I E E L E Q U I P O — Vuelva a intentar conectarse a la red. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N E L A D M I N I S T R A D O R D E L A R E D — Compruebe que la configuración de la red es correcta y que la red está en funcionamiento. Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica NOTA: Estas instrucciones sobre la red no se aplican a los productos Bluetooth™ ni celulares. Establecimiento del tipo de red NOTA: La mayoría de las redes inalámbricas son redes de infraestructura. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 45 Las redes inalámbricas se clasifican en dos categorías: redes de infraestructura y redes ad-hoc. Las redes de infraestructura usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso para conectar varios equipos. Las redes ad-hoc no usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso y se componen de equipos que difunden de uno a otro. Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows® XP La tarjeta inalámbrica requiere el software y los controladores adecuados para conectarse a una red. El software ya está instalado. Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen en la guía del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. La guía del usuario también está disponible en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com. Cuando encienda el equipo, aparecerá un mensaje emergente del icono de red en el área de notificación siempre que se detecte una red en la zona para la que su equipo no esté configurado. 1 Haga clic en el mensaje emergente o en el icono de la red con el fin de configurar el equipo para una de las redes inalámbricas disponibles. La ventana Conexiones de red inalámbricas muestra las redes inalámbricas disponibles en la zona. Red de infraestructura Red ad-hoc46 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Haga clic en la red que desee configurar y, a continuación, haga clic en Conectar o haga doble clic en el nombre de red de la lista. Si selecciona una red segura (identificada por un icono ), debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida. NOTA: La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta información. La red se configura automáticamente. NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red. Después de configurar el equipo para la red inalámbrica que ha seleccionado, otro mensaje emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a la red seleccionada. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 47 Por lo tanto, cada vez que se conecte al equipo en el área de la red inalámbrica, el mismo mensaje emergente le notificará la conexión a la red inalámbrica. 48 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mSolución de problemas 49 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones de la sección “Solución de problemas” y ejecute los Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™. Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico (Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell. 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga pulsado y pulse el botón de encendido del equipo para iniciar Dell Diagnostics. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® , siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos)y pulse . El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . 50 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell antes de continuar con los Dell Diagnostics. Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostic. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar). 6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. 7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar. Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics 1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea. 2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell. NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de preguntas. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las pruebas que desee ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 51 3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Mensajes de error Si el mensaje no aparece en la lista, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o el programa que se estaba ejecutando en el momento en que apareció el mensaje. Ficha Función Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración. TH E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E (EL A R C H I V O Q U E S E E S T Á C O P I A N D O E S D E M A S I A D O G R A N D E P A R A L A U N I D A D D E D E S T I N O) — El archivo que está intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad. A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? “ < > | (UN N O M B R E D E A R C H I V O N O P U E D E C O N T E N E R N I N G U N O D E L O S C A R A C T E R E S S I G U I E N T E S: \ / : * ? “ < > |) — No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo.52 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla Si la pantalla aparece en blanco NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se recomienda conectar un monitor externo. IN S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A (IN S E R T E U N M E D I O D E A R R A N Q U E) — El sistema operativo está intentando arrancar desde un disquete o CD que no es de arranque. Inserte un disco o un CD de inicio. IN V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N-P L E A S E R U N SYS T E M SE T U P PR O G R A M (IN F O R M A C I Ó N D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N N O V Á L I D A; E J E C U T E E L P R O G R A M A D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L S I S T E M A) — La información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Este mensaje es más probable tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de configuración del sistema. Consulte el apartado “Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema” en la página 86. KE Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E R E L O J D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller (Controladora de teclado) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o el mouse durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E D A T O S D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E T E C L A B L O Q U E A D A D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Stuck Key (Tecla bloqueada ) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).Solución de problemas 53 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R — Si el indicador parpadea significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. • Si el indicador parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera. Pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. • Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación. • Si el indicador está encendido, puede que la configuración de administración de energía haya hecho que se apague la pantalla. Pulse cualquier tecla o mueva el cursor para salir del modo de suspensión. CO M P R U E B E L A B A T E R Í A — Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya agotado. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico con el adaptador de CA y enciéndalo. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene un indicador, asegúrese de que está encendido. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Busque la palabra clave en esperaen el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A I M A G E N D E V Í D E O — Si su equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, oprima para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla. NOTE: Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. AJ U S T E E L B R I L L O — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones sobre el ajuste del brillo. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AL E J E D E L M O N I T O R O D E L E Q U I P O E L A L T A V O Z D E B A J A S F R E C U E N C I A S — Si el sistema de altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm del monitor.54 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla Problemas con el escáner EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. OR I E N T E E L E Q U I P O H A C I A O T R A D I R E C C I Ó N — Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar una calidad baja de la imagen. AJ U S T E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E P A N T A L L A D E WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Apariencia y temas. 3 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla. 4 Pruebe valores diferentes en Calidad del color y Resolución de pantalla. CO N S U L T E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” — Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte la página 51. CO N E C T E U N M O N I T O R E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo y conéctele un monitor externo. 2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor, y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor. Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén defectuosos. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación del escáner está debidamente conectado a una fuente de alimentación eléctrica en funcionamiento y que el escáner está encendido. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el cable del escáner está debidamente conectado al equipo y al escáner. DE S B L O Q U E E E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el escáner no está bloqueado si éste dispone de una lengüeta o un botón de bloqueo. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L E S C Á N E R — Consulte la documentación incluida con el escáner para obtener instrucciones.Solución de problemas 55 Problemas con las unidades NOTA: Para obtener información sobre cómo guardar archivos en un disquete, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E E L D I S C O N O E S T Á P R O T E G I D O C O N T R A E S C R I T U R A — No se pueden guardar datos en un disco protegido contra escritura. Consulte la siguiente figura. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S Q U E T E — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. VU E L V A A C O N E C T A R L A U N I D A D — 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo. 2 Desconecte y vuelva a conectar la unidad. 3 Encienda el equipo. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Protegido contra escritura No protegido contra escritura Dorso del disquete56 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro Problemas con la tarjeta PC Problemas generales del programa NOTA: Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un disquete o CD. Un programa se bloquea DE J E Q U E E L E Q U I P O S E E N F R Í E A N T E S D E E N C E N D E R L O — Una unidad de disco duro recalentada puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. CO M P R U E B E L A U N I D A D P A R A V E R S I T I E N E E R R O R E S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la letra de la unidad (disco local) que desea examinar para comprobar que no tiene errores y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Herramientas. 4 En el grupo de opciones de Comprobación de errores, haga clic en Comprobar ahora. 5 Haga clic en Inicio. CO M P R U E B E L A T A R J E T A PC — Asegúrese de que la tarjeta PC está insertada correctamente en el conector. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A T A R J E T A — Haga doble clic en el icono Safely Remove Hardware (Quitar hardware con seguridad) de la barra de tareas de Windows. Asegúrese de que aparece la tarjeta. SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC N O P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta PC. CO N S U L T E L A D O C U M E N T A C I Ó N D E L S O F T W A R E — Muchos fabricantes de software ofrecen sitios Web con información que puede ayudarle a solucionar el problema. Asegúrese de que ha instalado y configurado correctamente el programa. Vuelva a instalar el programa si fuera necesario.Solución de problemas 57 Un programa no responde Aparecen mensajes de error Solución de otros problemas técnicos Si el equipo se moja PRECAUCIÓN: Sólo debe realizar este procedimiento si tiene la certeza de que es seguro hacerlo. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, se recomienda apagar la alimentación de CA del interruptor automático antes de desconectar los cables de la toma de corriente. Proceda con la máxima precaución cuando retire cables mojados de una toma de corriente. 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna del equipo y, a continuación, desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna de la toma de corriente. FI N A L I C E E L P R O G R A M A — 1 Pulse simultáneamente . 2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde. 3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea. RE V I S E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” E N L A P Á G I N A 51 — Localice el mensaje y lleve a cabo la acción adecuada. Consulte la documentación del software. VA Y A A L S I T I O W E B DE L L SU P P O R T — Vaya a support.dell.com para obtener ayuda sobre cuestiones generales de uso, instalación y solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. EN V Í E U N M E N S A J E D E C O R R E O E L E C T R Ó N I C O A DE L L — Vaya a support.dell.com y haga clic en Dell E-Mail en la lista Comunicar. Envíe un mensaje de correo electrónico a Dell sobre el problema; en unas horas recibirá una respuesta de Dell a través del correo electrónico. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N DE L L — Si no puede solucionar el problema con la ayuda del sitio web Dell™ Support ni con el servicio por correo electrónico, llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica (consulte la página 90). Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell.58 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 3 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 4 Extraiga las tarjetas PC que estén instaladas y colóquelas en un lugar seguro para que se sequen. 5 Extraiga la batería. 6 Pase un paño por la batería y colóquela en un lugar seguro para que se seque. 7 Pase un paño por el monitor. 8 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro (consulte la página 66). 9 Extraiga el módulo o módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). 10 Abra la pantalla y coloque el equipo con su lado derecho hacia arriba sobre dos libros u objetos similares para permitir que el aire circule a su alrededor. Déjelo secar como mínimo durante 24 horas en un lugar seco a temperatura ambiente. AVISO: No utilice medios artificiales, como un secador de pelo o un ventilador, para acelerar el secado. PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar recibir una descarga eléctrica, compruebe si el equipo está totalmente seco antes de continuar con el procedimiento. 11 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 12 Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria, la cubierta y los tornillos. 13 Vuelva a colocar la unidad de disco duro. 14 Reemplace las tarjetas PC que ha extraído. 15 Vuelva a colocar la batería. 16 Encienda el equipo y compruebe que funciona correctamente. NOTA: Para obtener información sobre la cobertura de la garantía, consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantia por separado que se envío con su equipo. Si el equipo no se enciende o no identifica los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Si el equipo se cae o se daña 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de corriente y del equipo. 3 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 4 Extraiga la batería y vuelva a colocarla. 5 Encienda el equipo.Solución de problemas 59 NOTA: Consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantía que incluía su equipo para obtener información sobre la garantía. Si el equipo no se enciende o no puede identificar los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Controladores ¿Qué es un controlador? Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un mouse o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador. Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede reconocer. Muchos controladores como, por ejemplo, el controlador de la impresora, se suministran con el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® . Deberá instalar los controladores si: • Actualiza el sistema operativo. • Reinstala el sistema operativo. • Conecta o instala un nuevo dispositivo. Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, realice los pasos descritos en las secciones siguientes para determinar si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario, actualizarlo. Identificación de controladores 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, desplácese hacia el final de la lista para ver si algún dispositivo tiene un signo de exclamación (un círculo amarillo con un [!]) en el icono del dispositivo. Si aparece un signo de exclamación junto al nombre del dispositivo, deberá volver a instalar el controlador o instalar uno nuevo. Volver a instalar los controladores AVISO: El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.60 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP Si se produce un problema en el equipo después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la función Desintalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP para restaurar la versión previamente instalada del controlador. Para usar la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, haga clic con el botón derecho en el dispositivo para el que se instaló el nuevo controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 7 Haga clic en la ficha Controladores. 8 Haga clic en Desinstalar controlador. Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la página 61) para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador. Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente. 1 Después de copiar los archivos de controlador en su unidad de disco duro, haga clic en el botón Inicio y haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y en Administrador de dispositivos. 4 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo, Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos). 5 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador. 6 Haga clic en la ficha Controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Actualizar controlador. 7 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 8 Haga clic en Examinar y examine la ubicación en la que extrajo anteriormente los archivos del controlador. 9 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente. 10 Haga clic en Finalizar y reinicie el equipo.Solución de problemas 61 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware Cómo usar el Solucionador de problemas de hardware de Windows XP: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la flecha para iniciar la búsqueda. 3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultados de la búsqueda. 4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un conflicto de hardware de mi equipo y haga clic en Siguiente. Restauración de su sistema operativo Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera: • La función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows XP devuelve su equipo a un estado operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a archivos de datos. • La función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP El sistema operativo Microsoft WindowsXP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite regresar a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los cambios efectuados en el hardware, software u otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el equipo en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows para obtener información sobre el uso de la función Restaurar sistema. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos. NOTA: Los procedimientos de este documento se han escrito para la vista predeterminada de Windows, por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el equipo Dell™ a la vista clásica de Windows. Creación de un punto de restauración 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Restauración del equipo a un estado operativo anterior Si se producen problemas después de instalar el controlador de un dispositivo, utilice la Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo (consulte la página 60) para resolver el problema. Si esto no funciona, utilice Restaurar sistema.62 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Antes de restaurar el equipo a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos y salga de los programas activos. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Asegúrese de que ha seleccionado Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior y haga clic en Siguiente. 3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el equipo. La pantalla Selección de un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración disponibles aparecen en negrita. 4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Si una fecha del calendario sólo tiene un punto de restauración, se seleccionará automáticamente dicho punto. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic en el punto de restauración que prefiera. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. La pantalla de Restauración finalizada aparece cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha finalizado de recoger los datos y a continuación se reinicia el equipo. 6 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir estos pasos usando un punto de restauración distinto o bien puede deshacer la restauración. Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar sistema AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec Utilice la función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) solamente como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Cualquier programa o archivo que se haya agregado desde que recibió su equipo— incluidos los archivos de datos—se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos Solución de problemas 63 incluyen: documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de música, etc. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y se quitarán las aplicaciones que se instalaron después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC: 1 Encienda el equipo. Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior de la pantalla. 2 Pulse en el momento exacto que vea la barra azul. Si no pulsa a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a reiniciarlo de nuevo. AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso. 3 En la pantalla siguiente que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar. 4 En la pantalla siguiente, haga clic en Confirmar. El proceso de restauración tardará de 6 a 10 minutos aproximadamente para finalizar. 5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo. NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Terminar y deje que el equipo se reinicie completamente. 6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí. El equipo se reinicia. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final, son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciede el equipo por primera vez. 7 Haga clic en Siguiente. Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia. 8 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Activación de la función Restaurar sistema Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro, se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar sistema está activada: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control . 2 Haga clic en Rendimiento y administración. 3 Haga clic en Sistema.64 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Haga clic en la ficha Restaurar sistema. 5 Compruebe que no está activada la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema. Eliminación de la función PC Restore AVISO: La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) le permite restaurar el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda que no elimine la función PC Restore de su equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función PC Restore de la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para volver el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado original. 1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local. 2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe. NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local. Si no existe la partición para la función PC Restore, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que borrar. 4 Haga clic en Aceptar para eliminar la partición. 5 Haga clic en Sí cuando aparezca un mensaje de confirmación. Se borra la partición y la partición c:\ se expande para incluir el nuevo espacio de disco disponible. Para comprobar el espacio disponible, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la unidad c:\ en el Explorador de Windows y seleccione Propiedades. 6 Haga clic en Terminar para cerrar la ventana PC Restore Removal (Eliminación de la función PC Restore). 7 Reinicie el equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 65 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar Este apartado proporciona procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes de su equipo. A menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones: • Ha realizado los pasos de la sección “Apagar el equipo.” • Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto. Herramientas recomendadas Los procedimientos de este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas: • Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas • Un destornillador Phillips • Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña • CD o disquete de actualización del programa BIOS flash Apagar el equipo Utilice las siguientes directrices de seguridad para proteger su equipo de posibles daños y para garantizar su propia seguridad personal. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell. PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas. AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del cable mismo. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está desconectando un cable de este tipo, pulse las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas del conector. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. 66 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de empezar a trabajar dentro del mismo. 1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del equipo se raye. 2 Apague el equipo. 3 Asegúrese de que el equipo y los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el equipo o los dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando desactivó el equipo, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos. 4 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del equipo y, a continuación, del enchufe de red de la pared. 5 Desconecte del equipo todas las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones. 6 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus salidas eléctricas y, a continuación, pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y, después, al equipo. 7 Retire las PC Card instaladas de la ranura para PC Card. 8 Cierre la pantalla y coloque el equipo hacia abajo en una superficie plana. AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe la placa base, debe retirar la batería principal cuando abra el equipo. 9 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación, extraiga la batería del compartimento. 10 Extraiga los módulos instalados. 11 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro. Unidad de disco duro PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque la caja metálica de dicha unidad. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) antes de extraer la unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo se encuentre encendido, en modo de suspensión o en modo de hibernación. AVISO: Las unidades de disco duro son muy frágiles; basta un ligero golpe para dañarlas. NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad para las unidades de disco duro de otros fabricantes ni proporciona asistencia técnica si sufren algún problema.Adición y sustitución de piezas 67 Para sustituir la unidad de disco duro en el compartimento correspondiente: 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no esté en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector antiestático. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. 3 Tire de la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo. 4 Extraiga la nueva unidad de su embalaje. Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector. 5 Inserte la unidad en el compartimento y empújela hasta que encaje totalmente en el compartimento. 6 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos. 7 Instale el sistema operativo para su equipo. 8 Instale los controladores y utilidades para su equipo. Tornillos (2) Unidad de disco duro68 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el transporte. Memoria Puede aumentar la memoria del sistema mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la placa base. Consulte la página 80 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para su equipo. 1 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la sección “Antes de comenzar” de la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Unidad de disco duro Embalaje de espumaAdición y sustitución de piezas 69 NOTA: Los módulos de memoria adquiridos a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo. 3 Si va a cambiar un módulo de memoria, debe retirar el módulo existente. a Separe cuidadosamente con las puntas de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que el módulo salga de su sitio. b Extraiga el módulo del conector. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Ganchos de fijación Módulo de memoria70 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo e instale el nuevo módulo de memoria: NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no arranque. Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error. a Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del conector. b Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta del módulo de memoria, extraiga el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo. 6 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al equipo y a una toma de corriente. 7 Encienda el equipo. Al reiniciarse el equipo, éste detecta la memoria adicional y actualiza automáticamente la información de configuración del sistema. Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria que hay instalada en el equipo, haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Información del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 71 Módem y minitarjeta PCI 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI y levante la cubierta. 3 Continúe con las instrucciones que correspondan de las secciones: • Para agregar un módem, consulte la siguiente sección: “Cómo agregar un módem”. • Para agregar una minitarjeta PCI, consulte la página 72. Cómo cambiar el módem 1 Retire el módem actual: a Extraiga los tornillos que fijan el módem en la placa base y guárdelos aparte. b Tire de la lengüeta para sacar el módem de su conector de la placa base y desconecte el cable del módem. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI72 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Conecte el cable del módem al módem. AVISO: Los conectores de cable tienen la forma adecuada para una correcta inserción; no fuerce las conexiones. 3 Alinee el módem con los orificios para los tornillos e insértelo en el conector de la placa base. 4 Coloque los tornillos para fijar el módem a la placa base. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI PRECAUCIÓN: La normativa FCC prohibe terminantemente a los usuarios instalar minitarjetas PCI LAN inalámbricas de 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Bajo ninguna circunstancia debe el usuario instalar ningún dispositivo de dicho tipo. Sólo el personal de servicio técnico formado por Dell tiene autorización para instalar una minitarjeta PCI LAN inalámbrica de 5 GHz. Si extrae o instala una minitarjeta PCI de 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), siga las instrucciones que se indican a continuación. Sólo se pueden instalar los productos aprobados para su utilización en el equipo portátil. Las minitarjetas PCI aprobadas sólo se pueden comprar a Dell. NOTA: El usuario puede extraer e instalar las tarjetas PC LAN inalámbricas de 2,4 GHz. Conector del cable del módem Cable del módem Lengüeta de tiro Tornillos (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 73 Si pidió una minitarjeta PCI con el equipo, ya estará instalada. 1 Si no hay ninguna minitarjeta PCI instalada, vaya al paso 2. Si está sustituyendo una minitarjeta PCI, retire la tarjeta existente. a Desconecte la minitarjeta PCI de los cables conectados. b Libere la minitarjeta PCI; para ello, separe las lengüetas metálicas de fijación hasta que la tarjeta se levante ligeramente. c Extraiga la minitarjeta PCI de su conector. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la minitarjeta PCI, no coloque nunca cables encima o debajo de la tarjeta. AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2) Lengüetas metálicas de fijación (2)74 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Alinee la minitarjeta PCI con el conector hasta formar un ángulo de 45 grados y, a continuación, presiónela para insertarla en el conector. 3 Conecte los cables de antena a la minitarjeta PCI. 4 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Unidad de CD o DVD 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 75 3 Extraiga el tornillo “O” que se encuentra junto a la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Apriete la palanca que se encuentra junto a los conectores del módulo de memoria en la dirección a la flecha indicada en la palanca (es decir, hacia la unidad) para liberar la unidad. 5 Extraiga la unidad del compartimento. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Tornillo Palanca Unidad CD o DVD76 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 6 Inserte la nueva unidad en el compartimento hasta que quede totalmente encajada. 7 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo extraído en el paso 3. 8 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria y el tornillo. Teclado 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Use un destornillador plano pequeño o una punta de plástico para levantar el extremo derecho con muesca de la cubierta embellecedora y haga palanca en ella para extraerla. 3 Levante la cubierta y extráigala de las bisagras y del estuche inferior. 4 Extraiga los cuatro tornillos del teclado. AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y resulta muy entretenido volver a colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado. 5 Levante el teclado y apóyelo en las bisagras de la pantalla de modo que el conector del teclado quede visible. 6 Tire del conector del teclado para desconectarlo del conector de interfaz de la placa base. Cubierta con bisagrasAdición y sustitución de piezas 77 7 Extraiga el teclado. AVISO: para evitar dañar las patas de los conectores, inserte firmemente el conector del teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base y no invierta el conector del teclado. 8 Conecte el conector de teclado del otro teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado78 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 9 Inserte las cuatro pestañas de fijación del teclado en las ranuras correspondientes del apoyamanos y vuelva a colocar el teclado. Antes de intentar encajar completamente el teclado, asegúrese de que las cuatro pestañas de fijación están encajadas. 10 Vuelva a colocar los cuatro tornillos del teclado. 11 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado Pestañas de fijación (4)Apéndice 79 Apéndice Especificaciones NOTA: Las funciones de administración de energía limitan la velocidad del procesador cuando el equipo funciona con batería, para mantener los requisitos de ventilación del sistema o para mantener los requisitos de alimentación del sistema. Microprocesador Microprocesador Procesador Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 o Intel Celeron® Caché L1 8 KB (interna) Caché L2 512 KB (Intel Pentium 4); 128 KB (Intel Celeron) Frecuencia de bus externa 400/533 MHz Información del sistema Conjunto de chips del sistema Intel 852GMV Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits Amplitud del bus de DRAM 64 bits Amplitud del bus de direcciones del microprocesador 32 bits Tarjeta PC Controlador CardBus TI PCI1510 Conector de tarjetas PC admite una tarjeta del Tipo I o Tipo II Tarjetas admitidas de 3,3 V y 5 V Tamaño del conector de tarjetas PC de 68 patas Amplitud de datos (máxima) PCMCIA de 16 bits CardBus de 32 bits80 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Memoria Conector del módulo de memoria 2 zócalos SODIMM a los que puede acceder el usuario Capacidades del módulo de memoria 64, 128, 256 y 512 MB Tipo de memoria SODIMM de 2,5 V Memoria estándar 128 MB Memoria máxima 1 GB Tiempo de acceso a memoria: velocidad del reloj 266 MHz Puertos y conectores Vídeo conector de 15 orificios Audio Conector de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo USB (2) Conector de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0 Módem Conector RJ-11 LAN Ethernet Conector RJ-45 (opcional en algunos países) Comunicaciones Módem: Tipo v.92 56K MDC Controlador softmodem Interfaz Bus interno AC ’97 Adaptador de red tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100Apéndice 81 Vídeo Tipo de vídeo Gráficos directos integrados AGP Interfaz host AGP directo integrado Controlador de vídeo Intel UMA integrada Memoria de vídeo 1 MB con Intel DVMT hasta 32 MB (con 128 MB de memoria del sistema) o 64 MB (con 256 MB o más de memoria del sistema) Interfaz LCD SPWG-B Audio Tipo de audio AC’97 (soft audio) Controlador de audio Sigmatel 9750 Conversión estereofónica 18 bits (de analógica a digital) y 20 bits (de digital a analógica) Interfaces: Interna Bus PCI /AC’97 Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo Altavoz Dos altavocesde 8 ohmios Amplificador de altavoz interno Canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohmios Controles de volumen Métodos abreviados de teclado, menús de programa82 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Pantalla Tipo (TFT matriz activa) XGA Dimensiones: 14,1 ó 15 pulgadas Altura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 214,3 mm (8,4 pulgadas) 228,1 mm (8,99 pulgadas) Anchura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 285,7 mm (11,2 pulgadas) 304,1 mm (11,97 pulgadas) Diagonal: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 359.16 mm (14.1 pulgadas) 382.4 mm (15.1 pulgadas) Resoluciones máximas 1024 x 768 a 16,8 millones de colores Tiempo de respuesta (típico) 20 ms de subida (máximo) 30 ms de bajada (máximo) Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 180° Ángulos de vista: Horizontal ±40° Vertical +10°/–30° Separación entre píxeles 0,28 x 0,28 mm Consumo eléctrico: Panel con luz de fondo (normal) 5.2 W Controles el brillo puede controlarse mediante métodos abreviados del tecladoApéndice 83 Teclado Número de teclas 85 (EE.UU. y Canadá); 86 (Europa); 90 (Japón) Recorrido de tecla 2,7 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,11 pulgadas ± 0,016 pulgadas) Espacio entre teclas 19,05 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,75 pulgadas ± 0,012 pulgadas) Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Superficie táctil Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de tabla de gráficos) 240 cpp Tamaño: Anchura 64,88 mm (2,55 pulgadas) área activa mediante sensor Altura Rectángulo de 48,88 mm (1,92 pulgadas) Batería (8 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 8 celdas (65 WHr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,470 kg (1,03 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 4300 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)84 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Batería (12 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 12 celdas (96 Whr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,615 kg (1,35 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 6450 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Adaptador de CA Voltaje de entrada De 100 a 240 V CA Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A Frecuencia de entrada De 50 a 60 Hz Intensidad de salida 5,62 A (máximo en pulso de 4 segundos); 4,62 A (continuo) Potencia de salida 90 W estándar Voltaje nominal de salida 19.5 V de CC Dimensiones: Altura 34,2 mm (1,35 pulgadas) Anchura 60,9 mm (2,4 pulgadas) Profundidad 153,4 mm (6,04 pulgadas) Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,0 lb)Apéndice 85 Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Aspectos físicos Altura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 pulgadas–1,89 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 pulgadas–1,90 pulgadas) Anchura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 329 mm (12,9 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 335 mm (13,1 pulgadas) Profundidad Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Peso: Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,3 kg (7,17 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,4 kg (7,57 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,5 kg (7,66 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,7 kg (8,07 lb) Aspectos ambientales Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Humedad relativa (máxima): En funcionamiento del 10% al 90% (sin condensación) En almacenamiento del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Adaptador de CA (continuación)86 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema Visión general NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el programa de configuración del sistema, anulando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través del programa de configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información acerca de la configuración de funciones del sistema operativo, consulte el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la configuración actual del equipo, como: • Configuración del sistema • Secuencia de arranque • Configuración de arranque (inicialización) y ajustes de configuración del dispositivo de acoplamiento • Selecciones de configuración básica de dispositivos • Ajustes de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro AVISO: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie la configuración de este programa. Determinados cambios pueden hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente. Vibración máxima: En funcionamiento 0,6 GRMS En almacenamiento 1.3 GRMS Impacto máximo (medido con la unidad de disco duro en posición de reposo y pulso de media onda de 2 ms): En funcionamiento 122 G En almacenamiento 163 G Altitud (máxima): En funcionamiento De –15.2 a 3048 m (de –50 a 10,000 pies) En almacenamiento De –15.2 a 10,668 m (de –50 a 35,000 pies) Aspectos ambientales (continuación)Apéndice 87 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema 1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo. 2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) y vuelva a intentarlo. Pantallas de configuración del sistema NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla. Se lista, en cada pantalla, a la izquierda las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de cada opción se encuentra la selección o el valor de dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo. En el cuadro que aparece en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de ayuda sobre la opción resaltada actualmente; en el que aparece en la esquina inferior derecha se muestra información acerca del equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla. Opciones más utilizadas Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva. Cambio de la secuencia de arranque La secuencia de arranque indica al equipo dónde debe buscar para localizar el software necesario para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) del programa de configuración del sistema. NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte página 88. La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes: • Unidad de discos flexibles • Unidad de disco duro de compartimento para módulos • Unidad de disco duro interna • Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando el equipo encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e inicia el sistema operativo. Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo presionando la tecla de flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su orden en la lista.88 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento Los elementos activados aparecen de color blanco y con un signo de exclamación a la izquierda; los elementos desactivados aparecen de color azul o atenuados y sin triángulo. • Pulse la tecla de flecha hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha para cambiar la opción. • Para cambiar la posición de un dispositivo en la lista, resáltelo y, a continuación, pulse o (no se distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas) para desplazar hacia arriba o hacia abajo el dispositivo resaltado. Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como los guarde y salga del programa de configuración del sistema. Arranque para una sola vez Puede configurar una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin tener que entrar en el programa de configuración del sistema. (También puede utilizar este procedimiento para iniciar desde los Diagnósticos de Dell en la partición de la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro). 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo DELL, oprima inmediatamente . Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca el dispositivo de arranque, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar y pulse . El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado. La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal. Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema El rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido en determinadas condiciones para evitar que se realice un apagado automático y se pierdan datos. Entre las condiciones en las que se reduce el rendimiento se encuentran las siguientes: CA L EN T AMI EN T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R — El rendimiento se reduce cuando la temperatura del sistema sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos. Esta reducción del rendimiento ayuda a regular las temperaturas del sistema y de la superficie, lo cual evita que el equipo se apague debido a la temperatura excesiva del procesador. REN DIMI EN T O D E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con alimentación de CA y el consumo de energía sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos del adaptador de CA. Esta reducción del rendimiento garantiza que el sistema no intenta consumir más de lo que el adaptador Apéndice 89 de CA puede suministrar. CA P A CI D A D D E LA B A T E RÍ A — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con batería y el consumo de energía sobrepasa la capacidad nominal de la batería, sobrepasa los niveles de descarga segura permitidos o cuando la temperatura de la superficie de la batería sobrepasa los 60 °C. Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería El adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si el equipo funciona a elevados niveles de actividad del sistema durante periodos prolongados de tiempo y la batería no se carga, intente operar con el equipo en modo de administración de energía mínima. Este modo puede mejorar el tiempo de carga y la duración de la batería. Según los niveles de actividad del sistema, el rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido. Para establecer el modo de administración de energía mínima: NOTA: También puede pulsar el icono de medidor de energía de la barra de tareas. 1 Pulse el botón Inicio→ Panel de control→ Rendimiento y mantenimiento→ Opciones de energía. 2 Seleccione la ficha Combinaciones de energía. 3 En el menú desplegable Combinaciones de energía, pulse Modo de bajo consumo. Para obtener más información sobre la administración de energía, consulte el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la .página 9 Velocidad variable del ventilador El equipo utiliza una velocidad variable del ventilador a fin de evitar que el equipo se sobrecaliente. El ventilador funciona continuamente y la velocidad de éste puede variar según el uso. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original de Dell, así como verificar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell. Además de este soporte con intervención de un técnico, puede encontrar el mismo en línea en support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo. Dell proporciona asistencia técnica limitada para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados por Dell 1 . La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e incluye aquellos artículos comprados o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware y Custom Factory Integration 2 . 1 Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio 90 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo. 2 Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell de su equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia para el equipo. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus, etc.) Los dispositivos periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen las tarjetas internas de expansión, los compartimentos para módulos Dell y los accesorios de la tarjeta PC. Además, se incluyen todos los monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de acoplamiento/replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la marca Dell. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.). El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante original del producto. Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell Para ponerse en contacto con Dell de forma electrónica, puede acceder a los siguientes sitios web: • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (soporte técnico) • premiersupport.dell.com (soporte técnico para clientes de instituciones educativas, gubernamentales, sanitarias y de grandes y medianas empresas, incluidos los clientes Premier, Platinum y Gold) Para obtener las direcciones web de su país, busque la sección correspondiente en la siguiente tabla. NOTA: Los números de teléfono gratuitos son para uso dentro del país para el que aparecen. Cuando necesite ponerse en contacto con Dell, utilice las direcciones electrónicas, los números de teléfono y los códigos que se incluyen en la siguiente tabla. Si necesita ayuda para averiguar los códigos que debe utilizar, póngase en contacto con un operador de telefonía local o internacional.Apéndice 91 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos Alemania (Langen) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 49 Código de ciudad: 6103 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Asistencia técnica 06103 766-7200 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0180-5-224400 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 06103 766-9570 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes 06103 766-9420 Atención al cliente para grandes cuentas 06103 766-9560 Atención al cliente para cuentas públicas 06103 766-9555 Centralita 06103 766-7000 Anguilla Asistencia general gratuito: 800-335-0031 Antigua y Barbuda Asistencia general 1-800-805-5924 Antillas Neerlandesas Asistencia general 001-800-882-1519 Argentina (Buenos Aires) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 54 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: www.dell.com.ar Correo electrónico: us_latin_services@dell.com Correo electrónico para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa: la-techsupport@dell.com Correco electrónico para servidores y productos de almacenamiento EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Atención al cliente gratuito: 0-800-444-0730 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0733 Servicios de asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0724 Ventas 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Asistencia general gratuito: 800-157892 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Australia (Sydney) Código de acceso internacional: 0011 Código de país: 61 Código de ciudad: 2 Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Particulares y pequeñas empresas 1-300-655-533 Gobierno y empresas gratuito: 1-800-633-559 División de cuentas preferentes (PAD) gratuito: 1-800-060-889 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-819-339 Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-300-655-533 Asistencia técnica (servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito: 1-800-733-314 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1-800-808-385 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1-800-808-312 Fax gratuito: 1-800-818-341 Austria (Viena) Código de acceso internacional: 900 Código de país: 43 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 00 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 49 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0820 240 530 16 Asistencia técnica a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Asistencia técnica a cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0660 8779 Centralita 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6818 Barbados Asistencia general 1-800-534-3066 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 93 Bélgica (Bruselas) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 32 Código de ciudad: 2 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 02 481 92 88 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 481 92 95 Atención al cliente 02 713 15 .65 Ventas corporativas 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Centralita 02 481 91 00 Bermuda Asistencia general 1-800-342-0671 Bolivia Asistencia general gratuito: 800-10-0238 Brasil Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 55 Código de ciudad: 51 Sitio web: www.dell.com/br Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica 0800 90 3355 Fax de asistencia técnica 51 481 5470 Fax de atención al cliente 51 481 5480 Ventas 0800 90 3390 Brunei Código de país: 673 Asistencia técnica al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4966 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4955 Canadá (North York, Ontario) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Estado de pedidos en línea: www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (asistencia técnica automatizada) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Atención al cliente (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Atención al cliente para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-326-9463 Asistencia técnica (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Asistencia técnica para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-387-5757 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-387-5752 Ventas (pequeñas y medianas empresas, instituciones gubernamentales) gratuito: 1-800-387-5755 Ventas de repuestos y por extensión de servicio 1866 440 3355 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos94 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Chile (Santiago) Código de país: 56 Código de ciudad: 2 Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica y ventas gratuito: 1230-020-4823 China (Xiamén) Código de país: 86 Código de ciudad: 592 Sitio web de asistencia técnica: support.dell.com.cn Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: cn_support@dell.com Correo electrónico de atención al cliente: customer_cn@dell.com Fax de asistencia técnica 592 818 1350 Asistencia técnica (Dell™ Dimension™ e Inspiron™) gratuito: 800 858 2969 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ y Dell Precision™) gratuito: 800858 0950 Asistencia técnica (servidores y almacenamiento) gratuito: 800858 0960 Asistencia técnica (proyectores, PDA, conmutadores, enrutadores y otros) gratuito: 800 858 2920 Soporte técnico (impresoras) gratuito: 800 858 2311 Atención al cliente gratuito: 800 858 2060 Fax de atención al cliente 592 818 1308 Particulares y pequeñas empresas gratuito: 800 858 2222 División de cuentas preferentes gratuito: 800 858 2557 Grandes cuentas corporativas GPC gratuito: 800 858 2055 Grandes cuentas corporativas y cuentas principales gratuito: 800 858 2628 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte gratuito: 800 858 2999 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2955 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este gratuito: 800 858 2020 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2669 Grandes cuentas corporativas del grupo de cola gratuito: 800 858 2572 Grandes cuentas corporativas del sur gratuito: 800 858 2355 Grandes cuentas corporativas del oeste gratuito: 800 858 2811 Grandes cuentas corporativas de diferentes partes gratuito: 800 858 2621 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 95 Colombia Asistencia general 980-9-15-3978 Corea (Seúl) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 82 Código de ciudad: 2 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 080-200-3800 Ventas gratuito: 080-200-3600 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Fax 2194-6202 Centralita 2194-6000 Asistencia técnica (electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 080-200-3801 Costa Rica Asistencia general 0800-012-0435 Dinamarca (Copenhague) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 45 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 7023 0182 Atención al cliente (relacional) 7023 0184 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 3287 5505 Centralita (relacional) 3287 1200 Fax de la centralita (relacional) 3287 1201 Centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5000 Fax de la centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5001 Dominica Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6821 Ecuador Asistencia general gratuito: 999-119 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos96 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m EE.UU. (Austin, Texas) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 1 Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de un pedido gratuito: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Consumidor (Particular y oficina doméstica) Asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-624-9896 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-624-9897 Servicio y asistencia DellNet™ gratuito: 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Sitio web de servicios financieros: www.dellfinancialservices.com Servicios financieros (alquiler y préstamos) gratuito: 1-877-577-3355 Servicios financieros (cuentas preferentes de Dell [DPA, Dell Preferred Accounts]) gratuito: 1-800-283-2210 Empresa Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-822-8965 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Asistencia técnica para impresoras y proyectores gratuito: 1-877-459-7298 Público (gobierno, educación y sanidad) Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-456-3355 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-234-1490 Ventas de Dell gratuito: 1-800-289-3355 o gratuito: 1-800-879-3355 Dell Outlet Store (equipos Dell restaurados) gratuito: 1-888-798-7561 Venta de software y periféricos gratuito: 1-800-671-3355 Venta de piezas de repuesto gratuito: 1-800-357-3355 Venta de servicios y garantías ampliados gratuito: 1-800-247-4618 Fax gratuito: 1-800-727-8320 Servicios de Dell para personas sordas, con discapacidades auditivas o del habla gratuito: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 97 El Salvador Asistencia general 01-899-753-0777 Eslovaquia (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 421 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 02 5441 5727 Atención al cliente 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 5441 8328 Centralita (ventas) 02 5441 7585 España (Madrid) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 34 Código de ciudad: 91 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 118 540 Ventas 902 118 541 Centralita 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 115 236 Centralita 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Finlandia (Helsinki) Código de acceso internacional: 990 Código de país: 358 Código de ciudad: 9 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 09 253 313 60 Atención al cliente 09 253 313 38 Fax 09 253 313 99 Centralita 09 253 313 00 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos98 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Francia (París) (Montpellier) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 33 Códigos de ciudad: (1) (4) Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 0825 387 270 Atención al cliente 0825 823 833 Centralita 0825 004 700 Centralita (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventas 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 0499754001 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 0825 004 719 Atención al cliente 0825 338 339 Centralita 01 55 94 71 00 Ventas 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grecia Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 30 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 00800-44 14 95 18 Asistencia técnica Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Centralita 2108129810 Centralita para Gold Service 2108129811 Ventas 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Granada Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Asistencia general 1-800-999-0136 Guayana Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 99 Hong Kong Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 852 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: apsupport@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) 2969 3188 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ y PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Atención al cliente 3416 0910 Cuentas corporativas grandes 3416 0907 Programas globales para clientes 3416 0908 División de la mediana empresa 3416 0912 División de la pequeña empresa y la particular 2969 3105 India Asistencia técnica 1600 33 8045 Ventas (grandes cuentas corporativas) 1600 33 8044 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 1600 33 8046 Irlanda (Cherrywood) Código de acceso internacional: 16 Código de país: 353 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica 1850 543 543 Asistencia técnica en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente (particulares) 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente para pequeñas empresas 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 1850 200 982 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4499 Ventas para Irlanda 01 204 4444 Ventas en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4000 Fax/Fax de ventas 01 204 0103 Centralita 01 204 4444 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos100 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Islas Caimán Asistencia general 1-800-805-7541 Islas Turks y Caicos Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Islas Vírgenes Americanas Asistencia general 1-877-673-3355 Islas Vírgenes Británicas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6820 Italia (Milán) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 39 Código de ciudad: 02 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Centralita 02 696 821 12 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Centralita 02 577 821 Jamaica Asistencia general (sólo para dentro de Jamaica) 1-800-682-3639 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 101 Japón (Kawasaki) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 81 Código de ciudad: 44 Sitio web: support.jp.dell.com Asistencia técnica (servidores) gratuito: 0120-198-498 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (servidores) 81-44-556-4162 Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) gratuito: 0120-198-226 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dimension e Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 0120-198-433 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Asistencia técnica (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) gratuito: 0120-981-690 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) 81-44-556-3468 Servicio Faxbox 044-556-3490 Servicio de pedidos automatizado las 24 horas del día 044-556-3801 Atención al cliente 044-556-4240 División de ventas corporativas (hasta 400 empleados) 044-556-1465 Ventas de la división de cuentas preferentes (más de 400 empleados) 044-556-3433 Ventas de grandes cuentas corporativas (más de 3.500 empleados) 044-556-3430 Ventas al sector público (agencias del Estado, instituciones educativas y médicas) 044-556-1469 Cuentas globales de Japón 044-556-3469 Usuario individual 044-556-1760 Centralita 044-556-4300 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos102 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Latinoamérica Asistencia técnica al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4093 Atención al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3619 Fax (Asistencia técnica y Servicio al cliente) (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3883 Ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4397 Fax de ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4600 ó 512 728-3772 Luxemburgo Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 352 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_be@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Bruselas, Bélgica) 3420808075 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas (Bruselas, Bélgica) gratuito: 080016884 Ventas a corporaciones (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Atención al cliente (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 19 Fax (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 92 99 Centralita (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Macao Código de país: 853 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0800 105 Servicio al cliente (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910 Ventas de transacción (Xiamen, China) 29115693 Malasia (Penang) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 60 Código de ciudad: 4 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 1 800 88 0193 Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1 800 88 1306 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1 800 88 1386 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 04 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 888 202 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 888 213 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 103 México Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 52 Asistencia técnica al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Ventas 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Atención al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Principal 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Asistencia general 001-800-220-1006 Noruega (Lysaker) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 47 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 671 16882 Atención relacional al cliente 671 17575 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 23162298 Centralita 671 16800 Centralita de fax 671 16865 Nueva Zelanda Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 64 Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa) gratuito: 0800 446 255 Asistencia técnica (para servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito:0800 443 563 Particulares y pequeñas empresas 0800 446 255 Gobierno y empresas 0800 444 617 Ventas 0800 441 567 Fax 0800 441 566 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos104 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Países bajos (Amsterdam) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 31 Código de ciudad: 20 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Asistencia técnica 020 674 45 00 Fax de asistencia técnica 020 674 47 66 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 42 00 Atención relacional al cliente 020 674 4325 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 55 00 Ventas relacionales 020 674 50 00 Ventas por fax a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 47 75 Fax para ventas relacionales 020 674 47 50 Centralita 020 674 50 00 Fax de la centralita 020 674 47 50 Países del sureste asiático y del Pacífico Asistencia técnica, atención al cliente y ventas (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4810 Panamá Asistencia general 001-800-507-0962 Perú Asistencia general 0800-50-669 Polonia (Varsovia) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 48 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: pl_support_tech@dell.com Teléfono de atención al cliente 57 95 700 Atención al cliente 57 95 999 Ventas 57 95 999 Fax de atención al cliente 57 95 806 Fax de la recepción 57 95 998 Centralita 57 95 999 Portugal Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 351 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 707200149 Atención al cliente 800 300413 Ventas 800 300 410, 800 300 411, 800 300 412 o 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 105 Puerto Rico Asistencia general 1-800-805-7545 Reino Unido (Bracknell) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 44 Código de ciudad: 1344 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Sitio web de atención al cliente: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (cuentas preferentes, corporativas o PAD, para más de 1000 empleados) 0870 908 0500 Asistencia técnica (directa y general) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 01344 373 186 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 01344 373 185 Atención a clientes con cuentas preferentes (500–5.000 empleados) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para el gobierno central 01344 373 193 Atención al cliente para el gobierno local y la educación 01344 373 199 Atención al cliente para temas de salud 01344 373 194 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4000 Ventas corporativas y al sector público 01344 860 456 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4006 República checa (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 420 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 22537 2727 Atención al cliente 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Fax de asistencia técnica 22537 2728 Centralita 22537 2711 República Dominicana Asistencia general 1-800-148-0530 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos106 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Singapur (Singapur) Código de acceso internacional: 005 Código de país: 65 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1800 394 7430 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 394 7488 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 394 7478 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 394 7412 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 394 7419 St. Kitts y Nevis Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-441-4731 St. Lucia Asistencia general 1-800-882-1521 St. Vicente y las Granadinas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 Sudáfrica (Johannesburgo) Código de acceso internacional: 09/091 Código de país: 27 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_za_support@dell.com Gold Queue 011 709 7713 Asistencia técnica 011 709 7710 Atención al cliente 011 709 7707 Ventas 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Centralita 011 709 7700 Suecia (Upplands Vasby) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 46 Código de ciudad: 8 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 08 590 05 199 Atención relacional al cliente 08 590 05 642 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 08 587 70 527 Soporte para el programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) 20 140 14 44 Fax de asistencia técnica 08 590 05 594 Ventas 08 590 05 185 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 107 Suiza (Ginebra) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 41 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes HSB y corporativos francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 0844 811 411 Asistencia técnica (corporaciones) 0844 822 844 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0848 802 202 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Centralita 022 799 01 01 Tailandia Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 66 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 0060 07 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 0600 09 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1800 006 009 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1800 006 006 Taiwán Código de acceso internacional: 002 Código de país: 886 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico: ap_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 00801 86 1011 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 00801 60 1256 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 00801 65 1228 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 00801 651 227 Trinidad y Tobago Asistencia general 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Asistencia general gratuito: 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Asistencia general 8001-3605 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos108 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mÍndice 109 Índice A acondicionadores de línea, 28 alimentación apagar el equipo, 28 dispositivos de protección, 27 solucionar problemas, 31 altavoces descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 apagar el equipo, 28 archivo de ayuda, 10 asistencia cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, 90 B batería advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería, 30 almacenar, 31 cargar, 30 comprobar la carga, 30 descripción, 17, 21 extraer, 31 instalar, 31 medidor de energía, 30 rendimiento, 29 vista del sistema, 17, 21 bloqueos, 56 botón AccessDirect descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botón de alimentación descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botones de la superficie táctil descripción, 15 vista del sistema, 15 C caracteres inesperados, 38 CD copiar, 41 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 cerrar el equipo, 28 conector de red descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector de vídeo descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector del módem descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 conector USB descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conectores de audio descripción, 17 vista del sistema, 17 conexión a Internet acerca de, 23 configurar, 23 opciones, 23 conflictos resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware, 61 controladores volver a instalar, 59 copiar CD y DVD cómo, 41 consejos prácticos, 42 información general, 41 correo electrónico solucionar problemas, 25 cubierta de la minitarjeta PCI/módem descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 cubierta del módulo de memoria descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21110 Índice 110 Índice D Dell ponerse en contacto, 90 sitio de asistencia, 11 Dell Diagnostics, 49 diagnósticos Dell, 49 Diagrama de instalación, 9 documentación archivo de ayuda, 10 Diagrama de instalación, 9 en línea, 11 Guía de información del sistema, 9 DVD copiar, 41 E equipo bloqueos, 56 especificaciones, 79 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 equipo dañado probar, 58 equipo mojado, 57 escáner solución de problemas, 54 especificaciones, 79 etiqueta de Microsoft Windows, 10 etiqueta de servicio, 10 etiquetas etiqueta de servicio, 10 Microsoft Windows, 10 G garantía, 9 H hardware Dell Diagnostics, 49 I impresora cable, 26 conexión, 25 instalación, 25 USB, 26 indicadores de estado del dispositivo descripción, 15 indicadores de estado del teclado descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 instalar piezas antes de empezar, 65 apagar el equipo, 65 herramientas recomendadas, 65 instrucciones de seguridad, 9 M memoria extraer, 69 módem agregar, 71 P pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 problemas Dell Diagnostics, 49 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 programa Configuración del sistema opciones más utilizadas, 87 pantallas, 87 propósito, 86 visualizar, 87 programa de configuración del sistema pantallas, 87 programas bloqueos, 56 no responde, 57 R ranura para cable de seguridad descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 ranura para tarjeta PC descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16Índice 111 red solucionar problemas, 44 red inalámbrica tipo, 44 rejillas de ventilación descripción, 18-19, 21 vista del sistema, 18-19, 21 Restaurar sistema, 61 S SAI, 28 seguro de la pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 seguro de liberación de la batería descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 sistema operativo volver a instalar, 61 volver a instalar Windows XP, 61 sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida Consulte SAI sitio web Dell Premier Support, 9, 11 software solucionar problemas, 56 volver a instalar software, 59 solución de problemas bloqueo de programas, 56 caracteres inesperados, 38 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 conflictos, 61 Dell Diagnostics, 49 equipo mojado, 57 equipo que se ha caído o dañado, 58 escáner, 54 no puede guardar en un disco flexible, 55 no se puede guardar en el disquete, 55 problemas con el correo electrónico, 25 problemas con la red, 44 problemas con la tarjeta PC, 56 problemas de alimentación eléctrica, 31 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 un programa no responde, 57 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 superficie táctil descripción, 15 personalizar, 36 vista del sistema, 15 supresores de sobrevoltaje, 27 T Tarjeta PC solucionar problemas, 56 teclado caracteres inesperados, 38 descripción, 14 métodos abreviados, 34 numérico, 33 solucionar problemas, 38 sustituir, 76 vista del sistema, 14 U unidad de CD o DVD descripción, 17 sustituir, 74 vista del sistema, 17 unidad de disco duro descripción, 21 devolución a Dell, 68 sustituir, 66 vista del sistema, 21 unidad de disco flexible solución de problemas, 55 solucionar problemas, 55 unidad de DVD Consulte unidad de CD o DVD unidades Consulte unidad de disco duro solucionar problemas, 55 V vistas del sistema anterior, 13 inferior, 19, 21 lateral derecha, 17 lateral izquierda, 16 posterior, 19 volver a inst, 61112 Índice 112 Índice volver a instalar controladores, 59 Windows XP, 61 W Windows XP Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo, 60 impresora, 27 Restaurar sistema, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 volver a instalar, 61 Dell PowerEdge C8220 Hardware Owner’s Manual Regulatory Model: B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerEdge™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001 2012 - 08 P/N XXXXX Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents 1 About Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Accessing System Features During Startup. . . . . . . 11 Front-Panel Features and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 12 NIC Indicator Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Power and System Board Indicator Codes . . . . . . . 16 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 POST Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Collecting System Event Log for Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 System Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Processor Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Memory Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PCIe Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 IOH Core Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SB Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 POST Start Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 POST End Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 POST Error Code Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 BIOS Recovery Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ME Fail Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 SEL Generator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Contents BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Other Information You May Need . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . 45 System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System Setup Options at Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Serial Port Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SATA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 USB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 View System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Contents 5 Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 IPMI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Power Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 3 Installing System Components . . . . . . . 125 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sled Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Removing a Sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Installing a Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Removing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Installing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Removing a SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Installing a SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Sled Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Removing the Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing the Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Contents Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Removing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . 135 Installing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Removing a Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Installing a Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Installing a Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Memory Module Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Supported DIMM Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144 Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Installing Memory Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Removing the Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . 148 Installing the Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . 149 Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Removing the Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . 150 Installing the Expansion Card Riser. . . . . . . . 151 Mezzanine Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 155 Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 157Contents 7 SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Removing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Installing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Internal Hard-Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . 162 Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Removing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Installing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Removing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 167 Installing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 168 Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Removing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Installing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Installing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . 172 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Installing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Contents 4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Safety First—For You and Your System . . . . . . . . 177 Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Troubleshooting System Startup Failure. . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting External Connections . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem. . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device. . . . . . . . . . 179 Troubleshooting a NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure . . . . . . . . 182 Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules . . . . . 183 Troubleshooting the Power Sled . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Troubleshooting a Storage Controller . . . . . . . . . 188 Troubleshooting Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Troubleshooting Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Troubleshooting the System Board . . . . . . . . . . 191 Troubleshooting the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . 192 IRQ Assignment Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Contents 9 5 Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Interposer Extender Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 SD Card Reader Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Node Power Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . 201 6 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510 ContentsAbout Your System 11 1 About Your System Accessing System Features During Startup The following keystrokes provide access to system features during startup. The SAS/SATA card or PXE hotkey support are available only in the BIOS boot mode. Hotkey function is not available in the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) boot mode. Keystroke Description Enters the System Setup program. See "System Setup Menu" on page 45. Enters the BIOS Boot Manager or the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Boot Manager, depending on the system's boot configuration. See "System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46. Starts Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) boot. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the SAS adapter documentation. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the documentation for your SAS RAID card. Enters the utility to configure onboard NIC settings for PXE boot. For more information, see the documentation for your integrated NIC. Enters the onboard SAS and SATA controller’s configuration utility. 12 About Your System Front-Panel Features and Indicators Figure 1-1. Front-Panel Features and Indicators Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 1 USB connectors Connects USB devices to the system. The ports are USB 2.0 compliant. 2 Mezzanine card expansion slot Installs an I/O module mezzanine card. 3 Low profile PCIe expansion slot Installs a low profile PCI Express x16 card. 4 Release latch Press to release the sled from the enclosure. 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12About Your System 13 5 Power-on indicator/ power button The power-on indicator lights when the sled power is on. The power-on indicator lights amber when the system critical event occurs. The power button turns the compute sled on. NOTE: When powering on the sled, the video monitor can take from several seconds to over 2 minutes to display an image, depending on the amount of memory installed in the system. NOTE: On ACPI-compliant operating systems, turning off the sled using the power button causes the sled to perform a graceful shutdown before power to the sled is turned off. NOTE: To force an ungraceful shutdown, press and hold the power button for five seconds. 6 VGA connector Connects a VGA display to the system. 7 Serial connector Connects a serial device to the system. 8 BMC management port Dedicated management port. 9 Ethernet connector 2 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 10 Ethernet connector 1 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 11 Sled identification indicator Lights blue to identify a particular system and system board. 12 Handle Hold to pull the sled from the enclosure. Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 2 114 About Your System NIC Indicator Codes Figure 1-2. NIC Indicators 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Solid amber Linking at 100 Mbps port speed Solid green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed (maximum) Blinking green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed Network activity is present • Pre OS POST • OS without driver • OS with driver Blinks at speed relative to packet density Off Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off IdleAbout Your System 15 Figure 1-3. NIC Indicators (BMC management port) 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Blinking amber Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Blinking green Linking at 100 Mbps port speed (maximum) Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off Idle16 About Your System Power and System Board Indicator Codes The indicators on the front of the sled display status codes during system startup. For location of the indicators on the front panel, see Figure 1-1. Table 1-1. Power and System Board Indicator Codes Indicator Color Status Indicator Code Power-on indicator Green Solid Sled power is on (S0) Amber Off Green Solid BMC critical condition event in power off mode (S4/S5) Amber Blinking Green Blinking BMC critical condition event in power on mode (S0) Amber Blinking System identification indicator Blue Solid The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command On or ID Button Press ID On is generated. Blue Blinking Only the IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Blink On is generated. Off The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Off or ID Button Press ID Off is generated.About Your System 17 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes The system board includes a BMC heartbeat indicator (LED17) for debugging the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). The BMC heartbeat indicator lights green when power is supplied to the sled and blinks green when the BMC firmware is ready. Figure 1-4. BMC Heartbeat Indicator 1 system board 2 BMC heartbeat indicator18 About Your System Service Tag The following illustration provides location of the Service Tag number on the C8220 single-wide compute sled. Figure 1-5. Service Tag Location for C8220 Single-Wide Compute SledAbout Your System 19 POST Error Code Collecting System Event Log for Investigation Whenever possible, the system BIOS will output the current boot progress codes on the video screen. Progress codes are 32-bit quantities plus optional data. The 32-bit numbers include class, subclass, and operation information. The class and subclass fields point to the type of hardware that is being initialized. The operation field represents the specific initialization activity. Based on the data bit availability to display progress codes, a progress code can be customized to fit the data width. The higher the data bit, the higher the granularity of information that can be sent on the progress port. The progress codes may be reported by the system BIOS or option ROMs. The Response section in the following table may be divided into 3 types: • Warning or Not an error – The message is displayed on the screen. An error record is logged to the SEL. The system will continue booting with a degraded state. The user may want to replace the erroneous unit. • Pause – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and user input is required to continue. The user can take immediate corrective action or choose to continue booting. • Halt – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and the system cannot boot unless the error is resolved. The user needs to replace the faulty part and restart the system. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions 0010h Local Console Resource Conflict Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0011h Local Console Controller Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.20 About Your System 0012h Local Console Output Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0013h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0014h ISA IO Resource Conflict Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0015h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0016h ISA Floppy Controller Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0017h ISA Floppy Input Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0018h ISA Floppy Output Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 21 0019h USB Read Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ah USB Write Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Bh USB Interface Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ch Mouse Interface Error Pause Mouse device initialization failed To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Eh Keyboard Not Detected Pause No keyboard detected To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Fh Keyboard Controller Error Pause Keyboard controller initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions22 About Your System 0020h Keyboard Stuck Key Error Pause Keyboard key stuck Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0021h Keyboard Locked Error Pause Keyboard locked Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0023h Memory Correctable Error Pause Memory correctable error detected Remove AC power to the system for 10 seconds and restart the system. See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0024h Memory Uncorrectable Error Pause Memory uncorrectable error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0025h Memory NonSpecific Error Pause Memory nonspecific error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0026h MP Service Self Test Error Pause MP service self test error detected See "Troubleshooting Processors" on page 190. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 23 0027h PCI IO Controller Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0028h PCI IO Read Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0029h PCI IO Write Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ah Serial Port Not Detected Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Bh Serial Port Controller Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ch Serial Port Input Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Dh Serial Port Output Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions24 About Your System 002Eh Microcode Update Error Pause Processor microcode update error Check microcode. A BIOS update is required. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Fh No Microcode Be Updated Pause Processor microcode load failed Ensure that your processors match and conform to the type described in the processor technical specifications outlined in your system’s Getting Started Guide. 8012h SATA 0 Device Not Found Pause SATA 0 device not found Check if the SATA port 0 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 0. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8013h SATA 1 Device Not Found Pause SATA 1 device not found Check if the SATA port1 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 1. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8014h SATA 2 Device Not Found Pause SATA 2 device not found Check if the SATA port 2 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 2. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 25 8015h SATA 3 Device Not Found Pause SATA 3 device not found Check if the SATA port 3 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 3. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8016h SATA 4 Device Not Found Pause SATA 4 device not found Check if the SATA port 4 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 4. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8017h SATA 5 Device Not Found Pause SATA 5 device not found Check if the SATA port 5 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 5. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8018h Sparing Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Sparing Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8019h Mirror Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Mirror Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions26 About Your System 8020h Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Pause Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Reset password. See "System Board Jumper Settings" on page 195. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8020h CMOS Battery Error Pause No CMOS battery See "Troubleshooting the System Battery" on page 192. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 27 System Event Log Processor Error Message: “Processor Sensor, IERR error, Processor 1” Table 1-2. Processor Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 07h Processor 6 Sensor Number 04h Processor Sensor Number (depends on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: IERR 01h: Thermal Trip 02h: FRB1/BIST Failure 03h: FRB2/Hang in POST Failure 04h: FBR3/Processer Startup/Initialization Failure 0Ah: Processor Automatically Throttled 9 Event Data2 XXh 00h: Processor1 01h: Processor2 02h: Processor3 04h: Processor4 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present28 About Your System Memory Ecc Message: “Memory Sensor, Correctable ECC error, SBE warning threshold, CPU1 DIMM_A1” Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Ch Memory 6 Sensor Number 60h Memory Sensor Number (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: Correctable ECC Error 01h: Uncorrectable ECC Error 03h: Memory Scrub Failed 04h: Memory Device Disabled 08h: SpareAbout Your System 29 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:4 0x00: SBE warning threshold 0x01: SBE critical threshold 0x0F: Unspecified Bit 3:0 0x00: CPU1 DIMM A1-8 slots (1~8) 0x01: CPU2 DIMM B1-8 slots (9~16) 0x02: CPU3 DIMM C1-8 slots (17~24) 0x03: CPU4 DIMM D1-8 slots (25~32) And so on… 10 Event Data3 XXh DIMM bit-map locatation of bits Bit 0=1: DIMM1 error event Bit 1=1: DIMM2 error event … Bit7=1: DIMM8 error event Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description30 About Your System PCIe Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, PCI PERR, Device#, Function#, Bus# ” Table 1-4. PCIe Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 73h PCI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 04h: PCI PERR 05h: PCI SERR 07h: Bus Correctable Error 08h: Bus Uncorrectable Error 0Ah: Bus Fatal Error 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:3Device Number Bit 2:0Function Number 10 Event Data3 XXh Bit 7:0 Bus NumberAbout Your System 31 IOH Core Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Fatal Error, xxxx bit, QPI[0] Error ” Table 1-5. IOH Core Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type C0h OEM Defined Interrupt 6 Sensor Number XXh 71h: QPI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 72h: INT Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Core 08h: Non-Fatal 0Ah: Fatal 9 Event Data2 XXh Local Error Bit 10 Event Data3 XXh 00h: QPI[0] Error 01h: QPI[1] Error 02h: QPI[2] Error 03h: QPI[3] Error 04h: QPI[0] Protocol Error 05h: QPI[1] Protocol Error 06h: QPI[2] Protocol Error 07h: QPI[3] Protocol Error 23h: Miscellaneous Error 24h: IOH Core Error32 About Your System SB Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Correctable, MCU Parity Error ” Table 1-6. SB Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 77h SB Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Correctable 08h: Uncorrectable 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:5Reserved Local error bit number (4 ~ 0) 00000b: HT Periodic CRC Error 00001b: HT Protocol Error 00010b: HT Flow-Control Buffer Overflow 00011b: HT Response Error 00100b: HT Per-Packet CRC Error 00101b: HT Retry Counter Error 00111b: MCU Parity Error 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 33 POST Start Event Message: “System Event, POST starts with BIOS xx.xx.xx” Table 1-7. POST Start Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 81h POST Start (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 7~4: BIOS 1st Field Version (0~15) 3~0: BIOS 2nd Field Version higher 4bits (0~63) 10 Event Data3 XXh 7~6: BIOS 2nd Field Version lower 2bits (0~63) 5~0: BIOS 3rd Field Version (0~63)34 About Your System POST End Event Table 1-8. POST End Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 85h POST End (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7 = Boot Type 0b: PC Compatible Boot (Legacy) 1b: uEFI Boot Bit 3:0 = Boot Device 0001b: Force PXE Boot 0010b: NIC PXE Boot 0011b: Hard Disk Boot 0100b: RAID HDD Boot 0101b: USB Storage Boot 0111b: CD/DVD ROM Boot 1000b: iSCSI Boot 1001b: uEFI Shell 1010b: ePSA Diagnostic Boot 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 35 POST Error Code Event Message: “System Firmware Progress, POST error code: UBLBh.” Table 1-9. POST Error Code Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Fh System Firmware Progress 6 Sensor Number 86h POST Error (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00: System Firmware Error (POST Error) 9 Event Data2 XXh Upper Byte 10 Event Data3 XXh Lower Byte36 About Your System BIOS Recovery Event Table 1-10. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 89h BIOS Recovery fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM BIOS recovery Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:Start Recovery 02h:Recovery Success 03h:Load Image Fail 04h:Signed Fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 37 ME Fail Event SEL Generator ID Table 1-11. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 8Ah ME fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM ME fail Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:ME fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present Table 1-12. SEL Generator ID Generator ID BIOS 0x0001 BMC 0x0020 ME 0x002C Windows 2008 0x013738 About Your System BMC The following table includes an overview of the system sensors. In the Offset column: • SI = Sensor Initialization • SC = Sensor Capabilities • AM = Assertion Mask • DM = Deassertion Mask • RM = Reading Mask • TM = Settable/Readable Threshold Mask Table 1-13. Sensor Summary Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 01h SEL Fullness Event Logging Disabled (10h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0035h DM: 0000h RM: 0035h 02h P1 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002h 03h P2 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 39 Table 1-14. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 04h CPU ERR2 Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 05h 12V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 06h 5V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 07h 5V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 08h 3.3V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh40 About Your System Table 1-15. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 09h 3.3V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 0Ah Battery low Battery (29h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 41h MEZZ1 TEMP Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 41h CPU1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 42h CPU2 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838hAbout Your System 41 Table 1-16. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 43h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 44h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 45h PCH Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 60h Memory Memory (0Ch) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0023h DM: 0000h RM: 0023h A0h Watchdog Watchdog 2 (23h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 000Fh DM: 0000h RM: 000Fh42 About Your System Table 1-17. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset A1h Soft Reset System Boot/ Restart Initiated (1Dh) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0004h DM: 0000h RM: 0004h A2h AC lost Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0010h DM: 0000h RM: 0010h A3h Power off Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 43 Other Information You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. • The Getting Started Guide provides an overview of rack installation, system features, setting up your system, and technical specifications. • The PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual for information about the server enclosure features, troubleshooting, and component replacement.. This document is available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The Baseboard Management Controller Guide provides information about installing and using the systems management utility. See Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide at support.dell.com/manuals. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. 44 About Your SystemUsing the System Setup Program 45 2 Using the System Setup Program The System Setup program is the BIOS program that enables you to manage your system hardware and specify BIOS-level options. From the System Setup program, you can: • Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware • View the system hardware configuration • Enable or disable integrated devices • Set performance and power management thresholds • Manage system security System Setup Menu The system employs the latest Insyde® BIOS, which is stored in Flash memory. The Flash memory supports the Plug and Play specification, and contains a System Setup program, the Power On Self Test (POST) routine, and the PCI auto-configuration utility. This system supports system BIOS shadowing which enables the BIOS to execute from 64-bit onboard write-protected DRAM. You can configure items such as: • Hard-drives, diskette drives, and peripherals • Password protection • Power management features The Setup utility should be executed under the following conditions: • When changing the system configuration • When a configuration error is detected by the system and you are prompted to make changes to the Setup utility • When redefining the communication ports to prevent any conflicts46 Using the System Setup Program • When changing the password or making other changes to the security setup NOTE: Only items in brackets [ ] can be modified, Items that are not in brackets are display only. System Setup Options at Boot You can initiate Setup by pressing the respective key during the POST: Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their corresponding alternates and functions: Keystroke Description Enter the System Setup Load customized defaults Load optimal defaults in Setup menu Save and exit Setup Keys Function F1 General Help or  Select Screen or  Select Item  Change Option/Field Tab Select Field Esc Exit Enter Go to Sub Screen Home Go to Top of Screen End Go to Bottom of ScreenUsing the System Setup Program 47 General Help In addition to the Item Specific Help window, the Setup Utility also provides a General Help screen. This screen can be called up from any menu by pressing . The General Help screen lists the legend keys with their corresponding alternates and functions. To exit the help window, press or . Console Redirection The console redirection allows a remote user to diagnose and fix problems on a server, which has not successfully booted the operating system (OS). The centerpiece of the console redirection is the BIOS Console. The BIOS Console is a Flash ROM-resident utility that redirects input and output over a serial or modem connection. The BIOS supports console redirection to a serial port. If serial port based headless server support is provided by the system, the system must provide support for redirection of all BIOS driven console I/O to the serial port. The driver for the serial console must be capable of supporting the functionality documented in the ANSI Terminal Definition. The console redirection behavior shows a change of string displays that reduce the data transfer rate in the serial port and cause the absence or an incomplete POST screen. If you see an abnormal POST screen after you connect to the console, it is recommended to press to reflash the screen. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Console redirection is configured through the System Setup program. There are three options available to establish console redirection on the system. • External serial port • Internal serial connector as Serial Over LAN (SOL) • BMC SOL48 Using the System Setup Program Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM1 To activate console redirection via COM1, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM1 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM2 SOL To activate console redirection via COM2 SOL, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press .Using the System Setup Program 49 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via BMC SOL When using the BMC management port, you have two options for connecting and managing servers: Dedicated-NIC mode and Shared-NIC mode. The following procedures show the setup option of the BMC management port through a Dedicated-NIC or Shared-NIC. To activate console redirection via a dedicated BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the BMC management port. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the BMC management port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always50 Using the System Setup Program • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Dedicated-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. To activate console redirection via a shared BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector 1. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the Ethernet connector 1 on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSIUsing the System Setup Program 51 See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Shared-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Serial Port Connection List Signal Type Setup Option OS Setting Output Remote Access Serial Port Number Serial Port Address Serial Console Redirection Enabled COM1 3F8h/2F8h ttyS0 Serial Port Enabled COM1 2F8h/3F8h ttyS1 BMC Serial Over LAN Enabled COM2 as SOL 3F8h/2F8h ttyS1 Management Port Enabled COM2 as SOL 2F8h/3F8h ttyS052 Using the System Setup Program Main Menu The main menu displays information about your system boards and BIOS. Main Screen NOTE: Press to enter the BIOS debug mode and reset the BIOS to default settings. NOTE: The options for the System Setup program change based on the system configuration. NOTE: The System Setup program defaults are listed under their respective options in the following sections, where applicable. Using the System Setup Program 53 System Settings Option Description System Date Scroll to this item to adjust the date. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system date. System Time Scroll to this item to adjust the time. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system time. Product Name Displays the system product name. BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version. NOTE: Check this version number when updating BIOS from the manufacturer. BIOS Build Date Displays the date the BIOS was created. Service Tag Displays the system service tag number. The service tag field should match what is physically on the service tag of the system. Asset Tag Displays the system asset tag number. MRC Version Displays the Memory Reference Code (MRC) firmware version. ME Version Displays the Manageability Engine (ME) firmware version. BMC Version Displays the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) firmware version. ePPID Displays the information from Electronic Piece Part Identification (ePPID) label. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector. BMC NIC MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the BMC management port. Processor Type Displays the processor type. Processor Speed Displays the maximum speed of the processor. Processor Core Displays the processor core. System Memory Size Displays total memory size installed on the system board.54 Using the System Setup Program System Memory Speed Displays the maximum speed of your system memory. System Memory Voltage Displays the maximum voltage of your system memory. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 55 Advanced Menu The advanced menu displays a table of items that defines advanced information about your system. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CAUTION: Making incorrect settings to items on these pages may cause the system to malfunction. Unless you have experience adjusting these items, it is recommended that you leave these settings at the default values. If making settings to items on these pages causes your system to malfunction or prevents the system from booting, open BIOS and choose "Load Optimal Defaults" in the Exit menu to boot up normally.56 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Management Option Description Power Management (OS Control default) Select a system power management mode. • Maximum Performance: Sets the system power management to maximum performance. • OS Control: Allows the operating system to control the power management. • Node Manager: Enables Node Manager to moderate power consumption and performance of the processors in the compute sled. Node manager delivers power reporting and power capping functionality for individual compute sleds. Using the System Setup Program 57 CPU Power Capping (P-State 0 default) Select a processor performance state (P-state). Options are [P-State 0], [P-State 1], [P-State 2], [P-State 3] and [P-state 4]. NOTE: This option is enabled when Power Management is set to OS Control mode. Chassis Power Management Press to set the different power management options that must be provided to support throttling and capping. Energy Efficient Policy (Max Performance default) Select a power policy option. • Max Performance: Sets the processors at the highest performance state at all times. • Balanced: Offers full performance and saves power by reducing system power consumption during periods of inactivity. • Low Power: Use different processor power saving modes (C-states) to reduce system power consumption. NOTE: This option works when the OS does not support power management control of processor. Option Description58 Using the System Setup Program Chassis Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis Power Management Option Description Chassis PSU Configuration Press to configure the chassis power supply. This option provides management and monitoring of the PSUs and allows you to set the minimum PSU requirements for the server. Power Capping Press to set PSU power and server loading limited in selected watts. Emergency Throttling Press to set sled level policy when emergency throttling event is triggered. Using the System Setup Program 59 Chassis PSU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis PSU Configuration Option Description Required Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide load-shared power to run the sleds in the enclosure. Options are [1], [2], [3], and [4]. Redundant Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide power redundancy to the enclosure. Options are [0], [1], and [2].60 Using the System Setup Program Power Capping Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Capping Option Description Chassis Level Capping (Disabled default) Enables or disables chassis level capping. Sled Power Capping (0 default) Specify the maximum amount of power to be consumed by the sled. Settings range from 0 or 100 to 1000 W. Using the System Setup Program 61 Emergency Throttling Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Emergency Throttling Option Description Sled Level Policy (Chassis Level default) Select a sled level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Chassis Level: Overrides the chassis level policy for a specific server. • Throttling: Allows compute sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: Turns off the compute sled when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Do Nothing: The compute sled will do nothing when an emergency throttle event is triggered. 62 Using the System Setup Program CPU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CPU Configuration Chassis Level Policy (Throttling default) Select a chassis level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. This option can be configured when the Sled Level Policy is set as Chassis Level. • Throttling: Allows chassis sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: The server power turns off when an emergency throttle event is triggered. Option Description Active Processor Cores (All Cores default) Allows you to control the number of enabled core in each processor. Options are [1], [2], [4], and [All Cores]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 63 Frequency Ratio (Auto default) Sets the frequency multipliers as maximum level. Max CPUID Value Limit (Disabled default) Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. When enabled, this setting limits CPUID function to 3. When disabled, this setting disables the 3 or less. Virtualization Technology (Disabled default) Allows you to set the Virtualization Technology in applicable CPUs. Enabled (applicable CPUs)/Disabled (unusable in any OS). QPI Frequency (Auto default) Select the link speed. Options are [6.4GTs], [7.2GTs], and [8.0GTs]. Turbo Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables processor Turbo mode (Requires enabling the EMTTM.). C-States (Enabled default) When enabled, the processor(s) can operate in all available power C states. When disabled, the user power C states are not available for the processor. C1E State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C6 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C6 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C7 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C7 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. XD Bit Capability (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor’s Execute Disable (XD) Memory Protection Technology feature. Option Description64 Using the System Setup Program Prefetch Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Prefetch Configuration Direct Cache Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables the direct cache access. Hyper-Threading Technology (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology. Prefetch Configuration Press to configure the prefetch settings. Option Description Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Enabled default) Enables or disables system optimization for sequential memory access. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 65 Memory Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Memory Configuration Hardware Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables the speculative unit within the processor(s). DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables Data Cache Unit (DCU) streamer prefetcher. DCU IP Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables DCU IP Prefetcher. Option Description Memory Frequency (Auto default) Select an operating memory frequency. Options are [Auto], [800], [1066], [1333], and [1600]. Option Description66 Using the System Setup Program Memory Turbo Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the memory turbo mode. Memory Throttling Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables the memory to run in closed-loop thermal throttling mode. Memory Operating Mode (Optimizer Mode default) Select the type of memory operation if a valid memory configuration is installed. • Optimizer Mode: The two memory controllers run in parallel 64-bit mode for improved memory performance. • Spare Mode: Enables memory sparing • Mirror Mode: Enables memory mirroring • Advanced ECC Mode: Controllers are joined in 128-bit mode running multi-bit advanced ECC. Demand Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables DRAM scrubbing. DRAM scrubbing is the ability to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on read transaction. Patrol Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables patrol scrubbing. Patrol scrubbing proactively searches the system memory, repairing correctable errors. Memory Operating Voltage (Auto default) If set to Auto, the system sets the voltage to an optimal value based on the capacity of the installed memory modules. You can also set the voltage of the memory module to a higher value (1.5 V) provided that the modules support multiple voltages. Options are [Auto], [1.5 volts], and [1.35 volts]. NOTE: BIOS will auto restrict selection if DIMM is not supporting low voltage. NUMA Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) support to improve processor performance. NOTE: This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 67 SATA Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.68 Using the System Setup Program SATA Configuration Option Description Embedded SATA Controller (AHCI default) Select an operation mode for the onboard SATA controller. • Off: Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • IDE: Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • AHCI: Enables the SATA controller to run in AHCI mode. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • RAID: Enables the SATA controller to run in RAID mode. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. This provides access to the RAID setup utility during system bootup. Embedded SATA Link Rate (Auto default) Select a SATA link speed. • Auto: Sets the SATA link speed at maximum 6.0 Gbps. • 1.5 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. • 3.0 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 3.0 Gbps. SATA Port 0 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 1 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present).Using the System Setup Program 69 SATA Port 2 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 3 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 4 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 5 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). Power Saving Features (Auto default) Enables or disables the feature that allows SATA harddrives to initiate link power management transitions. HDD Security Erase (Disabled default) Enables or disables the hard-drive security freeze lock feature. Option Description70 Using the System Setup Program PCI Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Configuration Option Description Embedded Network Devices Press to configure available network drives. NIC Enumeration (Onboard default) Select a LAN boot ROM option. • Onboard: Uses the PXE boot on NICs to boot the system. • Add-in: Use the PXE boot on add-in network adapters to boot the system. Active State Power Management Configuration Press to configure power management for PCI Express devices. Using the System Setup Program 71 PCI Slot Configuration Press to configure PCI Express devices. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. PCIe Generation (Gen3 default) Select a PCI signaling rate. • Gen1: 2.5 GT/s • Gen2: 5 GT/s • Gen3: 8 GT/s VT for Direct I/O (Disabled default) Enables or disables Intel hardware virtualization support. SR-IOV Global Enable (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS configuration of Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) devices. I/OAT DMA Engine (Disabled default) If set to Enabled, the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) feature is enabled for network controllers that support this technology. Maximum Payload Size (Auto default) Sets the maximum payload size of the PCI Express controller. Options are Auto, 128 bytes, and 256 bytes. Embedded Video Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard video controller. NOTE: This option should always be set to Enabled. The remote KVM function cannot function if set to disabled. Video Enumeration (Onboard default) Select video controller enumeration type. • Onboard - The onboard video controller is used for boot-time messages. • Add-in - The first add-in video controller is used for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. WHEA Support (Disabled default) Enables or disables the Windows Hardware Error Architecture (WHEA) feature. Reboot on WOL (ROW) (Disabled default) Enables or disables reboot on wake-on-LAN feature. Reboot On WOL targets network controllers when the network controller receives a magic packet. This option displays when the network chip supports Reboot on WOL feature. Option Description72 Using the System Setup Program Embedded Network Devices Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.Using the System Setup Program 73 Embedded Network Devices iSCSI Remote Boot Option Description Embedded NIC1 (Enabled with PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC1 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Embedded NIC2 (Enabled without PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC2 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Option Description iSCSI Initiator Name Displays the worldwide unique name of the initiator. Only iqn format is accepted. Enable DHCP (Disabled default) Enables or disables the DHCP network settings. Initiator IP Address Sets the initiator’s static IP address. Initiator Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address.74 Using the System Setup Program Gateway Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. Target IP Sets the name for the target IP. Target IP Address Sets the target’s IP address. Target Port Sets the target port. Boot LUN Sets the hexadecimal representation of LU number. CHAP Type (None default) Select CHAP type. Options are [None], [One Way CHAP], and [Mutual CHAP]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 75 Active State Power Management Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Active State Power Management Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an active state power management (ASPM) protocol for the PCI Express slot. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Onboard LAN ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the onboard network controller. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Mezzanine Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the mezzanine slot. NB-SB Link ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the northbridge and southbridge chipsets. 76 Using the System Setup Program PCI Slot Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Slot Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the PCIe slot1. Options are [Disabled], [Enabled], [Enabled without OPROM]. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. You can set the GPGPU information using IPMI commands. See Table 2-18 for more information.Using the System Setup Program 77 USB Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. USB Configuration Option Description Embedded USB Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard USB controller at system startup. USB Port with BMC (Enabled default) Enables or disables internal USB port with BMC support. External USB Port1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port1. External USB Port2 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port2. Internal USB Connector (Disabled default) Enables or disables the internal USB port. 78 Using the System Setup Program Security Menu The security menu enables you to set the security parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Security Settings Option Description Supervisor Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays. User Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays.Using the System Setup Program 79 Change Supervisor You can install a Supervisor password, and if you install a supervisor password, you can then install a user password. A user password does not provide access to many of the features in the Setup utility. Note, the Change User Password option only appears after a Supervisor password has been set. Select this option and press to access the sub menu, a dialog box appears which lets you enter a password. You can enter no more than six letters or numbers. Press after you have typed in the password. A second dialog box asks you to retype the password for confirmation. Press after you have retyped it correctly. If the password confirmation is incorrect, an error message appears. The password is stored in NVRAM after ezPORT completes. The password is required at boot time, or when the user enters the Setup utility. Change User Password Installs or changes the User password. Option Description80 Using the System Setup Program Server Menu The server menu enables you to configure compute sled parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Server Settings Option Description Status of BMC Displays BMC status. IPMI Specification Version Displays the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) firmware version number. BMC Firmware Version Displays the BMC firmware version number. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.Using the System Setup Program 81 ACPI SPMI Table (Enabled default) When enabled, BIOS enables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Service Processor Management Interface (SPMI) table for IPMI driver installation. When disabled, BIOS disables the ACPI SPMI table for BMC ROM update. Set BMC LAN Configuration Press to set the BMC network. Remote Access Configuration Press to configure serial port settings related to console redirection. Restore on AC Power Loss (Power On default) Select the power state when the AC power is back. • Power Off: System remains off until the power button is pressed. • Last State: System reverts to the last power state before power loss. • Power On: System switches back on after the AC power loss. Power Staggering AC Recovery (Immediate default) Set the time period for the system to turn back on from an AC power loss once power is resumed. • Immediate: Power On (No Delay) • Random: Auto • User Defined: User defined delay time. Power Button (Enabled default) When enabled, the power button can turn the system's power off. When disabled, the power button can only turn on system power. View System Event Log Press to view the BMC system event log. Event Logging (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to log system events. NMI on Error (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to generate an Non-masked Interrupt (NMI) when an uncorrectable PCI Express error occurs. Option Description82 Using the System Setup Program Set BMC LAN Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Set BMC LAN Configuration Option Description Channel Number Displays the channel number used for BMC LAN. Channel Number Status Displays the BMC channel number status. BMC LAN Port Configuration (Shared-NIC default) Set the BMC management port to dedicated or shared NIC port. Options are [Dedicated NIC] and [Shared NIC]. BMC NIC IP Source (DHCP default) Set BMC to obtain its IP address using DHCP or establish a static IP address. IP Address Sets the static IP address. Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address. Using the System Setup Program 83 Remote Access Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Remote Access Configuration Gateway Address Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. IPv6 Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the IPv6 internet protocol support. If set to enabled, configure the IPv6 prefix, IP and gateway addresses. Option Description Remote Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables serial console redirection. Option Description84 Using the System Setup Program Serial port number (COM1 default) Select a serial port for console redirection. • COM1: Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. • COM2 as SOL: Enables console redirection via COM2. Serial Port Address (3F8h/2F8h default) Specifies the base I/O port address of the serial port. • 3F8h/2F8h: Sets the front serial port address as 0x3F8 and internal serial port address as 0x2F8. • COM2 as SOL: Sets the front serial port address as 0x2F8 and internal serial port address as 0x3F8. Serial Port Mode (115200 8,n,1 as default) Select a baud rate for the serial port. Options are [115200 8,n,1], [57600 8,n,1], [38400 8,n,1], [192008,n,1], and [9600 8,n,1]. Flow Control (None default) Select a flow control for console redirection. Options are [None] and [Software]. Redirection After BIOS POST (Always default) If set to Always, the console redirection is always active. When Disabled, console redirection is turned off after POST. Terminal Type (ANSI default) Select a target terminal type for console redirection. Options are [ANSI], [VT100], and [VT-UTF8]. VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 85 View System Log Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. View System Log Option Description View BMC SEL Event Log View all events in the BMC system event log. Clear BMC SEL Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log. 86 Using the System Setup Program Boot Menu The boot menu enables you to set POST boot parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Boot Settings Option Description Quiet Boot (Enabled default) Enable this item to display the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. When disabled, normal POST messages appear. Pause on Errors (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to prompt you to press or keys on errors during POST. Force PXE Boot only (Disabled default) Enables or disables PXE to be the only boot device.Using the System Setup Program 87 Boot Mode (BIOS default) Select a system boot mode. • BIOS: The standard BIOS-level boot interface • UEFI: An enhanced 64-bit boot interface based on Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) specifications that overlays the system BIOS. Boot Type Order Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available devices. Legacy Boot Device Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available legacy USB devices. Option Description88 Using the System Setup Program Exit Menu Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Exit Options Option Description Save Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to save any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Save Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to save the changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu. Discard Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to discard any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Discard Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to discard changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu.Using the System Setup Program 89 Save Changes Select this item and press to save changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Discard Changes Select this item and press to discard any changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Load Optimal Defaults If you highlight this item and press , a dialog box asks if you want to install optimal settings for all the items in the Setup utility. Press the key to indicate Yes, and then press to install the optimal settings. The optimal settings default values are quite demanding and your system might not function properly if you are using slower memory chips or other kinds of low-performance components. Load Customized Defaults Load 2nd default values from NVRAM for all the setup parameters. Save Customized Defaults Save all the setup parameters to NVRAM as 2nd default values. Option Description90 Using the System Setup Program Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options The options in the System Setup menu allows you to control the System Configuration Utility (syscfg). This utility is included in the Dell OpenManage Deployment Toolkit (DTK). See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. You can use the system configuration utility for the following conditions: • To change the System Setup option by D4 token: ./syscfg –t=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg -t=0x002D to enable NIC1 Option ROM) • To check token activity status: ./syscfg --istokenactive=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg --istokenactive=0x002D to check the token active status of NIC1 Option ROM) • To directly change the System Setup option through BMC memory: ./ipmitool raw (Example: ./ipmitool raw 0xc 1 1 3 10 106 42 120 to set IP address of BMC management port as 10.106.42.120) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table Token Setup Option Description 002D Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 002E Embedded NIC1 Disables the onboard NIC1 controller. 0051 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: USB storage, hard disk, CD/DVD-ROM, RAID, Network (if the devices are available).Using the System Setup Program 91 0052 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: hard disk then option ROMs (if the devices are available). 0053 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: Network, hard disk, RAID,USB storage, CD/DVDROM (if the devices are available). 0054 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: CD/DVD-ROM, USB Storage, hard disk, RAID, Network (if the devices are available). 005C N/A Enables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 005D N/A Disables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 006E Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 0087 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the onboard video controller for boot-time messages. 0088 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the first add-in video controller for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. 008C Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 008D Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 00A1 Restore on AC Power Loss System remains off until the power button is pressed. 00A2 Restore on AC Power Loss System reverts to the last power state before power loss. 00A3 Restore on AC Power Loss System switches back on after the AC power loss. 00BA Embedded NIC2 Disables the onboard NIC2 controller. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description92 Using the System Setup Program 00BB Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 00BC Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 00BF Remote Access Disables serial console redirection. 00C0 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. 00C1 Power Button Enables the power button to turn off the system power. (default) 00C2 Power Button Disables the power button to turn off the system power. 00D1 Hyper-Threading Technology Enables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D2 Hyper-Threading Technology Disables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D7 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM2. 00D8 Load Optimal Defaults Install optimal default settings for all the items in the Setup utility on the next boot. 00FE Legacy USB Support Disables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 00FF Legacy USB Support Enables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 0117 SATA Port0 Turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. 0118 SATA Port0 Enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0119 SATA Port1 Turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. 011A SATA Port1 Enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 93 011B SATA Port2 Turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. 011C SATA Port2 Enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011D SATA Port3 Turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. 011E SATA Port3 Enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011F SATA Port4 Turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. 0120 SATA Port4 Enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0121 SATA Port5 Turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. 0122 SATA Port5 Enables BIOS support for the 6th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0135 Embedded SATA Controller Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0137 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0138 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0139 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 013E Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When disabled, memory remapping relocates memory space behind PCI hole to the space above 4 GB. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description94 Using the System Setup Program 013F Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When enabled, memory remapping relocates memory space (3GB - 4 GB) to the space above 4 GB. 0140 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When disabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. 0141 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When enabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. If the operating system supports this extended paging mechanism, it will provide some protection against software viruses that exploit buffer overflows. 014A Virtualization Technology Allows you to disable the VT technology in applicable processors. If disabled, the VT feature is unusable in any OS. 014B Virtualization Technology Allows you to enable the VT technology in applicable processors. 014E External USB PORT1 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 1. 014F External USB PORT1 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 1. 0168 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting disables the 3 or less. 0169 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting limits CPUID function to 3. 0171 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the cache line that contains the data it currently requires. 0172 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the adjacent cache line in the other half of the sector. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 95 0173 Hardware Prefetcher Disables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0174 Hardware Prefetcher Enables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0178 Remote Access Enables serial console redirection. 0189 External USB PORT2 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 2. 018A External USB PORT2 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 2. 0199 Power Saving Features Disables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 019A Power Saving Features Enables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 01C4 NUMA Support Disables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 NUMA Support Enables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C4 Node Interleave Disables the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 Node Interleave Enable the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01CF I/OAT DMA Engine Enables the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) DMA Engine feature. Set to enabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. 01D0 I/OAT DMA Engine Disables the I/OAT DMA Engine feature. This option should be disabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description96 Using the System Setup Program 01DA Embedded NIC1 Enables NIC1 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01DB Embedded NIC2 Enables NIC2 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01EA Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. It disables the processor core to increase its frequency. 01EB Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. It allows the processor core to increase its frequency. 01F0 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller. 01F1 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 01F2 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 01F3 Embedded NIC3 Enables NIC3 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 0204 VT for Direct I/O Disables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0205 VT for Direct I/O Enables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0211 Internal USB PORT Disables the internal USB connector. 0212 Internal USB PORT Enables the internal USB connector. 021F Maximum Performance Sets the system power management to maximum performance. 0221 OS Control Allows the OS to change the P-state. 0224 Embedded Video Controller Enables the onboard video controller as the primary video device. 0225 Embedded Video Controller Disables the onboard video controller. 022D Boot Mode Enables booting to Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) capable operating systems. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 97 022E Boot Mode Enables booting to legacy mode, ensures compatibility with operating systems that do not support UEFI. 0231 Active Processor Cores Four cores of the processor are enabled This applies to Quad-core processors only. 0232 Active Processor Cores Two cores of the processor are enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-core processors. 0233 Active Processor Cores Single core of the processor is enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-Core processors. 024B C States When enabled, the processor can operate in all available Power C States. (default) 024C C States When disabled, there are no C states available for the processor. 024D Pause on Errors Enables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024E Pause on Errors Disables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024F Quiet Boot Enables the display of the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. 0250 Quiet Boot Disables the display of the splash or summary screen. The user is able to see the detail of the POST messages. 0251 N/A The NIC1 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC2. 0252 N/A The NIC2 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC1. 0254 3F8h/2F8h Sets the back serial port address to 0x3F8 and internal serial port address to 0x2F8 0257 2F8h/3F8h Set back serial port address to 0x2F8 and internal serial port address to 0x3F8. 025D Optimizer Mode Selects optimizer mode as the memory operating mode. 025E Spare Mode Selects spare mode as the memory operating mode. 025F Mirror Mode Selects mirror mode as the memory operating mode. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description98 Using the System Setup Program 0260 Advanced ECC Mode Selects Advanced ECC (i.e. Lockstep, Chipkill) as the memory operating mode. 026A Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 1 specification. 026B Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 3 specification. 026E Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled all of cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 026F Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 6 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0270 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 8 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0271 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 10 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0272 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 12 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 027B HT Assist Disables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is enabled. 027C HT Assist Enables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is disabled. 02A1 C1E State Enables the processor Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. (default) 02A2 C1E State Disables the processor C1-E state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 99 02A9 DRAM Prefetcher Disables DRAM references from triggering DRAM prefetch requests. 02AA DRAM Prefetcher Turns on the DRAM prefetch unit in the Northbridge. 02AB HW Prefetch Training on SW Disables hardware prefetcher from considering software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. 02AC HW Prefetch Training on SW Enables Hardware prefetcher considers software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. (default) 02AD SR-IOV Global Enable Enables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02AE SR-IOV Global Enable Disables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02B6 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.5 volts. 02B7 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.35 volts. 02B8 Memory Operating Voltage This setting indicates the memory operating voltage will be set automatically by the Memory initialization code and depending upon the installed DIMM's capability and the memory configuration of the system. This is the default setting and will set the Memory Operating voltage to the POR voltage. 02C5 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. (default) 02C6 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Disables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. 02C7 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to enable for HPC applications. (default) 02C8 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to disable for energy efficiency. 02C9 QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to compute for computation-intensive applications. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description100 Using the System Setup Program 02CA QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to I/O for I/O-intensive applications. 02CE DCU IP Prefetcher Enables the DCU IP Prefetcher. (default) 02CF DCU IP Prefetcher Disables the DCU IP Prefetcher. 401A Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VT100 emulation model. See tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401B Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in ANSI emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401C Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, continues to operate after the OS boot hand-off. 401D Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates during the BIOS boot only and is disabled prior to OS boot hand-off. See also tokens BFh, C0h, D7h, 401Ah and 401Bh. 4022 1st Boot Device Whenever the BIOS boots the system, the first PXEcapable device is inserted as the first device in the boot sequence. Enabling this feature causes the BIOS operation to occur on the next and all subsequent boots and causes a change in the system's defined boot sequence. The BIOS chooses the first PXEcapable device as the system's onboard network controller, if present and enabled, or the first bootable network device found in the system's standard PCI search order. 4026 Manufacturing Mode Enables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 101 4027 Manufacturing Mode Disables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. 4033 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 115,200 bits per second. 4034 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 57,600 bits per second 4035 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 19,200 bits per second. 4036 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 9,600 bits per second. 403F Clear SMBIOS System Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log on the next boot. 4800 Node Manager Enables the Node Manager mode for Intel processors. 4801 APML Enable the Advanced Platform Management Link mode for AMD processors. 4802 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P0-state). 4803 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P1-state). 4804 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P2-state). 4805 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P3-state). 4806 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P4-state). 480A C6 State Disables the processor C6 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480B C6 State Enables the processor C6 state. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description102 Using the System Setup Program 480C L3 Cache Power Control Disable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480D L3 Cache Power Control Enable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480E C7 State Disables the processor C7 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480F C7 State Enables the processor C7 state. (default) 4810 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 8 bit width. 4811 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 16 bit width. 4812 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 800MHz. 4813 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1000MHz. 4814 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1200MHz. 4815 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1600MHz. 4816 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2000MHz. 4817 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2600MHz. 4820 Memory Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. 4821 Memory Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. 4822 NUMA Support Enables the node interleave option for SLES11. This applies to NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 103 4823 Memory Frequency Detects the memory running speed from H/W designed (SPD, memory population). 4824 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 800MHz. 4825 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1066MHz. 4826 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1333MHz. 4827 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1600MHz. 4828 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Open Loop Throughput Throttling (OLTT). (default) 4829 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Closed Loop Thermal Throttling (CLTT). 482A DRAM Scrubbing Disables DRAM scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482B DRAM Scrubbing Enables Dram scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482C Demand Scrubbing Disables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482D Demand Scrubbing Enables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482E Patrol Scrubbing Disables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 482F Patrol Scrubbing Enables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 4830 HDD Security Erase Sets security freeze lock to all hard-drives. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description104 Using the System Setup Program 4831 HDD Security Erase Unlocks the security freeze lock on all hard-drives. 4832 AHCI-AMD Supports AMD inbox AHCI driver. 4833 AHCI-MS Supports Microsoft inbox AHCI driver. 4834 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at maximum rate speed of 6.0 Gbps. 4835 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. 4836 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 3.0 Gbps. 4840 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the PCI Express Link of port. All entry disabled. 4841 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry enabled. 4842 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L1 entry enabled. 4843 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4844 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4845 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled 4846 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. All entry disabled. 4847 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry enabled. 4848 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L1 entry enabled. 4849 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s and L1 entry enabled. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 105 484A Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream enabled. 484B Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 484C Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. All entry disabled. 484D Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry enabled. 484E Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L1 entry enabled. 484F Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4850 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4851 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 4852 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. All entry disabled. 4853 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. L1 entry enabled. 4854 Maximum Payload Size Auto detects the PCIe maximum payload size. 4855 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 128 Bytes. 4856 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 256 Bytes. 4857 WHEA Support Disables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4858 WHEA Support Enables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4859 NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from onboard NIC to Add-on NIC adapter. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description106 Using the System Setup Program 485A NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from Add-on NIC adapter to onboard NIC. 485B PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen3 8.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485C PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen2 5.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485D PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen1 2.5 Gigabits bandwidth. 485E Reboot on WOL (ROW) Disables ROW. (default) The ROW repurposes the Wake on LAN (WOL) signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. 485F Reboot on WOL (ROW) Enables ROW. ROW repurposes the WOL signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. When a WOL packet is received by the NIC, the wake up signal generated by the NIC shall cause a hardware reboot of the system board. 4860 USB PORT with BMC Allows you to electrically disable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4861 USB PORT with BMC Allow the users to electrically enable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4870 Force PXE Boot only Disables PXE to be the boot device only. 4871 Force PXE Boot only Enables PXE to be the boot device only. The system retrying to boot from PXE device. 4873 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 16 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 4877 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot1. 4878 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot1. 4879 PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot2. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 107 487A PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot2. 487B PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot3. 487C PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot3. 487D PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot4. 487E PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot4. 487F Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically disable Mezzanine Slot. 4880 Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically enable Mezzanine Slot. 4881 1st Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the first boot device. 4882 1st Boot Device Sets RAID as the first boot device. 4883 1st Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the first boot device. 4884 1st Boot Device Sets a CD/DVD ROM as the first boot device. 4885 2nd Boot Device Sets a network device as the 2nd boot device. 4886 2nd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 2nd boot device. 4887 2nd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 2nd boot device. 4888 2nd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 2nd boot device. 4889 2nd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 2nd boot device. 488A 3rd Boot Device Sets the network device as the 3rd boot device. 488B 3rd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 3rd boot device. 488C 3rd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 3rd boot device. 488D 3rd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 3rd boot device. 488E 3rd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 3rd boot device. 488F 4th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 4th boot device. 4890 4th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 4th boot device. 4891 4th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 4th boot device. 4892 4th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 4th boot device. 4893 4th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 4th boot device. 4894 5th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 5th boot device. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description108 Using the System Setup Program 4895 5th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 5th boot device. 4896 5th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 5th boot device. 4897 5th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 5th boot device. 4898 5th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as thes 5th boot device. 48A0 ACPI SPMI Table Disables the ACPI SPMI Table for BMC ROM update. 48A1 ACPI SPMI Table Enables the ACPI SPMI Table for IPMI driver installation. 48A2 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Dedicated-NIC. 48A3 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Shared-NIC. 48A4 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from Static mode. 48A5 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from DHCP mode. 48A6 IPv6 Mode Disables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A7 IPv6 Mode Enables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A8 IPv6 AutoConfig Disables IPv6 auto configuration. 48A9 IPv6 AutoConfig Enables IPv6 auto configuration. 48AA Serial Port Mode Sets the console redirection baud rate to 3,8400 bits per second. 48AB Flow Control Selects none as the flow control for console redirection. 48AC Flow Control Selects hardware as the flow control for console redirection. 48AD Flow Control Selects software as the flow control for console redirection. 48AE Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VTUTF8 emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 109 48AF VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Disables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B0 VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Enables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B1 Event logging Disables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B2 Event logging Enables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B3 NMI on Error Disables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B4 NMI on Error Enables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B5 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.25 volts. 48C0 Frequency Ratio Sets frequency multiplier as maximum level. 48C1 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier one level. 48C2 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier two levels. 48C3 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier three levels. 48C8 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at maximum speed. 48C9 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 4.800GT. 48CA QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 5.866GT. 48CB QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 6.400GT. 48CC QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 7.200GT. 48CD QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 8.000GT. 48D0 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as performance profile to configure all necessary settings. 48D1 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as balance profile to configure all necessary settings. (default) 48D2 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as low power profile to configure all necessary settings. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description110 Using the System Setup Program 48D3 Direct Cache Access Disables the Direct Cache Access. 48D4 Direct Cache Access Enables the Direct Cache Access. 48D8 Load Customized Defaults Requests a customized default of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DA Save Customized Defaults Saves current settings to customized defaults of SETUP on next boot. 48DB N/A Requests maximum performance settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DC N/A Requests a energy efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DD N/A Requests HPCC efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. Dell will provide the settings before A-can BIOS. 48DE Shell Requests the uEFI Shell as first boot device on the next boot. 48E0 N/A Use NIC3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E1 N/A Use NIC4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E2 N/A Use NIC5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E3 N/A Use NIC6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E4 N/A Use NIC7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E5 N/A Use NIC8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E6 N/A Use HDD1 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 111 48E7 N/A Use HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E8 N/A Use HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E9 N/A Use HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EA N/A Use HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EB N/A Use HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EC N/A Use RAID HDD1as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48ED N/A Use RAID HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EE N/A Use RAID HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EF N/A Use RAID HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F0 N/A Use RAID HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F1 N/A Use RAID HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F2 N/A Use RAID HDD7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F3 N/A Use RAID HDD8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F4 N/A Use RAID HDD9 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F5 N/A Use RAID HDD10 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F6 N/A Use RAID HDD11 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description112 Using the System Setup Program 48F7 N/A Use RAID HDD12 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F8 N/A Use RAID HDD13 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F9 N/A Use RAID HDD14 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FA N/A Use RAID HDD15 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FB N/A Use RAID HDD16 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 113 IPMI Command List The following tables include all commands defined in the IPMI v2.0 specifications. All mandatory commands and some optional functions are supported. Special functions beyond the scope of IPMI v2.0 are implemented as original equipment manufacturer (OEM) commands. In the O/M column: • M = Mandatory in the IPMI spec and is implemented. • O = Optional command supported in this implementation. • N = Not supported in this implementation. See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. NOTE: For more information about the standard IPMI tool commands, see ipmitool.sourceforge.net/manpage.html. Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Device ID App 0x01h M Yes Broadcast Get Device ID App 0x02h M Yes Cold Reset App 0x03h O Yes Warm Reset App 0x04h O No Get Self Test Results App 0x05h M Yes Manufacture Test On App 0x06h O Yes Get ACPI Power State App 0x07h O Yes Get Device GUID App 0x08h O Yes Get NetFn Support App 0x09h O Yes Get Command Support App 0x0Ah O Yes Get Command Sub-function Support App 0x0Bh O Yes114 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Configurable Commands App 0x0C O Yes Get Configurable Command Sub-functions App 0x0Dh O Yes Set Command Enables App 0x60h O Yes Get Command Enables App 0x61h O Yes Set Command Sub-function Enables App 0x62h O Yes Get Command Sub-function Enables App 0x63h O Yes Get OEM NetFn IANA Support App 0x64h O Yes Table 2-3. BMC Watchdog Timer Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Reset Watchdog Timer App 0x22h M Yes Set Watchdog Timer App 0x24h M Yes Get Watchdog Timer App 0x25h M Yes Table 2-4. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Set BMC Global Enables App 0x2Eh M Yes Get BMC Global Enables App 0x2Fh M Yes Clear Message Buffer Flags App 0x30h M Yes Get Message Buffer Flags App 0x31h M Yes Enable Message Channel Receive App 0x32h O Yes Get Message App 0x33h M Yes Send Message App 0x34h M Yes Read Event Message Buffer App 0x35h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 115 Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get BT Interface Capabilities App 0x36h M No Get System GUID App 0x37h M Yes Set System Info Parameters App 0x58h O Yes Get System Info Parameters App 0x59h O Yes Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 0x38h O Yes Get Session Challenge App 0x39h O Yes Activate Session Command App 0x3Ah O Yes Set Session Privilege Level Command App 0x3Bh O Yes Close Session App 0x3Ch O Yes Get Session Information App 0x3Dh O Yes Get Authentication Code Command App 0x3Fh O Yes Set Channel Access Commands App 0x40h O Yes Get Channel Access Commands App 0x41h O Yes Get Channel Info Command App 0x42h O Yes Set User Access Commands App 0x43h O Yes Get User Access Commands App 0x44h O Yes Set User Name Commands App 0x45h O Yes Get User Name Commands App 0x46h O Yes Set User Password Commands App 0x47h O Yes Active Payload Command App 0x48h O Yes Deactivate Payload Command App 0x49h O Yes Get Payload Activation Status App 0x4Ah O Yes Get Payload Instance Info Command App 0x4Bh O Yes Set User Payload Access App 0x4Ch O Yes Get User Payload Access App 0x4Dh O Yes Get Channel Payload Support App 0x4Eh O Yes116 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Channel Payload Version App 0x4Fh O Yes Get Channel OEM Payload Info App 0x50h O Yes Master Write-Read I2C App 0x52h M Yes Get Channel Cipher Suites App 0x54h O Yes Suspend/Resume Payload Encryption App 0x55h O Yes Set Channel Security Keys App 0x56h O Yes Get System Interface Capabilities App 0x57h O No Table 2-6. Chassis Device Commands (NetFn: 0x00H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x00h M Yes Get Chassis Status Chassis 0x01h M Yes Chassis Control Chassis 0x02h M Yes Chassis Reset Chassis 0x03h O No Chassis Identify Chassis 0x04h O Yes Set Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x05h O Yes Set Power Restore Policy Chassis 0x06h O Yes Get System Restart Cause Chassis 0x07h O Yes Set System Boot Options Chassis 0x08h O Yes Get System Boot Options Chassis 0x09h O Yes Set Front Panel Button Enable Chassis 0x0Ah O No Set Power Cycle Interval Chassis 0x0Bh O Yes Get POH Counter Chassis 0x0Fh O NoUsing the System Setup Program 117 Table 2-7. Event Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Event Receiver S/E 0x00h M Yes Get Event Receiver S/E 0x01h M Yes Platform Event S/E 0x02h M Yes Table 2-8. PEF/PET Alerting Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get PEF Capabilities S/E 0x10h M Yes Arm PEF Postpone Timer S/E 0x11h M Yes Set PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x12h M Yes Get PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x13h M Yes Set Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x14h M Yes Get Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x15h M Yes Alert Immediate S/E 0x16h O Yes PET Acknowledge S/E 0x17h O Yes Table 2-9. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Device SDR Info S/E 0x20h O No Get Device SDR S/E 0x21h O No Reserve Device SDR Repository S/E 0x22h O No Get Sensor Reading Factors S/E 0x23h O Yes Set Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x24h O Yes Get Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x25h O Yes Set Sensor Threshold S/E 0x26h O Yes Get Sensor Threshold S/E 0x27h O Yes Set Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x28h O Yes118 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-10. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x29h O Yes Set Sensor Reading and Event Status S/E 0x30h O Yes Re-arm Sensor Events S/E 0x2Ah O Yes Get Sensor Event Status S/E 0x2Bh O Yes Get Sensor Reading S/E 0x2Dh M Yes Set Sensor Type S/E 0x2Eh O No Get Sensor Type S/E 0x2Fh O No Table 2-11. FRU Inventory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get FRU Inventory Area Info Storage 0x10h M Yes Read FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x11h M Yes Write FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x12h M Yes Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SDR Repository Info Storage 0x20h M Yes Get SDR Repository Allocation Info Storage 0x21h O No Reserve SDR Repository Storage 0x22h M Yes Get SDR Storage 0x23h M Yes Add SDR Storage 0x24h M No Partial ADD SDR Storage 0x25h O Yes Delete SDR Storage 0x26h O No Clear SDR Repository Storage 0x27h M Yes Get SDR Repository Time Storage 0x28h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 119 * Support for Partial Add SEL is not required when Add SEL is supported. Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set SDR Repository Time Storage 0x29h O Yes Enter SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Ah O No Exit SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Bh O No Run Initialization Agent Storage 0x2Ch O Yes Table 2-13. SEL Commands (NetFn: 0x40H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SEL Info Storage 0x40h M Yes Get SEL Allocation Info Storage 0x41h O No Reserve SEL Storage 0x42h O Yes Get SEL Entry Storage 0x43h M Yes Add SEL Entry Storage 0x44h M Yes Partial Add SEL Entry Storage 0x45h M No * Delete SEL Entry Storage 0x46h O No Clear SEL Storage 0x47h M Yes Get SEL Time Storage 0x48h M Yes Set SEL Time Storage 0x49h M Yes Get Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Ah O No Set Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Bh O No Get SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5Ch O No Set SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5D O No120 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-14. LAN Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x01h M Yes Get LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x02h M Yes Suspend BMC ARP Transport 0x03h O No Get IP/UDP/RMCP Statistics Transport 0x04h O No Table 2-15. Serial/Modem Device Commands (NetFn: 0x 0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x10h M Yes Get Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x11h M Yes Set Serial/Modem Mux Transport 0x12h O Yes Get TAP Response Codes Transport 0x13h O No Set PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x14h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x15h O No Send PPP UDP Proxy Packet Transport 0x16h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Receive Data Transport 0x17h O No Serial/Modem Connection Active Transport 0x18h M Yes Callback Transport 0x20h O No SOL Activating Transport 0x19h O No Set SOL Configuration Transport 0x20h O No Get SOL Configuration Transport 0x21h O No Set User Callback Options Transport 0x1Ah O No Get User Callback Options Transport 0x1Bh O No Set Serial Routing Mux Transport 0x1Ch O YesUsing the System Setup Program 121 Table 2-16. Command Forwarding Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Forwarded Command Transport 0x30h O Yes Set Forwarded Commands Transport 0x31h O Yes Get Forwarded Commands Transport 0x32h O Yes Enable Forwarded Commands Transport 0x33h O Yes Table 2-17. Firmware Update Commands (NetFn: 0x08H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Firmware Update Phase 1 Firmware 0x10h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 2 Firmware 0x11h O Yes Get Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x12h O Yes Get Firmware Version Firmware 0x13h O Yes Set Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x16h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 3 Firmware 0x21h O Yes Table 2-18. GPGPU Setting Commands (NetFn: 0x30H) Command NetFn LUN CMD Privelege Set GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 32h Admin Get GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 33h Admin122 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Settings The system BIOS provides various options for power settings to help you save energy, maximize system performance. The following table provides a guide for power management settings. Table 2-19. Power Management Settings System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token Power Management Power Management Max. Performance 021F Node Manager 4800 Energy Efficiency Policy Performance 48D0 Low Power 48D2 CPU Configuration Active Processor Cores All 026E 1/2 0233/ 0232 Frequency Ratio Auto 48C0 3 48C3 QPI Frequency Auto 48C8 4.80GT/s 48C9 Turbo Mode Enabled 01E8 Disabled 01EA C State Disabled 024C Enabled 024B C1E State Disabled 02A2 Enabled 02A1 C6 State Disabled 480A Enabled 480B C7 State Disabled 480E Enabled 480F Direct Cache Access Enabled 48D4 Disabled 48D3 Hyper-Threading Technology Enabled 00D1 Disabled 00D2 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled 0172 Disabled 0171 Hardware Prefetcher Enabled 0174 Disabled 0173 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enabled 02C5 Disabled 02C6 DCU IP Prefetcher Enabled 02CE Disabled 02CFUsing the System Setup Program 123 Memory Configuration Memory Frequency Auto 4823 800 MHz 4824 Memory Turbo Mode Enabled 4821 Disabled 4820 Memory Throttling Mode Disabled 4828 Enabled 4829 Memory Operating Voltage 1.5 V 02B6 1.35V/ 1.25V 02B7/ 48B5 SATA Configuration Embedded SATA Link State Auto 4834 1.5 Gbps Power Saving Features Disabled 0199 Enabled 019A PCI Configuration PCIe Slot ASPM Disabled 4840 L0s & L1 4843 Onboard LAN ASPM Disabled 4846 L0s & L1 4849 Mezzing Slot ASPM Disabled 484C L0s & L1 484F Table 2-19. Power Management Settings (continued) System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token124 Using the System Setup ProgramInstalling System Components 125 3 Installing System Components Safety Instructions WARNING: Working on systems that are still connected to a power supply can be extremely dangerous. CAUTION: System components and electronic circuit boards can be damaged by discharge of static electricity. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. To avoid injury to yourself or damage to your system, follow these guidelines: • Always disconnect the system from the power outlet whenever you are working inside the system. • If possible, wear a grounded wrist strap when you are working inside the system. Alternatively, discharge any static electricity by touching the bare metal chassis of the system case, or the bare metal body of any other grounded appliance. • Hold electronic circuit boards by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the board unless it is necessary to do so. Do not flex or stress the circuit board. • Leave all components inside the static-proof packaging until you are ready to use the component for the installation.126 Installing System Components • Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. Recommended Tools • #1 Phillips screwdriver • #2 Phillips screwdriver • Torx drivers • Set of jeweler screwdriversInstalling System Components 127 Inside the System CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: This system must be operated with the sled or a sled blank installed to make sure of proper cooling. Figure 3-1. Inside the Sled 1 system board 2 heat sinks/processors (2) 3 memory (16) 4 cooling shroud 5 interposer extender 6 internal 2.5-inch hard-drives (2)128 Installing System Components Sled Configuration The following illustrations show a 10-Sled and 8-Sled configuration. A mixture of differing sled types is also supported in the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure. For more information, refer to the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual. Figure 3-2. PowerEdge C8220 10-Sled SKU Figure 3-3. PowerEdge C8220 8-Sled SKU with 2 Power SledsInstalling System Components 129 Sled Removing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. CAUTION: Operating the system for extended periods of time without a sled blank installed can cause the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure to overheat. See "Installing a Sled Blank" on page 131. 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off. When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power indicator is off. 2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4. Removing and Installing a Sled 1 handle 2 release latch130 Installing System Components Installing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Orient the sled so that the release latch is in the bottom of the sled. See Figure 3-4. 2 Slide the new sled into the enclosure until the sled is fully seated and the release latch snaps into place. See Figure 3-4. Sled Blank CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. Removing a Sled Blank Press the release latches and slide the blank out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Removing and Installing a Sled Blank 1 release latches (2) 2 sled blankInstalling System Components 131 Installing a Sled Blank Hold the blank with the guide rail facing forward. Slide the blank into the enclosure until it is fully seated and the release latches snap into place. See Figure 3-5. SD Card Removing a SD Card 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off. When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power-on indicator is off. See Figure 1-1. 2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out slightly until you have access to the SD card slot. 3 Press the SD card in to release it from the slot and remove the card. See Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6. Removing and Installing a SD Card 1 SD card 2 SD card slot132 Installing System Components Installing a SD Card Media memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. NOTE: To use an SD card with your sled, ensure that the SD card slot is enabled in the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 1 Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right. See Figure 3-6. 2 Press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-6. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 3 Slide the sled into the chassis until the sled is fully seated and the release lever snaps into place. Sled Covers Removing the Front Cover CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure proper cooling. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Remove the four screws securing the front cover. See Figure 3-7. 2 Lift the front cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 3 If installed, disconnect all cables from the expansion card. Installing System Components 133 Figure 3-7. Removing and Installing the Front Cover Installing the Front Cover NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Check that all cable connections are secure. 2 Place the front cover on top of the sled tray, aligning the notches in the front cover with the corresponding tabs in the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 3 If an expansion card is installed, make sure the expansion card riser is firmly seated. 4 Replace the four screws securing the front cover to the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 1 screws (4) 2 front cover 1 2134 Installing System Components Removing the Back Cover CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure proper cooling. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Remove the two screws securing the back cover. See Figure 3-8. 2 Slide the cover forward to free it from the metal guides on the sled tray. 3 Lift the cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8. Removing and Installing the Back Cover 1 back cover 2 screws (2)Installing System Components 135 Installing the Back Cover NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Place the cover on the sled tray and slide it towards the front of the sled tray so that the screw holes on the back cover align with the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. 2 Replace the two screws securing the back cover to the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. Cooling Shroud Removing the Cooling Shroud CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of data. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See Figure 3-9. 3 Press the shroud release lever toward the right of the sled. 4 Lift the shroud up to disengage the anchor tab from the heat sink. See Figure 3-9.136 Installing System Components Figure 3-9. Removing and Installing the Cooling Shroud Installing the Cooling Shroud CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of data. 1 Align and gently press the cooling shroud down on the system board until the anchor tabs snap securely into place. See Figure 3-9. 2 Replace the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See Figure 3-9. 3 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (2) 2 cooling shroudInstalling System Components 137 Heat Sink Removing a Heat Sink CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. WARNING: The heat sink may be hot to touch for some time after the system has been powered down. Allow the heat sink to cool before removing it. CAUTION: Never remove the heat sink from a processor unless you intend to remove the processor. The heat sink is necessary to maintain proper thermal conditions. 3 Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen one pair of diagonal retention screws that secure the heat sink to the system board. See screw sequence indicated on Figure 3-10. 4 Loosen the other pair of retention screws. See Figure 3-10.138 Installing System Components Figure 3-10. Heat Sink Screw Loosening Sequence 5 Gently lift the heat sink off the processor and set the heat sink aside with thermal grease side facing up. See Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11. Removing and Installing the Heat SinkInstalling System Components 139 Installing a Heat Sink CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: When installing the heat sink, be sure to orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink label is facing the neighboring heat sink. 1 Using a clean lint-free cloth, remove the thermal grease from the heat sink. 2 Apply new thermal grease evenly to the center of the top of the new processor. 3 Orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink is facing the neighboring heat sink’s KEY icon. See Figure 3-11. 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four heat sink retention screws in a diagonal sequence. See Figure 3-10. 5 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (4) 2 heat sink 3 heat sink KEY icon 4 heat sink 5 heat sink KEY icon140 Installing System Components Processors Your sled supports the following processors: Use the following procedure when: • Installing an additional processor • Replacing a processor Removing a Processor CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. Table 3-1. Processors Model Number Cores/Threads Frequency TDP E5-2690 8/16 2.9 GHz 135 W E5-2680 8/16 2.7 GHz 130 W E5-2670 8/16 2.6 GHz 115 W E5-2660 8/16 2.2 GHz 95 W E5-2665 8/16 2.4 GHz 115 W E5-2650 8/16 2.0 GHz 95 W E5-2640 6/12 2.5 GHz 95 W E5-2630 6/12 2.3 GHz 95 W E5-2620 6/12 2.0 GHz 95 W E5-2650L 8/16 1.8 GHz 70 W E5-2630L 6/12 2.0 GHz 60 WInstalling System Components 141 3 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137. CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware that the release lever can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped. 4 Position your thumb firmly over the processor hook-shaped socket-release lever and release the lever from the locked position. Do not force the lever up to the fully open position. See Figure 3-12. 5 Position your thumb firmly over the bent load lever and release the lever from the locked position. Rotate the lever 90 degrees upward to lift the processor shield. See Figure 3-12. 6 Rotate the processor shield upward and out of the way. See Figure 3-12. 7 Lift the processor out of the socket and leave the socket-release lever and load lever up so that the socket is ready for the new processor. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware that the release and load levers can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped. Figure 3-12. Removing and Installing a Processor142 Installing System Components Installing a Processor CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: When installing only one processor, the processor must be installed in the processor 1 socket. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of the processor 1 socket. NOTE: If you are upgrading your processors, prior to upgrading your system, download and install the latest system BIOS version from support.dell.com. Follow the instructions included in the file download to install the update on your system. 1 Unpack the processor if it has not been used previously. 2 If the processor has already been used, remove any thermal grease from the top of the processor using a lint-free cloth. 3 Align the processor with the socket keys on the processor socket. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: Positioning the processor incorrectly can permanently damage the system board or the processor. Be careful not to bend the pins in the processor socket. 4 With the hook-shaped release and bent load levers on the processor socket in the open position, match the processor with the alignment mark indicator and the socket keys and set the processor lightly in the socket. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: Do not use force to seat the processor. When the processor is positioned correctly, it engages easily into the socket. 5 Close the processor shield. 1 processor alignment mark (triangle) 2 processor 3 processor shield 4 hook-shaped socket-release lever 5 processor socket 6 socket key (4) 7 bent load lever 8 alignment notchInstalling System Components 143 6 Rotate the bent load lever down until it snaps into place. 7 Rotate the hook-shaped socket-release lever down until it snaps into place. See Figure 3-12. 8 Replace the heat sink. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139. 9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 10 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 11 Press to enter the System Setup and check that the processor information matches the new system configuration. System Memory Each system board has 16 memory module sockets for the installation of DDR3 unbuffered ECC DIMMs (ECC UDIMMs), registered DIMMs (RDIMMs), and load reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) to support processor 1 and processor 2. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of the memory modules. Memory Module Installation Guidelines Follow these guidelines when installing memory modules on the sled system board. • Use only Dell approved R/LR/UDIMM DDR3 memory modules in 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, and 32 GB capacities. DIMM types (R/LR/UDIMM) cannot be mixed. • DIMM slots are numbered 1 to 8 and designated by two channels. The number of channels used and the allowable configuration depend on the memory mode selected in the System Setup program. • DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM socket farthest from the processor, per Table 3-2. • Memory optimized mode is supported on the sled system board.144 Installing System Components • Memory sparing and memory mirroring are supported on the sled system board. Memory sparing requires that all the DIMMs are identically populated in all 4 channels. One channel will be the spare and not accessible as system memory until brought online to replace a failing channel. For memory mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors for each other, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both channels. Supported DIMM Configuration For the sequence of the 16 DIMM sockets, see Figure 3-13. When you insert the DIMM(s), always start with DIMM_A1. For single processor configurations, the optimized memory module installation sequence is A1/A2/A3/A4/A5/A6/A7/A8. See Table 3-2 for dual processor configurations. Figure 3-13. Memory Slot Locations 1 DIMM_A3 2 DIMM_A7 3 DIMM_A4 4 DIMM_A8 5 DIMM_B1 6 DIMM_B5 7 DIMM_B2 8 DIMM_B6 9 DIMM_B8 10 DIMM_B4 11 DIMM_B7 12 DIMM_B3 13 DIMM_A6 14 DIMM_ A2 15 DIMM_A5 16 DIMM_A1Installing System Components 145 NOTE: An empty DIMM socket is marked as "  ". For best performance, all the memory modules installed must be of the same speed, capacity, and from the same manufacturer. Table 3-2. Memory Module Configuration—Single Processor DIMM QTY Processor 1 Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 1         2         3         4         6         8         Table 3-3. Memory Module Configuration—Dual Processors DIMM QTY Processor 1 Processor 2 Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 B1 B5 B2 B6 B3 B7 B4 B8 2                 6                 8                 12                 16                146 Installing System Components Removing Memory Modules CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. WARNING: The memory modules are hot to the touch for some time after the system has been powered down. Allow time for the memory modules to cool before handling them. Handle the memory modules by the card edges and avoid touching the components on the memory module. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 3 Locate the memory module sockets. See Figure 3-14. CAUTION: Handle each memory module only on either card edge, making sure not to touch the middle of the memory module. To avoid damaging components on the memory module, remove only one memory module at a time. 4 Simultaneously press down and out on the ejectors at both ends of the memory module socket until the module is released from the socket. See Figure 3-14. 5 Lift the module out of the socket. See Figure 3-14. Figure 3-14. Removing a Memory Module 1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)Installing System Components 147 Installing Memory Modules 1 Press down and out on the ejectors on each end of the memory module socket. See Figure 3-15. 2 Align the memory module correctly with the alignment key of the memory module socket. See Figure 3-15. 3 Press down firmly on the memory module with your thumbs until the module snaps into place. See Figure 3-15. CAUTION: Even pressure during insertion must be applied at both ends of the module simultaneously to prevent damage to the socket. No pressure should be applied to the center of the module. Complete the latching of the module into the socket by applying inward pressure to the socket ejectors to assure that the ejectors are in a locked position. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the ejectors on the memory module socket align with the ejectors on other identical sockets that have memory modules installed. Figure 3-15. Installing a Memory Module 1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2) 3 alignment key148 Installing System Components 4 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Expansion Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. The sled supports a low-profile PCIe x16 expansion card installed in the expansion card riser. To locate the expansion card riser, see Figure 3-17. Removing the Expansion Card 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Once the front cover is detached, turn it over to expose the expansion card side. See Figure 3-16. 4 Remove the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16. 5 Grasp the expansion card by its edges and carefully remove it from the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-16. 6 If you are removing the card permanently, install a metal filler bracket over the empty expansion slot opening, and secure with the screw. NOTE: You must install a filler bracket over an empty expansion slot to maintain Federal Communications Commission (FCC) certification of the system. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of the system and aid in proper cooling and airflow inside the sled.Installing System Components 149 Figure 3-16. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Installing the Expansion Card CAUTION: Expansion cards can only be installed in the slots on the expansion card riser. Do not attempt to install expansion cards directly into the riser connector on the system board. 1 Unpack the expansion card and prepare it for installation. For instructions, see the documentation accompanying the card. 2 Hold the card by its edges, position the card so that the card edge connector aligns with the expansion card riser connector on the front cover. See Figure 3-16. 3 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the riser connector until the card is fully seated. 4 Replace the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16. 5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 expansion card 2 screw150 Installing System Components Expansion Card Riser CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. Removing the Expansion Card Riser 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the expansion card. See "Removing the Expansion Card" on page 148. 4 Remove the two screws securing the expansion card riser to the front cover. See Figure 3-17. 5 Pull the expansion card riser away from the front cover. See Figure 3-17. Figure 3-17. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Riser 1 screws (2) 2 expansion card riserInstalling System Components 151 Installing the Expansion Card Riser 1 Place the expansion card riser into the front cover. See Figure 3-17. 2 Replace the two screws securing the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-17. 3 Replace the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Mezzanine Cards The sled supports a variety of optional mezzanine cards. • Mellanox QDR ConnectX-2 Infiniband mezzanine card • Mellanox FDR ConnectX-3 Infiniband mezzanine card • Intel 82599 dual-port 10 GbE mezzanine card Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. The installation and removal procedures of the dual-port and single port Infiniband mezzanine cards are similar. Following is an example showing the replacement procedure of a dual-port Infiniband mezzanine card. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18. 4 Lift the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.152 Installing System Components Figure 3-18. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Assembly 5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-19. 6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See Figure 3-19. 1 screws (2) 2 Infiniband mezzanine card assemblyInstalling System Components 153 Figure 3-19. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board 7 Remove the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 8 Remove the Infiniband mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board 3 bracket 1 2 3154 Installing System Components Figure 3-20. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the Infiniband mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 2 Replace the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the Infiniband mezzanine card. See Figure 3-19. 4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-19. 5 Lower the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. 1 Infiniband mezzanine card 2 screws (3) 2 1Installing System Components 155 6 Replace the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18. 7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 4 Lift the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Assembly 156 Installing System Components 5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-22. 6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See Figure 3-22. Figure 3-22. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board 7 Remove the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 8 Remove the 10 GbE mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 1 screws (2) 2 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly 1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board 3 10 GbE mezzanine card 1 2 3Installing System Components 157 Figure 3-23. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the 10 GbE mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 2 Replace the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the 10 GbE mezzanine card. See Figure 3-22. 1 10 GbE mezzanine card 2 screw (3) 3 mezzanine card bridge board connector 4 SFP + port 1 5 SFP + port 0 2 1 4 3 5158 Installing System Components 4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-22. 5 Lower the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 6 Replace the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. SD Card Reader Removing the SD Card Reader CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155. 4 If installed, remove the SD card. Locate the SD card slot in the SD card reader and press inward on the card to release it from the slot and remove the card. See Figure 3-24.Installing System Components 159 Figure 3-24. Removing and Installing the SD Card 5 Disconnect the SD card reader cable from the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 6 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 7 Lift the SD card reader from the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-25. 1 SD card 2 SD card slot 1 2160 Installing System Components Figure 3-25. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Installing the SD Card Reader CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Place the SD card reader on the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-25. 2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 3 Connect the SD card reader cable to the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 4 If applicable, install the SD card. Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right and press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-24. 1 SD card reader cable 2 screws (2) 3 SD card slot 4 SD card reader 5 SD card reader connectorInstalling System Components 161 5 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 6 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 7 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155 or "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151. 4 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on page 158. 5 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-26. 6 Lift the support bracket out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-26. Figure 3-26. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 screws (2) 2 SD card reader support bracket162 Installing System Components Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 Align the SD card reader support bracket with the screw holes on the sled tray. See Figure 3-26. 2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-26. 3 Replace the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on page 160. 4 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Internal Hard-Drives The sled supports up to two 2.5-inch hard-drives attached internally to the sled tray. Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration is not supported. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Loosen the thumbscrew securing the hard-drive carrier to the hard-drive bracket. See Figure 3-27. 4 Slide and lift the hard-drive carrier out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-27.Installing System Components 163 Figure 3-27. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration is not supported. 1 Place the hard-drive carrier into the sled tray and slide into place. See Figure 3-27. 2 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the hard-drive carrier in place. See Figure 3-27. 3 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 4 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 thumbscrew 2 hard-drive carrier164 Installing System Components Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28. 2 Lift the hard-drive out of the hard-drive carrier. See Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive from the Hard-Drive Carrier 1 hard-drive 2 hard-drive carrier 3 screws (4)Installing System Components 165 Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the hard-drive carrier with the new hard-drive screw holes. See Figure 3-28. 2 Replace the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28. Removing the Hard-Drive Tray CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the three screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29. 5 Lift the hard-drive tray at an angle and slide the standoff holes on the hard-drive tray out of the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29.166 Installing System Components Figure 3-29. Removing and Installing the Hard-Drive Tray Installing the Hard-Drive Tray CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Insert the sled tray’s standoff holes into the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29. 2 Replace the two screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29. 3 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 4 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (3) 2 hard-drive tray 3 hard-drive tray standoff holes (2)Installing System Components 167 Interposer Extender Removing the Interposer Extender CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 5 Press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the interposer extender. See Figure 3-30. 6 Remove the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray. See Figure 3-30. 7 Grasp the interposer extender by its edges and carefully remove it from the system board connector. 8 Lift the interposer extender out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-30.168 Installing System Components Figure 3-30. Removing and Installing the Interposer Extender Installing the Interposer Extender CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Hold the card by its edges, position the interposer extender so that the edge connector aligns with the system board connector. See Figure 3-30. 2 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the system board connector until the card is fully seated. 3 Replace the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray. See Figure 3-30. 4 Connect the power cable to the interposer extender. Press down on the locking tab to secure the power cable. See Figure 3-30. 1 screws (2) 2 interposer extender 3 power cableInstalling System Components 169 5 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 6 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 7 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Node Power Distribution Board Removing the Node Power Distribution Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 5 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender" on page 167. 6 Disconnect all cables from the node power distribution board (NPDB). See Figure 3-31. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. Note the routing of the cable on the sled as you remove them from the sled tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped. 7 Remove the four screws securing the NPDB to the sled tray. See Figure 3-31. 8 Lift the NPDB out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-31.170 Installing System Components Figure 3-31. Removing and Installing the Node Power Distribution Board Installing the Node Power Distribution Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Insert the new power distribution board into the right retaining clip at a 45-degree angle, and then press the other end of the board down into the left retaining clip to secure the board in place. Make sure to align the new power distribution board with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-31. 2 Replace the four screws securing the NPDB. See Figure 3-31. 3 Connect all cables to the NPDB. See Figure 3-31. 1 power cable 2 front panel cable 3 screws (4) 4 management cable 5 node power distribution boardInstalling System Components 171 4 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. 5 Replace the interposer extender. See "Installing the Interposer Extender" on page 168. 6 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 7 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 8 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 9 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. System Battery Removing the System Battery WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Locate the battery socket on the system board. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the battery connector, you must firmly support the connector while installing or removing a battery. 4 Press the "-" side of the battery outward to allow the battery to pop out from the socket. 5 Lift the battery out of the connector. See Figure 3-32.172 Installing System Components Figure 3-32. Removing and Installing the System Battery Installing the System Battery WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Hold the new battery with the "+" facing the retention clip on the battery connector. See Figure 3-32. 2 Insert the "-" side of the battery then push the positive side 3 Gently pull the retention clip towards the positive side of the connector and slide the battery into the connector until the retention clip snaps into place. See Figure 3-32. 4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 6 Reconnect the system to the electrical outlet and turn the system on, including any attached peripherals. 1 system battery 2 connectorInstalling System Components 173 7 Enter the System Setup program to confirm that the battery is operating properly. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 8 Enter the correct time and date in the System Setup program's Time and Date fields. 9 Exit the System Setup program. System Board Removing the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 4 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 5 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137. 6 Remove the processor. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140. 7 Remove the memory modules. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146. 8 If installed, remove the SAS mezzanine card, Infiniband mezzanine card, or 10 GbE mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155. 9 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on page 158. 10 Remove the SD card reader support bracket. See "Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket" on page 161. 11 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.174 Installing System Components 12 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 13 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender" on page 167. 14 Remove the node power distribution board. See "Removing the Node Power Distribution Board" on page 169. 15 Disconnect all cables from the system board. See Figure 3-33. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. See Figure 3-33. Note the routing of the cables as you remove it from the sled tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped. Figure 3-33. Removing and Installing the Cables 16 Remove the six screws securing the system board. See Figure 3-34. 1 management cable 2 power cable 3 front panel cableInstalling System Components 175 17 Grasp the system board by the edges and lift the system board out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. Figure 3-34. Removing the System Board Installing the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Unpack the new system board. 2 Holding the system board by the edges, slide the system board into the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. 3 Replace the six screws securing the system board to the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. 4 Connect all cables to the system board. See Figure 3-33. 1 screws (6) 2 system board 1 2176 Installing System Components 5 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. 6 Install the node power distribution board. See "Installing the Node Power Distribution Board" on page 170. 7 Install the interposer extender to the new board. See "Installing the Interposer Extender" on page 168. 8 Install the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 9 Install the hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 10 Install the SD card reader support bracket. See "Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket" on page 162. 11 Install the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on page 160. 12 Transfer the processors to the new system board. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140 and "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 13 Remove the memory modules and transfer them to the same locations on the new board. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 14 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 15 If applicable, install the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 16 Install the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 17 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 18 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 19 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.Troubleshooting 177 4 Troubleshooting Safety First—For You and Your System WARNING: Whenever you need to lift the system, get others to assist you. To avoid injury, do not attempt to lift the system by yourself. WARNING: Before removing the system cover, disconnect all power, then unplug the AC power cord, and then disconnect all peripherals, and all LAN lines. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. Installation Problems Perform the following checks if you are troubleshooting an installation problem: • Check all cable and power connections (including all rack cable connections). • Unplug the power cord and wait for one minute. Then reconnect the power cord and try again. • If the network is reporting an error, verify that the system has enough memory and disk space. • Remove all added peripherals, one at a time, and try to turn on the system. If after removing a peripheral the system works, it may be a problem with the peripheral or a configuration problem between the peripheral and the system. Contact the peripheral vendor for assistance.178 Troubleshooting • If the system does not power on, check the LED display. If the power LED is not on, you may not be receiving AC power. Check the AC power cord to make sure that it is securely connected. Troubleshooting System Startup Failure If your system halts during startup, especially after installing an operating system or reconfiguring your system’s hardware, check for invalid memory configurations. These could cause the system to halt at startup without any video output. For all other startup issues, note any system messages that appear onscreen. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45 for more information. Troubleshooting External Connections Ensure that all external cables are securely attached to the external connectors on your sled before troubleshooting any external devices. See Figure 1-1 for the front-panel connectors on the sled. Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem 1 Check the sled and power connections to the monitor. 2 Check the video interface cabling from the sled to the monitor. Troubleshooting a USB Device Use the following steps to troubleshoot a USB keyboard and/or mouse. For other USB devices, go to step 5. 1 Ensure that the sled is turned on. 2 Disconnect the keyboard and mouse cables from the sled briefly and reconnect them. 3 If the problem is resolved, restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and check if the nonfunctioning USB ports are enabled. 4 Swap the keyboard/mouse with a known-working keyboard/mouse. 5 If another sled is installed, connect the USB device to the sled. If the USB device works with a different sled, the first sled may be faulty. Troubleshooting 179 If the problem is resolved, replace the faulty keyboard/mouse. If the problem is not resolved, proceed to the next step to begin troubleshooting the other USB devices attached to the system. a Power down all attached USB devices and disconnect them from the sled. b Restart the sled and, if your keyboard is functioning, enter the System Setup program. Verify that all USB ports are enabled. See "USB Configuration" on page 77. c If your keyboard is not functioning, you can also use remote access. If the system is not accessible, see "System Board Jumper Settings" on page 195 for instructions on setting the NVRAM Clear jumper inside your system and restoring the BIOS to the default settings. d Reconnect and turn on each USB device one at a time. 6 If a device causes the same problem, power down the device, replace the USB cable, and power up the device. If the problem persists, replace the device. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device 1 Turn off the sled and any peripheral devices connected to the serial port. 2 Swap the serial interface cable with another working cable, and turn on the sled and the serial device. If the problem is resolved, replace the interface cable. 3 Turn off the sled and the serial device, and swap the device with a comparable device. 4 Turn on the sled and the serial device. If the problem is resolved, replace the serial device. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.180 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting a NIC 1 Restart the sled and check for any system messages pertaining to the NIC controller. 2 Check the appropriate indicator on the NIC connector. See "NIC Indicator Codes" on page 14. • If the link indicator does not light, check all cable connections. • If the activity indicator does not light, the network driver files might be damaged or missing. • Remove and reinstall the drivers if applicable. See the NIC's documentation. • Change the auto-negotiation setting, if possible. • Use another connector on the switch or hub. If you are using a NIC card instead of an integrated NIC, see the documentation for the NIC card. 3 Ensure that the appropriate drivers are installed and the protocols are bound. See the NIC's documentation. 4 Enter the System Setup program and confirm that the NIC ports are enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 5 Ensure that the NICs, hubs, and switches on the network are all set to the same data transmission speed. See the documentation for each network device. 6 Ensure that all network cables are of the proper type and do not exceed the maximum length. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.Troubleshooting 181 Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals 2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU. CAUTION: Wait until all of the indicators on the power supplies turn off before proceeding. 3 Remove all sleds from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 4 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 5 Disassemble components from the sled. See "Installing System Components" on page 125. • Hard-drives • Cooling shroud • Processors and heat sinks • Memory modules • Expansion card • Mezzanine card • Interposer extender • Node power distribution board • SD card reader 6 Remove all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 7 Let the sled dry thoroughly for at least 24 hours. 8 Reinstall all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 9 Reinstall all sled components you removed in step 5. 10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.182 Troubleshooting 11 Reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 12 Reconnect the server enclosure to the electrical outlet or the PDU. 13 Turn on the sleds and attached peripherals. 14 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals. 2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU. 3 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the enclosure: • Power sleds • Fan modules • Sleds 4 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the sled: • SD card reader • Node power distribution board • Interposer extender • Mezzanine card • Expansion card • Memory modules • Processors and heat sinks • Cooling shroud • Hard-drives 5 Ensure that all cables are properly connected. 6 Ensure that all components are properly installed and free of damage. Troubleshooting 183 7 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: The fan modules are hot-swappable. Remove and replace only one fan module at a time in the server enclosure that is turned on. Operating the system without all three fan modules for extended periods of time can cause the system to overheat. Review the following table before you begin to replace the fan modules. Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled Fan Module Status BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/Fail Fan module normal/OK PID, Chassis ambient curve A, Exhaust temperature control curve A PID, 80% PWM Chassis ambient curve B, Exhaust temperature control curve A 100% PWM One fan module fails PID, Chassis ambient curve C, Exhaust temperature control curve B 100% PWM 100% PWM Exhaust temperature control curve B 100% PWM System throttling184 Troubleshooting 1 Locate the faulty fan in the back of the enclosure. Each fan module has indicators that identify a faulty fan. 2 Remove the enclosure fan module. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 3 Examine the blades for debris. If debris is present, carefully remove it. 4 Reseat the faulty fan. See the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware’s Owner Manual for more information. 5 If none of the fan indicators show a fault LED and the blades do not power on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. 6 If the problem is not resolved, install a new fan. 7 If the new fan does not operate, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Two fan modules fail After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down Three fan modules fail System force shutdown System force shutdown System force shutdown System force shutdown Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled Fan Module Status BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/FailTroubleshooting 185 Troubleshooting the Power Sled CAUTION: Remove and replace one PSU module at a time. Leave a failed PSU module installed in the power sled until you are ready to replace it. Operating the system with a power sled removed for extended periods of time can cause the system to overheat. NOTE: The 1400 W power supply module in the power sled require a 200-240 V power source to operate. 1 Locate the power sled to be removed or the power sled that contains the failed PSU module. The PSU module’s status indicator will either light up green or amber. If the PSU module is faulty the status indicator lights up amber. 2 Replace the faulty PSU module in the power sled. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. NOTE: After installing a power sled with a new PSU module, allow several seconds for the system to recognize the power supply and to determine if it is working properly. The status indicator turns green to signify that the module is functioning properly. If none of the PSU modules show a fault LED and the sleds do not power on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. See Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide for more information. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting System Memory CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: Invalid memory configurations can cause your system to halt at startup without video output. See "System Memory" on page 143 and verify that your memory configuration complies with all applicable guidelines. 1 If the system is not operational, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 186 Troubleshooting 2 After 10 seconds, turn on the sled and attached peripherals and note the messages on the screen. Go to step 13 if an error message appears indicating a fault with a specific memory module. 3 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings. See "Main Menu" on page 52. Make any changes to the memory settings, if needed. If the memory settings match the installed memory but a problem is still indicated, go to step 13. 4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 6 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 7 Check the memory channels and ensure that they are populated correctly. See "Supported DIMM Configuration" on page 144. 8 Reseat the memory modules in their sockets. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 10 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 11 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 12 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings. See "Main Menu" on page 52. If the problem is not resolved, proceed with the next step. 13 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 14 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 15 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 16 If a diagnostic test or error message indicates a specific memory module as faulty, swap or replace the module.Troubleshooting 187 17 To troubleshoot an unspecified faulty memory module, replace the memory module in the first DIMM socket with a module of the same type and capacity. See "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 18 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 19 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 20 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 21 As the system boots, observe any error message that appears and the diagnostic indicators on the front of the system. 22 If the memory problem is still indicated, repeat step 13 through step 21 for each memory module installed. 23 If the problem persists after all memory modules have been checked, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: This troubleshooting procedure can destroy data stored on the hard-drive. Before you proceed, back up all files on the hard-drive. 1 If your sled has a RAID controller and your hard-drives are configured in a RAID array, perform the following steps: a Restart the sled and enter the host adapter configuration utility program by pressing for a RAID controller or for a SAS mezzanine card. See the documentation supplied with the host adapter for information about the configuration utility. b Ensure that the hard-drive(s) have been configured correctly for the RAID array. c Take the hard-drive offline and reseat the drive. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.188 Troubleshooting d Exit the configuration utility and allow the system to boot to the operating system. 2 Ensure that the required device drivers for your controller card are installed and are configured correctly. See the operating system documentation for more information. 3 Restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and verify that the controller is enabled and the drives appear in the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Storage Controller NOTE: When troubleshooting a SAS RAID controller, also see the documentation for your operating system and the controller. 1 Enter the System Setup program and ensure that the SAS controller is enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 2 Restart the sled and press the applicable key sequence to enter the configuration utility program. • for a LSI SAS 2008 mezzanine card • for a LSI 9265-8i SAS RAID Card See the controller’s documentation for information about configuration settings. 3 Check the configuration settings, make any necessary corrections, and restart the system. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 6 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.Troubleshooting 189 7 Ensure that the controller card is firmly seated into the system board connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 8 If you have a battery-cached SAS RAID controller, ensure that the RAID battery is properly connected and, if applicable, the memory module on the RAID card is properly seated. 9 Ensure that the cables are firmly connected to the storage controller. 10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 11 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 12 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 13 If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting Expansion Cards NOTE: When troubleshooting an expansion card, see the documentation for your operating system and the expansion card. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 2 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 3 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 4 Ensure that each expansion card is firmly seated in its connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 6 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 7 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 8 If the problem is not resolved, see "Getting Help" on page 203.190 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Processors CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 2 Remove the sled from the server enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 3 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 4 Ensure that each heat sink is properly installed. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139. 5 Ensure that each processor is properly installed. See "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 6 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 7 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 8 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 9 If the problem persists, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 10 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 11 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 12 Remove processor 2. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140. 13 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 14 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 15 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. If the problem persists, the processor is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203. 16 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.Troubleshooting 191 17 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 18 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 19 Replace processor 1 with processor 2. See "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 20 Repeat step 13 through step 16. If you have tested both the processors and the problem persists, the system board is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 3 Locate the NVRAM clear jumper on the system board. 4 Clear the NVRAM. 5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 6 If there is still a problem with the compute sled, remove and reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.192 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the System Battery NOTE: If the system is turned off for long periods of time (for weeks or months), the NVRAM may lose its system configuration information. This situation is caused by a defective battery. 1 Re-enter the time and date through the System Setup program. See "System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46. 2 Turn off the sled and remove it from the enclosure for at least one hour. 3 Reconnect the sled to the server enclosure and turn on the sled. 4 Enter the System Setup program. If the date and time are not correct in the System Setup program, replace the battery. See "Removing the System Battery" on page 171. CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. If the problem is not resolved by replacing the battery, see "Getting Help" on page 203. NOTE: Some software may cause the system time to speed up or slow down. If the system seems to operate normally except for the time kept in the System Setup program, the problem may be caused by software rather than by a defective battery.Troubleshooting 193 IRQ Assignment Conflicts Most PCI devices can share an IRQ with another device, but they cannot use an IRQ simultaneously. To avoid this type of conflict, see the documentation for each PCI device for specific IRQ requirements. PCI IRQ pool definition is the BIOS code assigned at run time. IRQ Line Assignment IRQ Line Assignment IRQ0 8254 timer IRQ8 Real-time clock IRQ1 Keyboard controller IRQ9 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ2 Cascade for IRQ9 IRQ10 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ3 Default for COM2 IRQ11 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ4 Default for COM1 IRQ12 Mouse controller IRQ5 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ13 Processor IRQ6 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ14 Primary IDE controller IRQ7 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ15 Secondary IDE controller194 TroubleshootingJumpers and Connectors 195 5 Jumpers and Connectors This section provides specific information about the system jumpers. It also provides some basic information on jumpers and switches and describes the connectors on the various boards in the system. System Board Jumper Settings Figure 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Item Jumper Setting Description 1 Service mode (default) The flash security setting is enabled. The flash security and NVRAM clear signal is disabled.196 Jumpers and Connectors 2 NVRAM clear (default) The configuration settings are retained at system boot. The configuration settings are cleared at the next system boot. 3 ME firmware recovery (default) The ME firmware recovery jumper is disabled. The ME firmware recovery jumper enables ME firmware recovery mode. 4 BIOS recovery (default) The BIOS recovery jumper is disabled. The BIOS recovery jumper enables the BIOS flash memory special recovery mode. 5 Password enable (default) The password feature is enabled. The password feature is disabled. 6 Power button pass (default) The BMC triggers a power button signal. The power button passthrough signal is triggered. Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Item Jumper Setting DescriptionJumpers and Connectors 197 System Board Connectors Figure 5-2. System Board Connectors 1 USB connectors (2) 2 PCIe x8 mezzanine slot 3 SD card reader (internal USB) connector 4 internal SAS mezzanine slot 5 mini-SAS connector 0 6 onboard SATA connector 4 7 onboard SATA connector 5 8 system battery 9 DIMM sockets for processor 1 DIMMA3 socket DIMMA4 socket DIMMA7 socket DIMMA8 socket 10 processor 1 11 DIMM sockets for processor 2 DIMMB1 socket DIMMB2 socket DIMMB5 socket DIMMB6 socket 12 main power connector 13 internal hard-drive interposer 14 SGPIO connector 2 15 internal serial connector 16 front panel connector 1 17 PCIe x16 back GPGPU 18 processor 2198 Jumpers and Connectors 19 DIMM sockets for processor 2 DIMMB3 socket DIMMB4 socket DIMMB7 socket DIMMB3 socket 20 DIMM sockets for processor 1 DIMMA1 socket DIMMA2 socket DIMMA5 socket DIMMA6 socket 21 LAN LED connector 22 PCIe x16 slot 1 23 PCIe x16 slot 2 24 SGPIO connector 1 25 power button/power-on indicator 26 VGA connector 27 serial connector 28 internal BMC serial console connector 29 BMC management port 30 consolidated BMC cable connector 31 NIC2 connector (RJ45) 32 NIC1 connector (RJ45) 33 system identification indicatorJumpers and Connectors 199 Interposer Extender Connectors Figure 5-3. Interposer Extender Connectors 1 SATA connector 4 2 2-pin power connector 3 SATA connector 5 4 IPMB connector 5 SGPIO connector 6 SATA connector 0 7 SATA connector 1 8 SATA connector 2 9 SATA connector 3200 Jumpers and Connectors SD Card Reader Connectors Figure 5-4. SD Card Reader Connectors 1 SD card reader cable connector 2 SD card connectorJumpers and Connectors 201 Node Power Distribution Board Connectors Figure 5-5. Node Power Distribution Board Connectors 1 power/throttle connector 2 I2C connector 3 12V S2 power connector 4 HDD1 power connector 5 power connector 6 HDD3 power connector 7 HDD2 power connector 8 system board power connector 9 12 V S1 power connector 10 remote sensor connector 11 hard-drive LED indicator connector 12 system board control connector 13 LAN pass-through connector 202 Jumpers and ConnectorsGetting Help 203 6 Getting Help Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1 Visit support.dell.com. 2 Click your country/region at the bottom of the page. For a full listing of country/region, click All. 3 Click All Support from Support menu. 4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. 5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.204 Getting HelpFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 205 Index A about your system, 11 B back cover installing, 135 removing, 134 C command line interfaces, 90 connectors system board, 197 console redirection configuring, 47 cooling shroud installing, 136 removing, 135 D Dell contacting, 203 E Ethernet mezzanine card installing, 157 removing, 155-157 expansion card installing, 149 removing, 148 expansion card riser installing, 151 removing, 150 F features front panel, 12 front cover installing, 133 removing, 132 H hard-drive installing, 165 removing, 164 hard-drive carrier installing, 163 removing, 162FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm 206 Index hard-drive tray installing, 166 removing, 165 heat sink installing, 139 removing, 137 I indicator front panel, 12 NIC, 14 power, 13 system identity, 13 indicator codes power and system board, 16 Infiniband mezzanine card installing, 154 removing, 151-154 installing back cover, 135 cooling shroud, 136 Ethernet mezzanine card, 157 expansion card, 149 expansion card riser, 151 front cover, 133 hard-drive, 165 hard-drive carrier, 163 hard-drive tray, 166 heat sink, 139 Infiniband mezzanine card, 154 interposer extender, 168 memory modules, 147 NPDB, 170 processor, 142-143 SD card, 132 SD card reader, 160-161 SD card reader bracket, 162 sled, 130 sled blank, 131 system battery, 172 system board, 175 interposer extender installing, 168 removing, 167 IPMI command list, 113 M memory modules (DIMMs) configuration, 144-145 installation guidelines, 143 installing, 147 removing, 146 N NPDB installing, 170 removing, 169FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 207 P POST error codes, 19 power management settings, 122 processor installing, 142-143 removing, 140-141 R removing back cover, 134 cooling shroud, 135 Ethernet mezzanine card, 155-157 expansion card, 148 expansion card riser, 150 front cover, 132 hard- drive carrier, 162 hard-drive, 164 hard-drive tray, 165 heat sink, 137 Infiniband mezzanine card, 151-154 interposer extender, 167 memory modules, 146 NPDB, 169 processor, 140-141 SD card, 131 SD card reader, 158-160 SD card reader bracket, 161 sled, 129 sled blank, 130 system battery, 171 system board, 173 S safety, 177 SD card installing, 132 removing, 131 SD card reader installing, 160-161 removing, 158, 160 SD card reader bracket installing, 162 removing, 161 service tag, 18 sled front features, 12 installing, 130 removing, 129 sled blank installing, 131 removing, 130 sled front features, 12 system battery installing, 172 removing, 171 system board connectors, 197 installing, 175 jumper settings, 195 removing, 173 system features accessing, 11 System log See system setup screenFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 208 system sensor overview, 38 system setup active state power management configuration, 75 BMC LAN configuration, 82 chassis power management, 58 chassis PSU configuration, 59 CPU configuration, 62 embedded network devices, 72 emergency throttling, 61 memory configuration, 65 PCI configuration, 70 PCI slot configuration, 76 power capping, 60 power management, 56 prefetch configuration, 64 remote access configuration, 83 SATA configuration, 67 security settings, 78 USB configuration, 77 system setup program entering, 46 general help, 47 system setup menu, 45 system setup screen advanced, 55 boot, 86 exit, 88 main, 52 security, 78 server, 80 T troubleshooting damaged enclosure, 182 enclosure fan modules, 183 expansion cards, 189 external connections, 178 hard-drive, 187 power sled, 185 processors, 190 RTC battery, 192 serial device, 179 storage controller, 188 system board, 191 system memory, 185 USB device, 178 video, 178 wet enclosure, 181 Dell 2145cn Multifunktionsprinter Brugerhåndbog www.dell.com | support.dell.com2 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt Din nye maskine er udstyret med et antal specielle funktioner, der forbedrer kvaliteten af de dokumenter, du udskriver. Med denne maskine kan du: Udskrive i enestående kvalitet og med høj hastighed • Du kan udskrive i et fuldt farveområde med cyan, magenta, gul og sort. • Du kan skrive ud med en opløsning på op til 2.400 x 600 dpi. Se Softwareafsnit. • Maskinen kan udskrive på papir i A4-format med en hastighed på op til 20 sider pr. minut og på papir i Letterformat med en hastighed på op til 21 sider pr. minut. Håndtere mange forskellige typer printbart materiale • Universalbakken understøtter brevhoved, konvolutter, etiketter, medier i brugerdefinerede størrelser, postkort og kraftigt papir. Universalbakken kan rumme op til 100 ark almindeligt papir. • Bakke 1 til 250 ark og den ekstra bakke til 500 ark understøtter almindeligt papir i forskellige størrelser. Udarbejde professionelle dokumenter • Udskriv vandmærker. Du kan tilpasse dine dokumenter med ord, som f.eks. ”Fortroligt”. Se Softwareafsnit. • Udskrive plakater. Teksten og billederne på hver side i dokumentet forstørres og udskrives på tværs af arkene, som derefter kan limes sammen til en plakat. Se Softwareafsnit. • Du kan udskrive fortrykte formularer og brevpapir på almindeligt papir. Se Softwareafsnit. Spare tid og penge • Du kan udskrive flere sider på et enkelt ark og derved spare papir. • Maskinen sparer strøm, fordi strømforbruget nedsættes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug. • Du kan spare papir ved at udskrive på begge sider af papiret (dobbeltsidet udskrivning). Se Softwareafsnit. Udvide maskinens kapacitet • Maskinen har et ekstra hukommelsesstik til udvidelse af hukommelsen (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85). • Zoran IPS Emulation* kompatibel med PostScript 3 (PS) aktiverer PS-udskrivning. . Udskrive i forskellige miljøer • Du kan udskrive fra Windows 2000 og Windows XP/2003/ 2008/Vista samt fra Linux- og Macintosh-systemer. • Maskinen er udstyret med et USB-interface og et netværks interface. Kopiere originaler i flere formater • Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt side. • Der er specielle funktioner til at slette katalog- og avisbaggrund. • Udskriftskvaliteten og billedstørrelsen kan justeres og forbedres samtidigt. Scanne originalerne og sende dem med det samme • Scanne i farver og bruge den præcise komprimering i form af JPEG-, TIFF- og PDF-formaterne. • Scanne og hurtigt sende filer til flere destinationer ved brug af netværksscanning. Angive et bestemt tidspunkt for overførsel af en fax (ekstraudstyr) • Du kan angive et bestemt tidspunkt at sende en fax og du kan også sende faxen til flere gemte destinationer. • Efter overførslen kan maskinen udskrive faxrapporter i henhold til indstillingen. * Zoran IPS Emulation kompatibel med PostScript 3 © Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes. Zoran, Zoran-logoet, IPS/PS3 og OneImage er varemærker, der tilhører Zoran Corporation. * 136 PS3-skrifttyper Omfatter UFST og MicroType fra Monotype Imaging Inc. SPECIALFUNKTIONERFunktioner i dit nye laserprodukt | 3 FUNKTIONER PR. MODEL Maskinen er udviklet til at understøtte alle dine dokumentbehov – fra udskrivning og kopiering til mere avancerede netværksløsninger til din virksomhed. Basisfunktionerne i denne maskine omfatter følgende: ( : inkluderet, O: ekstraudstyr) OM DENNE BRUGERVEJLEDNING Denne brugervejledning indeholder oplysninger om maskinens grundlæggende funktionalitet samt en detaljeret forklaring på hvert trin under anvendelsen. Både nye og øvede brugere kan bruge denne vejledning til installation og brug af maskinen. Nogle udtryk i denne vejledning bruges som synonymer, som beskrevet herunder: • Dokument betyder det samme som original. • Papir er synonymt med medie eller udskriftsmedie. Følgende tabel beskriver de konventioner, der anvendes i denne vejledning: FUNKTIONER Dell 2145cn USB 2.0 USB-hukommelsesgrænseflade DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) Harddisk (ekstraudstyr) O Kabelbaseret 10/100 Base TX lokalnetværk Duplex (2 sidet) udskrivning FAX KONVENTION BESKRIVELSE EKSEMPEL Fed Bruges til tekst på skærmen eller udtryk, der er trykt på maskinen. Start Bemærk Bruges til at angive yderligere oplysninger eller detaljerede specifikationer om maskinens funktionalitet og egenskaber. Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land. Forsigtig Bruges til at give brugerne oplysninger for at beskytte maskinen mod mulige mekaniske beskadigelser eller fejlfunktion. Berør ikke tonerpatronens grønne underside. Fodnote Bruges til at angive yderligere detaljerede oplysninger om bestemte ord eller udtryk. a. sider pr. minut (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger) Bruges til at føre brugere til referencesiden for yderligere oplysninger. (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger)4 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt FLERE OPLYSNINGER Du kan finde oplysninger om klargøring og brug af maskinen i de vejledninger og på det websted, der er angivet nedenfor. Du kan vælge at udskrive vejledningerne eller få dem vist på skærmen. Vejledning til hurtig installation Giver oplysninger om opsætning af maskinen, og dette kræver, at du følger instruktionerne i vejledningen for at forberede maskinen. Onlinebrugervejledning Indeholder trinvise beskrivelser af, hvordan du bruger alle maskinens funktioner. Desuden kan du se, hvordan maskinen skal vedligeholdes, og hvordan du løser problemer og installerer tilbehør. Denne brugervejledning indeholder også Softwareafsnit for at give dig oplysninger om, hvordan du udskriver dokumenter med maskinen på forskellige operativsystemer, samt hvordan du bruger den medfølgende software. Du kan få adgang til brugervejledningen på andre sprog i mappen Manual på cd’en med printersoftware. Hjælp til printerdriveren Indeholder hjælp til printerdriverens egenskaber og vejledning om indstilling af udskrivningsegenskaber. Du åbner skærmbilledet med hjælp til printerdriveren ved at klikke på Hjælp i dialogboksen med Printeregenskaber. Dells websted Hvis du har adgang til internettet, kan du få hjælp og support, finde printerdrivere og vejledninger og få andre oplysninger på Dells websted: www.dell.com eller support.dell.com.Sikkerhedsoplysninger | 5 sikkerhedsoplysninger VIGTIGE FORSKRIFTER OG SIKKERHEDSOPLYSNINGER Betydningen af ikoner og skilte i denne brugerhåndbog: Disse advarselsskilte er anbragt for at forhindre, at du og andre kommer til skade. Følg dem udtrykkeligt. Når du har læst dette afsnit, skal du opbevare det et sikkert sted til fremtidig reference. ADVARSEL Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for alvorlig personskade eller dødsfald. FORSIGTIG Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for mindre personskade eller beskadigelse af genstande. FORSIGTIG Følg disse grundlæggende sikkerhedsforanstaltninger for at reducere risikoen for ild, eksplosion, elektrisk stød eller personskade. Forsøg IKKE at. Adskil IKKE. Berør IKKE. Følg udtrykkeligt retningslinjerne. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten. Kontroller, at maskinen er jordet for at forhindre elektrisk stød. Ring til servicecentret for at få hjælp. 1. Sørg for at gennemlæse og forstå alle instruktioner. 2. Brug sund fornuft ved betjening af elektrisk udstyr. 3. Følg alle advarsler og instruktioner på maskinen og i den medfølgende dokumentation. 4. Hvis en betjeningsinstruktion ser ud til at være i strid med sikkerhedsoplysningerne, skal du rette dig efter sikkerhedsoplysningerne. Du kan have misforstået instruktionen. Hvis du ikke kan finde en løsning på problemet, kan du rådføre dig med en salgs- eller servicerepræsentant. 5. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten og/eller telefonstikket, inden maskinen rengøres. Undgå brug af flydende rengøringsmidler eller midler på sprayflaske. Brug kun en fugtig klud til rengøring. 6. Maskinen må ikke placeres på en ustabil vogn, et ustabilt stativ eller bord. Den kan falde ned og forårsage alvorlig beskadigelse. 7. Maskinen må aldrig placeres på, i nærheden af eller over en radiator, et varmeapparat, airconditionanlæg eller en ventilationsåbning. 8. Placer ikke noget på strømledningen. Placer ikke maskinen, så ledningerne udsættes for unødigt slid ved, at andre træder på dem. 9. Stikkontakter og forlængerledninger må ikke overbelastes. Dette kan medføre reduceret ydelse og kan føre til fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. 10. Pas på, at kæledyr ikke tygger på strømledningen eller ledningerne til telefon eller pc. 11. Skub aldrig genstande ind i maskinen gennem kabinettet eller åbninger i kabinettet. De kan komme i kontakt med farlige, strømførende steder, og der kan opstå fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. Pas på ikke at spilde væske på eller ind i maskinen. 12. Reducer risikoen for elektrisk stød ved aldrig at skille maskinen ad. Bring maskinen til en kvalificeret servicetekniker, hvis reparation er påkrævet. Hvis dæksler åbnes eller fjernes, kan dette medføre fare for elektrisk stød eller andre farlige situationer. Ukorrekt samling af maskinen kan medføre elektrisk stød, når maskinen efterfølgende anvendes. 6 | Sikkerhedsoplysninger 13. Tag stikket fra maskinen ud af telefonstikket, pc’en og vægstikket, og overlad serviceopgaver til kvalificerede teknikere i følgende situationer: • Hvis nogen del af strømledningen, stikket eller tilslutningskablet beskadiges eller bliver slidt. • Hvis der er spildt væske i maskinen. • Hvis maskinen har været udsat for regn eller anden form for vand. • Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt, når instruktionerne er blevet fulgt. • Hvis maskinen er blevet tabt, eller kabinettet ser ud til at være beskadiget. • Hvis maskinens ydelse pludselig ændres mærkbart. 14. Juster kun indstillinger, som beskrives i brugervejledningen. Ukorrekt justering af andre indstillinger kan føre til beskadigelser, og det kan kræve omfattende reparation af kvalificerede serviceteknikere at få maskinen til at fungere normalt igen. 15. Undgå at anvende maskinen under tordenvejr. Der er en lille risiko for at få elektrisk stød fra lynnedslag. Træk om muligt stikkene til både lysnet og telefon ud, indtil tordenvejret er overstået. 16. Den strømledning, der følger med maskinen, bør anvendes, for at maskinen kan bruges på sikker vis. Hvis du bruger en ledning, der er længere end 2 m med en 110 V maskine, skal den være på 16 AWG a eller større. 17. Brug kun en telefonledning af typen 26 AWG eller større. 18. GEM DISSE INSTRUKTIONER. 19. Denne maskine kan kun benyttes i det land, hvor du har købt den (pga. forskellig spænding, frekvens, telekommunikationskonfiguration, etc.). a.AWG: American Wire GuageIndhold | 7 2 Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt 5 Sikkerhedsoplysninger INTRODUKTION 12 12 Oversigt over printeren 12 Set forfra 12 Set bagfra 13 Oversigt over kontrolpanelet 14 Status Indikatorernes betydning 14 Godkender status for tonerpatronen 15 Menuoversigt 16 Medfølgende software 16 Printerdriverfunktioner 16 Printerdriver 16 PostScript-driver SÅDAN KOMMER DU I GANG 17 17 Opsætning af hardwaren 17 Udskrivning af testside 17 Konfiguration af netværket 17 Supported network environments 18 Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen 18 Brug af programmet SetIP 18 Systemkrav 18 Microsoft® Windows® 18 Macintosh 19 Linux 19 Installation af softwaren 20 Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger 20 Højdejustering 20 Ændring af sprog i displayet 21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt 21 Ændring af tidsformatet 21 Ændring af standardfunktionen 21 Indstilling af lyde 21 Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet 22 Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene 22 Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob 22 Auto fortsæt 23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER OG UDSKRIFTSMEDIER 24 24 Ilægning af originaler 24 På scannerglaspladen 24 I DADF’en 25 Valg af udskriftsmedier 26 Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie 27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande 27 Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier 28 Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken 29 Placering af papir 29 Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke 29 Ilægning af papir i universalbakken 30 Justering af outputsupporten 30 Ved papir i Letter-størrelse 30 Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse 31 Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type indhold8 | Indhold indhold KOPIERING 32 32 Valg af papirbakke 32 Kopiering 32 Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi 32 Mørkhed 32 Originaltype 32 Formindsket eller forstørret kopi 33 Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne 33 Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering 33 Kopiering af ID-kort 33 Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner 33 Sortering 34 2- eller 4-op-kopiering 34 Plakatkopiering 34 Klonkopiering 34 Sletning af baggrundsbilleder 34 Bogkopiering 35 Margenskift 35 Slet kant 35 Justering af gråtone ved kopiering 35 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret 36 Indstilling af timeout for kopiering SCANNING 37 37 Grundlæggende om scanning 37 Scanning fra kontrolpanelet 37 Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager. 37 Scanning til programmer 38 Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse 38 Klargøring til netværksscanning 39 Scanning til e-mail 40 Scanning til en FTP-server 40 Scanning til en SMB-server 40 Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob 40 Ændring af standardscanningsindstillinger 40 Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse 41 Konfiguration af adressekartoteket 41 Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser 41 Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser 41 Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAP-serveren 41 Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket 41 Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket 42 Udskrivning af adressekartoteket 42 Scanning af begge sider af papiret GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING 43 43 Sådan udskriver du et dokument 43 Annullering af et udskriftsjob FAX 44 44 Afsendelse af en fax 44 Indstilling af faxhovedet 44 Justering af dokumentindstillinger 45 Automatisk afsendelse af en fax 45 Manuel afsendelse af en fax 45 Bekræftelse af en transmission 45 Automatisk genkaldIndhold | 9 indhold 45 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer 45 Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret 45 Modtagelse af en fax 45 Valg af papirbakke 45 Ændring af modtagetilstand 46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax 46 Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel 46 Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon 46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax 46 Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD 47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand 47 Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 47 Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen 47 Andre måder at faxe på 47 Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer 47 Afsendelse af en udskudt fax 48 Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax 48 Videresendelse af faxer 49 Faxopsætning 49 Ændring af faxindstillingerne 50 Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne 50 Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer 50 Oprettelse af et adressekartotek BRUG AF USB-FLASH-HUKOMMELSE 53 53 Om USB-hukommelse 53 Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 53 Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed 53 Scanning 54 Tilpasning af scanning til USB 54 Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed 54 Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed 54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data 54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data 54 Gendannelse af data 55 Håndtering af USB-hukommelse 55 Sletning af en billedfil 55 Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 55 Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus VEDLIGEHOLDELSE 56 56 Udskrivning af rapporter 56 Udskrivning af en rapport 56 Justering af farvekontrasten 57 Brug af Advarsel om lav toner 57 Sådan slettes hukommelsen 57 Rengøring af maskinen 57 Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt 57 Indvendig rengøring af maskinen 59 Rengøring af scannerenheden 59 Vedligeholdelse af patronen 59 Opbevaring af tonerpatroner 59 Forventet patronlevetid 59 Fordeling af toner 60 Udskiftning af tonerpatronen 61 Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner 61 Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet 62 Vedligeholdelsesdele10 | Indhold indhold 62 Kontrol af udskiftelige dele 63 Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden 63 Styring af maskinen fra webstedet 63 Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service 63 Kontrol af maskinens serienummer FEJLFINDING 64 64 Tip til at undgå papirstop 64 Afhjælpning af dokumentstop 64 Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning 65 Fejl ved papirudføring 65 Indføringsfejl ved valsen 65 Udbedring af papirstop 65 I papirindføringsområdet 66 I universalbakken 68 I fikseringsenheden 69 I papirudføringsområdet 70 I den valgfri bakke 71 Displaymeddelelsernes betydning 75 Løsning af andre problemer 75 Papirindføring 75 Udskrivningsproblemer 76 Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten 79 Kopieringsproblemer 80 Scanningsproblemer 80 Faxproblemer 81 Almindelige PostScript-problemer 81 Almindelige Windows-problemer 82 Almindelige Linux-problemer 84 Almindelige Macintosh-problemer BESTILLING AF FORBRUGSSTOFFER OG EKSTRAUDSTYR 85 85 Forbrugsstoffer 85 Ekstraudstyr 85 Sådan køber du INSTALLATION AF TILBEHØR 86 86 Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør 86 Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber 86 Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul 86 Installation af et hukommelsesmodul 87 Brug af harddisken 87 Installation af harddisken 88 Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr) 89 Filpolitik 90 Sletter resterende billeddata SPECIFIKATIONER 91 91 Generelle specifikationer 91 Printerspecifikationer 92 Specifikationer for scanner 92 Specifikationer for kopimaskine 93 Specifikationer for faxIndhold | 11 indhold PENDIKS 94 94 Dells politik for teknisk support 94 Kontakt til Dell 94 Garanti- og returpolitik ORDLISTE 95 INDEKS12 | Introduktion introduktion Maskinens hovedkomponenter er: Kapitlet omfatter: • Oversigt over printeren • Oversigt over kontrolpanelet • Status Indikatorernes betydning • Godkender status for tonerpatronen • Menuoversigt • Medfølgende software • Printerdriverfunktioner OVERSIGT OVER PRINTEREN Set forfra Set bagfra 1 Styr til indstilling af dokumentbredde 12 USB-hukommelsesport 2 DADF 13 Indikator for papirniveau 3 Kontrolpanel 14 Ekstra bakke 2 4 Outputsupport 15 Styr til indstilling af papirbredde på universalbakke 5 Frontdæksel 16 Tonerpatron 6 Håndtag til frontdæksel 17 Papiroverførselsbælte 7 Håndtag til universalbakke 18 Scannerlåg 8 Universalbakke 19 Scannerlåsekontakten 9 Bakke 1 20 Scannerglasplade 10 Dokumentindføringsbakke 21 Scannerenhed 11 Dokumentudbakke 1 USB-port 7 Tænd/sluk-kontakt 2 Netværksport 8 Strømindgang 3 15-bens valgfri bakkeforbindelse 9 Dæksel til kontrolkort 4 Telefonstik 10 Bagdæksel 5 Telefonstik til ekstern telefon (EXT) 11 Kabelstyring 6 HåndtagIntroduktion | 13 OVERSIGT OVER KONTROLPANELET 1 Genvejstaster Giver dig mulighed for at gemme hyppigt kaldte faxnumre og ringe til dem blot ved at trykke på nogle få knapper. 2 Shift Giver dig mulighed for at vælge hurtigopkaldstast 16 - 30. 3 Adressekartotek ( ) Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i hukommelsen eller søge efter gemte faxnumre og email-adresser. 4 Opløsning ( ) Justerer opløsningen for det dokument, der skal faxes. 5 Genopkald/Pause ( ) Hvis maskinen er i klar-tilstand, ringes der op til det senest kaldte nummer. Hvis den er i redigeringstilstand, indsættes der en pause i et faxnummer. 6 Fax ( ) Aktiverer faxtilstand. 7 Kopiering ( ) Aktiverer kopitilstand. 8 Scan/Email ( ) Aktiverer scanningstilstand. 9 Display Der vises aktuel status og meddelelser i displayet, når maskinen er i brug. 10 Toner colors De tonerfarver, der vises under LCD-displayet fungerer sammen med meddelelserne på displayet. Se Statusindikatorer med tonerpatronmeddelelser på side 14. 11 Menu ( ) Aktiverer menutilstanden og skifter mellem de tilgængelige menuer. 12 Venstre og højre pil Bruges til at skifte mellem de tilgængelige indstillinger i den valgte menu og til at øge eller formindske værdier. 13 OK ( ) Bekræfter det, der er valgt på skærmen. 14 Tilbage ( ) Vender tilbage til menuens øverste niveau. 15 Status ( ) Viser maskinstatus. Se ”Status Indikatorernes betydning” på side 14. 16 Mørkhed ( ) Justerer lysstyrken for det dokument, der skal kopieres. Se ”Mørkhed” på side 32. 17 Originaltype ( ) Bruges til at vælge dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopieringsjob. Se ”Originaltype” på side 32. 18 Id-kopi ( ) Du kan kopiere begge sider af ID-kortet, f.eks. et kørekort på et enkelt ark papir. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på side 33. 19 Formindsk/Forstør ( ) Gør en kopi mindre eller større end originalen. 20 Duplex ( ) Gør det muligt at udskrive på begge sider af papiret. 21 USB-udskrivning ( ) Filer, der er gemt på en USB-enhed, kan udskrives direkte, hvis du sætter USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen. Se ”Om USB-hukommelse” på side 53. 22 Taltastatur Bruges til at ringe til et nummer eller indtaste alfanumeriske tegn. Se ”Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet” på side 22. 23 Håndfrit kald ( ) Opretter forbindelse med telefonlinjen. 24 Stop/Slet ( ) Stopper en igangværende handling med det samme. Sletter/annullerer kopieringsindstillingerne, f.eks. mørkhed, dokumenttype, kopistørrelse og kopiantal i klar-tilstand. 25 Color Start ( ) Starter et job i farvetilstand. 26 Black Start ( ) Starter et job i sort/hvid-tilstand. • Alle illustrationer i denne brugervejledning kan være anderledes end på din maskine, afhængigt af maskinens tilbehør eller model. • Udbakkens overflade kan blive meget varm, hvis du udskriver et stort antal sider på én gang. Pas på, at du ikke berører overfladen, og sørg for, at børn ikke kommer i nærheden af den. h X Y14 | Introduktion STATUS INDIKATORERNES BETYDNING Farven på Status ( )-lampen angiver maskinens aktuelle status. GODKENDER STATUS FOR TONERPATRONEN Statussen på tonerpatroner vises med Status ( )-indikatoren og LCDdisplayet. Hvis tonerpatronen er næsten tom, eller den skal udskiftes, lyser Status ( )-indikatoren rødt, og displayet viser meddelelsen. Pilemærket viser, hvilken farve toner der skaber problemer eller kan installeres med en ny patron. Eksempel: Ovenstående eksempel viser tonerpatronens status for den farve, som pilen peger på. Kontroller meddelelsen for at finde ud af, hvad problemet er, samt hvordan det afhjælpes. Se side 71 for at få yderligere oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser. STATUS BESKRIVELSE Fra • Maskinen er offlinetilstand. • Maskinen er i strømbesparelsestilstand. Der skiftes automatisk til online, når der modtages data, eller når der trykkes på en vilkårlig tast. Grøn Blinker • Når den grønne indikator blinker langsomt, modtager printeren data fra computeren. • Når den grønne indikator blinker hurtigt, udskriver printeren data. Lyser • Maskinen er tændt og kan benyttes. Rød Blinker • Der er opstået en mindre fejl, og maskinen venter på, at fejlen bliver rettet. Se meddelelsen i displayet, og løs problemet ved at se under ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71. • Tonerpatronen er ved at være tom. Bestil en ny tonerpatron se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr” på side 85. Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den resterende toner. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Lyser • Der er opstået et problem, f.eks. papirstop, et åbnet dæksel, eller der er intet papir i bakken, så maskinen kan ikke fortsætte jobbet. Kontroller meddelelsen på displayet, og se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for at løse problemet. • Tonerpatronen er tom, eller den skal udskiftes. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71. Kontroller altid meddelelsen på displayet for at afhjælpe problemet. Instruktionen i afsnittet Fejlfinding hjælper dig med at betjene maskinen korrekt. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for flere oplysninger.Introduktion | 15 MENUOVERSIGT Fra kontrolpanelet kan du få adgang til menuer, så du kan klargøre maskinen eller bruge funktionerne i den. Du kan få adgang til menuerne ved at trykke på Menu ( ). Se følgende diagram. Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. . Fax Feature Darkness Multi Send Delay Send Priority Send Forward Secure Receive Add Page Cancel Job Fax Setup Sending Redial Times Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Send Report Image TCR Dial Mode Receiving Receive Mode Ring To Answer Fax Setup (fortsat) Stamp RCV Name RCV Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Junk Fax Setup DRPD Mode Duplex Print Change Default Resolution Darkness Auto Report Copy Feature Copy Collation 2-Up 4-Up Poster Copy Clone Copy Adjust Bkgd. Book Copy. Margin Shift Edge Erase Gray Enhance Copy Setup Scan Size Change Default Copies Reduce/Enlarge Darkness Original Type Scan Feature USB Memory Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format E-mail Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Feature (fortsat) FTP Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color SMB Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color System Setup Machine Setup Machine ID Machine Fax No Date & Time Clock Mode Form Menu Select Form Language Default Mode Power Save Scan PWR Save Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adj. Auto Continue Import Setting Export Setting Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Paper Source Wide A4 Sound/Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Speaker Ringer System Setup (fortsat) Report All Report Configuration Supplies Info Address Book Send Report Sent Report Fax RCV Report Schedule Jobs JunkFax Report Network Info. NetScan Report User Auth List PCL Font List PS3 Font List Stored Job Udført job Net Auth Log Maintenance Supplies Life Color Serial Number Toner Low Alert System Setup (fortsat) Clear Setting All Settings Fax Setup Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Address Book Sent Report Fax RCV Report NetScan Report Job Manage Active Job Store Job File Policy ImageOverwrite Immediate On Demand Network TCP/IP Ethernet Speed Clear Setting Network Info Scan Setup Change Default USB Memory E-mail FTP SMB Send Report16 | Introduktion MEDFØLGENDE SOFTWARE Når du har konfigureret printeren og sluttet den til computeren, skal du bruge den medfølgende cd og installere programmerne til printeren og scanneren. Cd’en giver dig adgang til følgende software: PRINTERDRIVERFUNKTIONER Printerdriverne understøtter følgende standardfunktioner: • Valg af papirretning, papirstørrelse, papirkilde og medietype • Antal kopier Du kan desuden bruge forskellige specielle udskrivningsfunktioner. Tabellen nedenfor indeholder en generel oversigt over funktioner, der understøttes af dine printerdrivere: Printerdriver PostScript-driver Cd INDHOLD Cd med printerso ftware Windows • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt udbytte af printeren. • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug PostScript-driveren, når du skal udskrive dokumenter med komplekse skrifttyper og grafik i PS-sproget. • Scannerdriver: TWAIN og WIA-driverne (Windows Image Acquisition) kan bruges til scanning af dokumenter på maskinen. • Scan Manager: Du kan finde programoplysninger om Scan Manager og om status på den installerede scannerdriver. • Dell Toner Management SystemTM : Viser printerstatus og navnet på jobbet, når du sender et job til udskrivning. Vinduet Dell Toner Management SystemTM viser også tonerniveauet og giver dig mulighed for at bestille nye tonerpatroner. • Status Moniter: Med dette program kan du overvåge maskinens status, og du bliver advaret, hvis der sker fejl under udskrivningen. • SmarThru Office a : Dette er det Windowsbaserede program, som følger med multifunktionsmaskinen. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. • Firmware Update Utility: Dette program kan hjælpe dig med at opdatere maskinens firmware. • SetIP: Brug dette program til at definere maskinens TCP/IP-adresser. a. Giver dig mulighed for at redigere et scannet billede på mange måder ved at bruge et effektivt billedredigeringsprogram og sende billedet pr. e-mail. Du kan også åbne et andet billedredigeringsprogram, f.eks. Adobe Photoshop, fra SmarThru. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i den skærmhjælp, der findes i SmarThru-programmet. Linux • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Linuxcomputer og udskrive dokumenter. • SANE: Brug denne driver, når du skal scanne dokumenter. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. Macintosh • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt udbytte af printeren. • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Macintoshcomputer og udskrive dokumenter. • Scannerdriver: Du kan bruge TWAIN-driveren til at scanne dokumenter på maskinen. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Farvetilstand O O O Indstilling af udskriftskvalitet O O O Posterudskrivning O X X Flere sider pr. ark (N-op) O O (2, 4) O Tilpas til side O X O a a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5. Skaleret udskrift O X O Anden papirkilde til første side O X O Vandmærke O X X Overlay O X X Duplex O X O FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Farvetilstand O O O Indstilling af udskriftskvalitet O O O Posterudskrivning X X X Flere sider pr. ark (N-op) O O (2, 4) O Tilpas til side O X O a a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5. Skaleret udskrift O X O Anden papirkilde til første side X X O Vandmærke X X X Overlay X X X Duplex O X OSådan kommer du i gang_ 17 sådan kommer du i gang Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til, hvordan du opsætter maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Opsætning af hardwaren • Udskrivning af testside • Konfiguration af netværket • Systemkrav • Installation af softwaren • Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger OPSÆTNING AF HARDWAREN Dette afsnit viser de trin, der skal udføres for at opsætte hardwaren og er forklaret i Lyninstallationsvejledning. Sørg for at læse Lyninstallationsvejledning og udføre følgende trin. 1. Vælg en stabil placering. Vælg et plant, stabilt sted med tilstrækkelig plads til luftcirkulation. Sørg for, at der er tilstrækkelig plads til at åbne dæksler og bakker. Stedet skal være godt udluftet og ikke udsat for direkte sollys, andre varmekilder, kulde eller fugt. Anbring ikke maskinen tæt på kanten af et bord eller et skrivebord. Der kan udskrives i højder under 1.000 m. Brug højdeindstillingen til at optimere udskrivningen. Se ”Højdejustering” på side 20 for at få yderligere oplysninger. Placer maskinen på et fladt og stabilt underlag, så den ikke hælder mere end 2 mm. Ellers kan det påvirke udskriftskvaliteten. 2. Pak maskinen ud, og kontroller alle medfølgende komponenter. 3. Fjern tapen, idet du holder fast i maskinen. 4. Installer tonerpatronen. 5. Ilæg papir (se ”Placering af papir” på side 29). 6. Sørg for, at alle kabler er tilsluttet maskinen. 7. Tænd for maskinen. UDSKRIVNING AF TESTSIDE Udskriv en demoside for at kontrollere, at maskinen fungerer korrekt. Sådan udskriver du en demoside: Tryk på, og hold knappen OK nede i cirka 2 sekunder, i tilstanden Klar. KONFIGURATION AF NETVÆRKET Du skal konfigurere maskinens netværksprotokoller, før den kan bruges som netværksprinter. Du kan konfigurere de grundlæggende netværksindstillinger ved hjælp af maskinens kontrolpanel. Supported network environments Følgende tabel viser de netværksmiljøer, som maskinen understøtter: Når du flytter maskinen, må du ikke vippe den eller vende den på hovedet. Ellers kan toneren forurene maskinens indre, hvilket kan føre til ødelæggelse af maskinen eller dårlig udskriftskvalitet. PUNKT KRAV Netværksinterface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Netværksoperativsystem • Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista • Forskellige Linux-operativsystemer • Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5 Netværksprotokoller • TCP/IP i Windows • IPP • SNMP • DHCP • BOOTP Du kan konfigurere en DHCP-netværksprotokol ved at gå til webstedet http://developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, vælge det Bonjour-program til Windows, der er relevant for det operativsystem, du kører, og derefter installere programmet. Med dette program får du adgang til at foretage en automatisk rettelse af netværksparameteren. Følg de anvisninger, der vises i installationsvinduet. Dette program understøtter ikke Linux.18 | Sådan kommer du i gang Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen Du kan konfigurere TCP/IP-netværksparametre ved at følge nedenstående fremgangsmåde. 1. Sørg for, at maskinen er tilsluttet netværket med et RJ-45 Ethernet-kabel. 2. Sørg for, at maskinen er tændt. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ) på kontrolpanelet, indtil Network vises i nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på OK for at få adgang til menuen. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil TCP/IP vises. 6. Tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Static vises. 8. Tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil IP Address vises. 10. Tryk på OK. Angiv en byte-værdi på mellem 0 og 255 ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan flytte mellem byte-værdierne ved at trykke på left/right arrow. Gentag dette for at udfylde adressen fra 1. til 4. byte. 11. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig. Gentag trin 9 og 10 for at konfigurere de andre TCP/IP-parametre: undernetmaske og gateway-adresse. Brug af programmet SetIP Dette program er beregnet til konfiguration af netværkets IP-adresse på baggrund af den MAC-adresse, der er angivet som hardwareserienummer på netværkets printerkort eller interface. Programmet giver netværksadministratoren adgang til at indstille flere netværks-IP-adresser på samme tid. Indstilling af netværksværdier 1. Udskriv en rapport over printerens netværkskonfiguration for at finde printerens MAC-adresse. Se ”Printing reports” på side 55 2. Vælg Alle programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Set IP i Windows Start-menuen. 3. Klik for at åbne TCP/IP-konfigurationsvinduet. 4. Indtast MAC-adresse, IP-adresse, undernetmaske og standardgateway for netværkskortet, og klik derefter på Apply. 5. Klik på OK. Printeren udskriver netværksoplysningerne. Kontroller, at indstillingerne er korrekte. 6. Klik på Exit. SYSTEMKRAV Før du begynder, skal du sikre dig, at dit system opfylder følgende minimumkrav: Microsoft ® Windows ® Maskinen understøtter følgende Windows-operativsystemer. Macintosh Kontakt netværksadministratoren, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvordan du konfigurerer. Du kan også konfigurere netværksindstillingerne via netværksadministrationsprogrammerne. • Embedded Web Service: Webserver, der er integreret i netværksprinterserveren, og som giver dig mulighed for at: - Konfigurere de netværksparametre, som maskinen skal bruge til at oprette forbindelse til forskellige netværksmiljøer. - Tilpasse maskinindstillinger. • SetIP: Hjælpeprogram, der giver dig mulighed for at vælge et netværksinterface og manuelt konfigurere adresser, der skal bruges sammen med TCP/IP-protokollen. • Du kan kun bruge programmet SetIP, når printeren er sluttet til et netværk. • Den følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP. Når du indtaster MAC-adressen. IP-adresse, undernetmaske, standardgateway, og klik derefter på Apply. OPERATIVS YSTEM KRAV (ANBEFALES) PROCESSOR RAM LEDIG PLADS PÅ HARDDISK Windows 2000 Intel ® Pentinum® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1,5 GB Windows Server 2003 Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1,25 GB til 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2.048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1.024 MB) 15 GB • Til alle Windows-operativsystemer kræves som minimum Internet Explorer 5.0 eller nyere. • Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller serviceaftaler. • Windows Terminal Services er kompatibelt med denne maskine. OPERATIVS YSTEM KRAV (ANBEFALES) PROCESSOR RAM LEDIG PLADS PÅ HARDDISK Mac OS X 10.4 eller lavere • PowerPC G4/G5 • Intel-processor • 128 MB til en PowerPCbaseret Mac (512 MB) • 512 MB til en Intel-baseret Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 • G4/G5 PowerPC med en processor på 867 MHz eller hurtigere • Intel-processor • 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GBSådan kommer du i gang | 19 Linux INSTALLATION AF SOFTWAREN Du skal installere maskinsoftwaren til udskrivning. Softwaren omfatter drivere, programmer og andre brugervenlige programmer. 1. Connect the network cable to your machine. 2. Sørg for, at netværkskonfigurationen for maskinen er fuldført. (Se ”Konfiguration af netværket” på side 17). Alle programmer på din pc bør være afsluttet, før du begynder installationen. 3. Indsæt cd-rom’en med printersoftware i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom’en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start → Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Hvis du bruger Windows Vista, skal du klikke på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør og skrive X:\Setup.exe. 4. Klik på Next. • Vinduet ovenfor kan være lidt anderledes, hvis du geninstallerer driveren. 5. Vælg Typical installation for a network printer, og klik derefter på Next. 6. Listen over maskiner, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next. • Hvis maskinen ikke vises på listen, skal du klikke på Update for at opdatere listen eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje maskinen på netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje maskinen på netværket, skal du indtaste maskinens portnavn og IP-adresse. PUNKT KRAV Operativ-system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32 bit) RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 9.2 (32 bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32 bit) SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64 bit) Processor Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (IntelCore2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Ledig plads på harddisk 1 GB (1 GB) Softwaren Linux Kernel 2.4 eller nyere Glibc 2.2 eller nyere CUPS • Til arbejdet med store scannede billeder er det nødvendigt at anvende en swap-partition på 300 MB eller mere. • Linux-scannerdriveren understøtter den optiske opløsning på maksimum. • Følgende procedure er til brug af maskinen som en netværksmaskine. Hvis du vil tilslutte en maskine via et USB-kabel, skal du se i Softwareafsnit. • Følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP-operativsystemet. Proceduren og det popup-vindue, der vises under installationen, kan variere afhængigt af operativsystemet, printerfunktionen eller det anvendte interface.20 | Sådan kommer du i gang Du kontrollerer maskinens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56). • Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse. 7. Klik på Finish. MASKINENS GRUNDLÆGGENDE INDSTILLINGER Når installationen er fuldført, ønsker du måske at angive maskinens standardindstillinger. Se næste afsnit, hvis du vil angive eller ændre værdier. Højdejustering Udskriftskvaliteten påvirkes af det atmosfæriske tryk, hvor det atmosfæriske tryk bestemmes af maskinens højde over havoverfladen. Følgende oplysninger beskriver, hvordan du indstiller maskinen, så du får den bedste udskriftskvalitet. Før du angiver højdeindstillingen, skal du finde den højde, du bruger maskinen i. 1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende cd med printersoftware. 2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility. Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X (eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux). 3. Klik på Settings → Atitude adjustment. Vælg den korrekte værdi på rullelisten, og klik derefter på Apply. Ændring af sprog i displayet Hvis du vil ændre det sprog, der vises i kontrolpanelet, skal du gøre følgende: 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Language vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på pileknapperne, indtil det ønskede sprog vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis du ikke ved, hvad IP-adressen er, skal du kontakte netværksadministratoren eller udskrive netværksoplysningerne (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56). • Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt efter installationen, skal du geninstallerer printerdriveren. Se Softwareafsnit. • I forbindelse med installationen af printerdriveren registrerer installationsprogrammet automatisk landestandarden for operativsystemet, og standardpapirstørrelsen for maskinen indstilles, så den passer til denne standard. Hvis du bruger en anden landestandard på Windows-operativsystemet, skal du ændre papirstørrelsen på maskinen, så den svarer til den papirstørrelse, du oftest bruger. Når installationen er fuldført, kan du ændre papirstørrelsen under printeregenskaberne. 1 Normal 2 High 1 3 High 2 4 High 3 Hvis din maskine er sluttet til et netværk, vises skærmbilledet Embedded Web Service automatisk. Klik på Machine Settings → Setup (eller Machine Setup) → Altitude adj.. Vælg den ønskede højdeværdi, og klik på Apply. 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt Dato og klokkeslæt vises i displayet, når maskinen er tændt og klar til at blive betjent. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Date & Time vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Indtast dato og klokkeslæt ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Måned = 01 til 12 Dag = 01 til 31 År = kræver fire cifre Time = 01 til 12 (12-timers tilstand) 00 til 23 (24-timers tilstand) Minut = 00 til 59 Du kan også bruge venstre/højre pil til at flytte markøren til det tal, du vil ændre, og indtaste et nyt tal. 5. Hvis du vil vælge AM eller PM til 12-timers format, skal du trykke på knappen * eller # en hvilken som helst taltast. Hvis markøren ikke er placeret under indikatoren for AM eller PM, flyttes den med det samme derhen, når du trykker på knappen * eller #. Du kan ændre tidsformatet til 24 timer (dvs. at 01:00 PM angives som 13:00). Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger i næste afsnit. 6. Tryk på OK for at gemme klokkeslættet og datoen. Hvis du indtaster et forkert tal, vises der Out of Range, og maskinen forsætter ikke til næste trin. Hvis det sker, skal du blot indtaste det rigtige tal. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af tidsformatet Du kan indstille maskinen til at vise tiden i enten 12-timers eller 24-timers format. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clock Mode vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det andet format, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af standardfunktionen Maskinen er på forhånd indstillet til faxtilstand. Du kan ændre denne standardindstilling, så den enten er tilstanden Fax eller Kopi. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Default Mode vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede standardtilstand vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indstilling af lyde Du kan indstille følgende lyde: • Key Sound: Slår tastelyden til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er angivet til On, høres der en lyd, hver gang der trykkes på en tast. • Alarm Sound: Slår alarmen til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er indstillet til On, høres der en alarmlyd, når der opstår en fejl, eller når en faxkommunikation afsluttes. • Speaker: Slår lydene fra telefonlinjen via højttaleren til eller fra, f.eks. en klartone eller en faxtone. Når denne indstilling er Comm., hvilket vil sige ”fælles”, er højttaleren slået til, indtil den eksterne maskine svarer. • Ringer: Justerer lydstyrken af ringesignalet. Til lydstyrken af ringesignalet kan du vælge mellem Off, Low, Mid og High. Højtaler, ringesignal, tastelyd, og alarmlyd 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Sound/Volume vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede lydindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status eller lydstyrke for den valgte lyd vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5, hvis det er nødvendigt, for at definere andre lyde. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Højttalerstyrke 1. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Der lyder en klartone fra højttaleren. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du hører den ønskede lydstyrke. 3. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at gemme ændringen og vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet Når du udfører forskellige opgaver, skal du muligvis skrive navne og numre. Når du f.eks. sætter maskinen op, skal du angive dit eget eller firmaets navn og faxnummeret. Når du gemmer faxnumre eller e-mail-adresser i hukommelsen, kan du evt. også angive de tilsvarende navne. Indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn 1. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et tegn, skal du først finde knappen med det tegn, du vil indtaste. Tryk på knappen, indtil det rigtige bogstav vises på displayet. Hvis du f.eks. vil skrive bogstavet O, skal du trykke på 6, der er mærket med MNO. Hver gang du trykker på 6, viser displayet et nyt bogstav M, N, O, m, n, o og til sidst 6. Du kan også indtaste specialtegn, f.eks. mellemrum, plustegn osv. Du kan finde flere oplysninger i næste afsnit. 2. Gentag trin 1, hvis du vil indtaste flere bogstaver. Hvis det næste bogstav findes på samme knap, flytter du markøren ved hjælp af højre venstre/højre-pileknap og trykker derefter på knappen med det ønskede bogstav. Markøren flyttes til højre, og det næste tal vises på displayet. Du kan indsætte et mellemrum ved at trykke på 1 to gange. 3. Tryk på OK, når du har indtastet de bogstaver, du ønsker. Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land. Du kan justere indstillingen af lydstyrken ved hjælp af Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan kun justere lydstyrken i højttaleren, når der er forbindelse med telefonlinjen.22 | Sådan kommer du i gang Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet Rettelse af tal eller navne Hvis du taster forkert, når du indtaster et nummer eller navn, skal du trykke på venstre venstre/højre pileknap for at slette det sidst indtastede tal eller tegn. Indtast derefter det korrekte tal eller bogstav. Indsættelse af en pause I nogle telefonsystemer skal du først ringe et forvalgsnummer (fx 9) og vente på endnu en klartone. Hvis du benytter et af disse systemer, skal du indsætte en pause i telefonnummeret. Du kan indsætte en pause, når du definerer genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Når du vil indsætte en pause, skal du trykke på Genopkald/Pause ( ), når du kommer til det relevante sted i telefonnummeret. På displayet vises der en ”-” på det pågældende sted i nummeret. Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene Strømsparetilstand Tilstanden Strømbesparelse gør det muligt for maskinen at reducere strømforbruget, når den ikke er i brug. Du kan aktivere denne tilstand og vælge et bestemt tidsrum, som maskinen venter efter et afsluttet job, før den skifter til en mindre strømkrævende tilstand. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Power Save vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Strømsparetilstand ved scanning Når du bruger strømsparetilstand ved scanning, kan du spare strøm ved at slukke for scannerlampen. Scannerlampen under scannerglaspladen slukkes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug, for at reducere strømforbruget og forlænge lampens levetid. Lampen tændes automatisk efter en kort opvarmningstid, når du starter scanningen. Du kan indstille det tidsrum, som lampen venter efter en afsluttet scanning, før den skifter til strømsparetilstand. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan PWR Save vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob Du kan definere, hvor lang tid et enkelt udskriftsjob er aktivt, før det skal udskrives. Maskinen håndterer indgående data som et enkelt job, hvis det ligger inden for den angivne tid. Når der opstår fejl under behandling af data fra computeren, og datastrømmen standser, venter maskinen den angivne tid og annullerer derefter udskrivningen, hvis datastrømmen ikke genoptages. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Job Timeout vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Auto fortsæt Dette er den indstilling, der bruges til at indstille maskinen til enten at fortsætte udskrivning eller stoppe udskrivning i tilfælde af at den papirstørrelse, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Continue vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • On: udskriver automatisk, når den angivne tid er gået, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. • Off: venter, indtil du trykker på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ) på kontrolpanelet, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. TAST TILDELTE TAL, BOGSTAVER OG TEGN 1 1 Mellemrum 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r s 7 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 0 + - , . ‘ / * # & @ 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger Din maskine har forudindstillet skrifttypen for dit område eller land. Hvis du vil ændre den foretrukne skrifttype eller angive, hvilken skrifttype der skal anvendes under bestemte betingelser, f.eks. i DOS-miljøet, kan du ændre skrifttypen på følgende måde: 1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende cd med software. 2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility. Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X (eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux). 3. Klik på Emulation. 4. Bekræft, hvis PCL er valgt i Emulation Setting. 5. Klik på Setting. 6. Vælg Symbol set som din foretrukne skrifttype. 7. Klik på Apply. Det følgende er en oversigt over sprog og deres korrekte skrifttyper. • Russisk: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic • Hebraisk: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (gælder kun Israel) • Græsk: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek • Arabisk og Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic • OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B24 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du lægger originaler og udskriftsmedier i maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Ilægning af originaler • Valg af udskriftsmedier • Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken • Placering af papir • Justering af outputsupporten • Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER Du kan lægge en original på scannerglaspladen eller i DADF’en, så du kan kopiere eller scanne den eller sende den som fax. På scannerglaspladen Sørg for, at der ikke er originaler i DADF’en. Hvis maskinen registrerer en original i DADF’en, får den højere prioritet end originalen på scannerglaspladen. Det giver den bedste scanningskvalitet, specielt for farvebilleder eller gråtoner, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Løft, og åbn scannerlåget. 2. Læg originalen med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen, og ret den ind efter registreringsstyret i glaspladens øverste, venstre hjørne. 3. Luk scannerlåget. I DADF’en Ved brug af DADF’en kan du ilægge op til 50 ark 75 g/m2 papir til et job. Når du bruger DADF’en, må du ikke: • Ilæg ikke papir, der er mindre end 148 x 148 mm eller større end 216 x 356 mm. • Undgå følgende papirtyper: - karbonpapir eller karbonbelagt papir - bestrøget papir - gennemsigtigt eller tyndt papir - krøllet eller foldet papir - krøllet eller rullet papir - iturevet papir. • Fjern alle hæfteklammer og papirclips, før du lægger papiret i. • Sørg for, at lim, blæk eller retteblæk på papiret er tørt, før du lægger det i. • Læg ikke papir i forskellige størrelser eller med forskellig vægt i. • Læg ikke hæfter, pamfletter, transparenter eller dokumenter med andre usædvanlige egenskaber i DADF’en. Dell 2145cn har DADF-funktionen, så du kan scanne begge sider af originalen på samme tid. Se ”Scanning af begge sider af papiret” på side 42. • Det kan påvirke kopikvaliteten og tonerforbruget, hvis scannerlåget står åbent, mens du kopierer. • Støv på scannerglaspladen kan give sorte pletter på udskriften. Hold den altid ren. • Hvis du kopierer en side fra en bog eller et blad, skal du løfte op i scannerlåget, indtil hængslerne fanges af stopanordningen, og derefter lukke låget. Hvis bogen eller bladet er tykkere end 30 mm, skal du begynde at kopiere med låget åbent.25 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier 1. Bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille siderne, før de lægges i bakken. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med tryksiden opad. Sørg for, at bunden af originalstakken passer til den papirstørrelse, der er markeret i dokumentindføringsbakken. 3. Juster styrene til indstilling af dokumentbredden, så de passer til papirets størrelse. VALG AF UDSKRIFTSMEDIER Du kan udskrive på en række forskellige materialer, f.eks. almindeligt papir, konvolutter, etiketter og transparenter. Men du skal altid vælge udskriftsmedier, der overholder de retningslinjer, der er for maskinen. Udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder de retningslinjer, der er beskrevet i denne brugerhåndbog, kan forårsage følgende problemer: • Dårlig udskriftskvalitet • Flere papirstop • Tidlig nedslidning af maskinen Egenskaber som vægt, sammensætning, fiber- og fugtighedsindhold er vigtige faktorer, der påvirker maskinens ydelse og udskriftskvalitet. Vær opmærksom på følgende, når du vælger udskriftsmateriale: • Typen, størrelsen og vægten på udskriftsmediet til din maskine beskrives senere i dette afsnit. • Ønsket resultat: Vælg udskriftsmedier, der passer til projektet. • Hvidhed: Nogle udskriftsmedier er mere hvide end andre og giver et mere skarpt og levende billede. • Overfladeglathed: Jo mere glat et udskriftsmedie er, jo mere skarpt forekommer det udskrevne billede på papiret. Støv på DADF-glasset kan forårsage sorte streger på udskriften. Hold den altid ren. • Der kan forekomme tilfælde, hvor udskriftsmediet overholder alle retningslinjer i dette afsnit, og alligevel ikke giver tilfredsstillende resultater. Dette kan skyldes forkert håndtering, temperaturer og fugtighedsniveauer over det anbefalede eller andre faktorer, som Dell ikke har indflydelse på. • Inden du køber større mængder af et bestemt udskriftsmedie, skal du sikre dig, at det opfylder de krav, der er angivet i denne brugerhåndbog. Anvendelse af udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder disse specifikationer, kan medføre problemer, der nødvendiggør reparation. Reparationer af denne type er ikke omfattet af Dell garanti eller serviceaftaler.26 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie TYPE STØRRELSE MÅL VÆGT a KAPACITET b Almindeligt papir Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2 i bakken • 60 til 163 g/m2 i universalbakken • 250 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i papirbakken • 100 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken • 500 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i valgfribakke Legal 216 x 356 mm US Folio 216 x 330 mm A4 210 x 297 mm Oficio 216 x 343 mm JIS B5 182 x 257 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Executive 184 x 267 mm A5 148 x 210 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2 i bakken • 60 til 163 g/m2 i universalbakken • 150 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i papirbakken • 100 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken Statement 140 x 216 mm A6 105 x 148 mm Konvolut Monarch-konvolut 98 x 191 mm 75 to 105 g/m2 kontraktpapir 10 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken Konvolut 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm Konvolut nr. 10 105 x 241 mm Konvolut nr. 9 98 x 225 mm DL-konvolut 110 x 220 mm C5-konvolut 162 x 229 mm C6-konvolut 114 x 162 mm Etiketter Letter, Legal, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 120 til 150 g/m2 10 ark 75 g/m2 papir i universalbakken Karton Letter, Legal, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 90 til 163 g/m2 10 ark 75 g/m2 papir i universalbakken Minimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 76 x 127 mm 60 til 163 g/m2 Maksimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 216 x 356 mm a. Hvis papirets vægt er over 105 g/m2 , skal du bruge universalbakken. b. Den maksimale kapacitet kan variere alt afhængigt af materialets vægt, tykkelse og af de omgivende forhold.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier TILSTAND STØRRELSE KILDE Kopieringstilstand Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio, Executive, JIS B5, A5, A6 • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke Udskrivningstilstand Alle størrelser understøttes af maskinen • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke Faxtilstand Letter, A4, Legal • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 Duplexudskrivning a a. Kun 75 til 105 g/m2 . Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Oficio • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER Konvolutter • Vellykket udskrivning på konvolutter er afhængig af konvolutternes kvalitet. Ved valg af konvolutter skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning: - Vægt: Konvolutpapiret bør ikke veje mere end 90 g/m2 , da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. - Udformning: Inden udskrivningen skal konvolutterne ligge fladt med mindre end 6 mm rulning, og de må ikke indeholde luft. - Tilstand: Konvolutter bør ikke være krøllede, revet i stykker eller på anden måde beskadiget. - Temperatur: Brug altid konvolutter, der kan klare den varme og det tryk, der opstår i maskinen. • Brug kun kvalitetskonvolutter med skarpe og helt pressede kanter. • Brug ikke konvolutter med frimærker. • Brug ikke konvolutter med lukkeanordninger, ruder, belægninger, selvklæbende lukning eller andre syntetiske materialer. • Brug ikke beskadigede konvolutter eller konvolutter af dårlig kvalitet. • Kontroller, at sammenføjningerne i begge konvoluttens ender når helt ud til konvoluttens hjørner. 1 Acceptabelt 2 Uacceptabelt Konvolutter (fortsat) • Hvis du bruger konvolutter med en selvklæbende strimmel, eller hvor mere end én flap skal foldes over for at lukke konvolutten, skal du sikre dig, at det selvklæbende middel kan tåle maskinens fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. Ekstra flapper og strimler kan betyde, at konvolutten krøller eller bukker, at der opstår papirstop, og i værste fald kan det beskadige fikseringsenheden. • Det giver det bedste resultat, hvis margenerne ikke placeres tættere end 15 mm på konvoluttens kanter. • Undgå at udskrive i det område, hvor konvoluttens sammenføjninger mødes. Etiketter • Brug kun etiketter, der er beregnet til lasermaskiner, så maskinen ikke beskadiges. Ved valg af etiketter skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning: - Klæbemiddel: Klæbemidlet skal være stabilt ved maskinens fikseringstemperatur. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. - Placering på arket: Brug kun etiketark, hvor arket ikke er synligt mellem de enkelte etiketter. Etiketter kan løsne sig fra ark, hvis der er afstand mellem dem, hvilket kan medføre alvorlige papirstop. - Krøl: Inden udskrivningen skal etiketarket ligge fladt uden mere end 13 mm krøl i nogen retning. - Tilstand: Brug ikke etiketter med rynker, bobler eller andre tegn på manglende klæbeevne. • Sørg for, at der ikke sidder noget udækket klæbemateriale mellem etiketterne. Synlige områder på arket kan medføre, at etiketterne løsnes under udskriften, hvilket kan forårsage papirstop. Synligt klæbemateriale kan også beskadige maskindele. • Kør aldrig et etiketark gennem maskinen mere end én gang. Den selvklæbende bagside er kun beregnet til at skulle igennem maskinen én gang. • Brug ikke etiketter, der har løsnet sig fra arket, er krøllede, har bobler eller på anden måde er beskadiget. Karton eller materialer i brugerdefinere de størrelser • Udskriv aldrig på medier med en bredde på mindre end 76 mm eller en længde på mere end 356 mm. • Indstil margenen i programmet, så den er mindst 6,4 mm fra materialets kant. MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER28 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier ÆNDRING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSEN I PAPIRBAKKEN Hvis du vil anvende længere papir, f.eks. papir i Legal-størrelse, skal du justere papirstyrene for at forlænge papirbakken. 1. Juster papirlængdestyret i henhold til den ønskede papirlængde. Den er forudindstillet til Letter- eller A4-størrelse, afhængigt af hvilket land den bruges i. 2. Når der er lagt papir i bakken, skal du, mens du klemmer papirbreddestyret sammen som vist, flytte det mod stakken af papir, indtil det berører siden af stakken let. Klem ikke papirstyret for tæt imod papirkanten, da det kan bøje papiret. Hvis du bruger papir i formatet legal, skal du udvide bakkens længde. 3. Tryk på det grønne greb på bagsiden af bakken, og hold det nede. Mens du holder grebet nede, skal du udvide bakken til den tilsvarende position. 4. Læg papir i papirbakken. 5. Sæt bakken ind i maskinen. 6. Indstil papirstørrelsen fra din computer. Fortrykt papir • Brevpapir skal være trykt med varmebestandigt blæk, der ikke smelter, fordamper eller afgiver giftige gasser, når det udsættes for printerens fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. • Blækket på brevpapiret skal være ikke-brændbart og må ikke have nogen form for negativ virkning på printerens ruller. • Formularer og brevpapir bør opbevares i forseglet og fugtsikker emballage for at forhindre forandringer under opbevaring. • Kontroller, at blækket på papiret er tørt, før du lægger fortrykt papir som f.eks. formularer eller brevpapir i printeren. Under fikseringsprocessen kan fugtigt blæk løsnes fra fortrykt papir og forringe udskriftskvaliteten. 1 Bakkeudvidelsesgreb 2 Papirlængdestyr 3 Papirbreddestyr MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER • Du må ikke skubbe styrene til indstilling af papirbredden så tæt ind mod stakken, at den begynder at bøje. • Det kan medføre papirstop, hvis du ikke indstiller styrene til papirbredden.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 29 PLACERING AF PAPIR Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke Læg det udskriftsmedie, du oftest bruger, i bakke 1. Bakke 1 kan maksimalt indeholde 250 ark 75 g/m2 almindeligt papir. Du kan købe en ekstra bakke og sætte den i maskinen under standardbakken. Den rummer 500 ark papir ekstra (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85). 1. Træk bakken ud. Juster bakkens størrelse til det medie, du lægger i. 2. Læg papiret med den side, der skal udskrives på, opad. 3. Når du udskriver et dokument, vælger du papirkilde og type i programmet. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pcudskrivning. Ilægning af papir i universalbakken Universalbakken kan indeholde specielle størrelser og typer af udskriftsmateriale, f.eks. postkort, notekort og konvolutter. Det er nyttigt ved udskrivning af en enkelt side på brevpapir eller farvet papir. Tips om brug af universalbakken • Læg kun udskriftsmedier i ét format i universalbakken ad gangen. • Læg ikke mere papir i universalbakken, så længe der er papir i den, da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. Det gælder også andre typer udskriftsmedier. • Udskriftsmedier skal lægges midt i universalbakken med forsiden nedad, så den øverste kant føres ind i universalbakken først. • Brug altid kun de angivne udskriftsmedier, så du undgår papirstop og problemer med udskriftskvaliteten (se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25). • Sørg for at glatte evt. krøller på postkort, konvolutter og etiketter ud, før du lægger dem i universalbakken. 1. Hold i håndtaget på universalbakken, og træk nedad for at åbne den. 2. Læg papiret i. Brug af fotopapir eller coated papir kan skabe problemer, der kræver reparation. Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller serviceaftaler. 1 Fuld 2 Tom • Hvis papirindføringen giver problemer, skal du lægge ét ark ad gangen i universalbakken. • Du kan ilægge papir, der allerede er skrevet på. Den trykte side skal vende opad med en ukrøllet kant forrest. Hvis du støder på problemer med papirindføringen, så prøv at vende papiret om. Bemærk, at udskriftskvaliteten ikke kan garanteres. • Hvis du vil bruge allerede anvendt papir, skal du placere papiret med den trykte side nedad. • Hvis du benytter papir, så bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille sammenhængende ark, før de lægges i bakken.30 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier 3. Klem styrene til indstilling af papirbredden i universalbakken ind mod papiret. Pres dem ikke for langt ind, da det kan få papiret til at bøje. Det kan medføre papirstop, eller at papiret føres skævt ind. 4. Når du har lagt papir i bakken, skal du angive papirtype og -størrelse til universalbakken. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pc-udskrivning. 5. Luk universalbakken, når udskrivningen er færdig. JUSTERING AF OUTPUTSUPPORTEN Den udskrevne stak på ud bakken og outputsupporten medvirker til at justere de udskrevne sider. Træk outputsupporten ud i henhold til papiret størrelse, så den kan justere siderne korrekt. Ved papir i Letter-størrelse Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med LTR som vist, og fold forlængeren ud. Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med A4, LGL som vist, og fold forlængeren ud. Afhængigt af hvilken medietype du bruger, skal du følge disse retningslinjer, når du lægger papir i maskinen: • Konvolutter: Vend siden med flappen nedad. Frimærkesiden skal vende opad, med frimærkeenden mod venstre. • Etiketter: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led med toppen af arket først. • Fortrykt papir: Vend designsiden opad, og vend papiret, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. • Karton: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. • Papir, der tidligere er udskrevet på: Vend siden med den eksisterende udskrift nedad, og vend det, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. Den kant, der føres ind først, må hverken være krøllet eller foldet. De indstillinger, der foretages fra printerdriveren, tilsidesætter indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet. 1 Outputsupport 2 Forlængeren • Hvis outputsupporten ikke er korrekt anbragt, justeres siderne forkert eller falder ud. • Hvis der udskrives mange sider lige efter hinanden, kan udbakken blive varm. Pas på ikke at berøre overfladen, og sørg især for, at børn ikke kommer inden for rækkevidde.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 31 INDSTILLING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSE OG TYPE Når du har lagt papir i papirbakken, skal du bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet og indstille papirstørrelse og -type. De valgte indstillinger gælder for kopierings- og faxtilstand. Ved udskrivning fra pc skal du vælge papirstørrelse og -type i det program, du bruger på pc’en. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Paper Size 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirstørrelse, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Type vises, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirtype, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.32 | Kopiering : kopiering Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til kopiering af dokumenter. Kapitlet omfatter: • Valg af papirbakke • Kopiering • Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi • Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne • Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering • Kopiering af ID-kort • Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner • Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret • Indstilling af timeout for kopiering VALG AF PAPIRBAKKE Når du har lagt udskriftsmedier til kopier i, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til kopijob. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Tray. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. KOPIERING 1. Tryk på Kopiering. Der vises Ready to Copy på den øverste linje af displayet. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Brug taltasterne, og indtast kopiantallet, hvis du vil tage flere kopier. 4. Du kan tilpasse kopiindstillingerne, bl.a. kopistørrelse, lysstyrke og originaltype, ved at bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi” på side 32. Hvis det er nødvendigt, kan du bruge specielle kopieringsfunktioner som posterkopiering eller 2- eller 4 op-kopiering. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på side 33. 5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen. Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering. ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVER KOPI Det er hurtigt og nemt at kopiere med maskinens standardindstillinger. Men du kan også bruge funktionstasterne til kopiering på kontrolpanelet og ændre indstillingerne for hver ny kopi. Mørkhed Hvis du har en original, der indeholder svage markeringer og mørke billeder, kan du justere lysstyrken, så kopien bliver lettere at læse. Hvis du vil justere lysstyrken for kopier, skal du trykke på Mørkhed ( ). Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger: • Lightest: Velegnet til mørkere tryk. • Light: Velegnet til mørkt trykt. • Normal: Velegnet til almindelige maskinskrevne eller udskrevne originaler. • Dark: Velegnet til lysere tryk. • Darkest: Velegnet til lysere tryk og til svage blyantsmarkeringer. Originaltype Indstillingen Originaltype bruges til at forbedre kopikvaliteten ved at angive dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopijob. Tryk på Originaltype ( ) for at vælge dokumenttype. Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger: • Text: Bruges til originaler, der hovedsageligt indeholder tekst. • Text/Photo: Bruges til originaler med en blanding af tekst og fotografier. • Photo: Bruges, hvis originalerne er fotografier. • Magazine: Bruges, hvis originalerne er magasiner. Formindsket eller forstørret kopi Hvis du trykker på tasten Formindsk/Forstør ( ), kan du forstørre eller formindske det kopierede billede fra 25 % til 400 %, når du kopierer originaldokumenter fra scannerglaspladen, eller fra 25 % til 100 % fra DADF’en. Sådan vælger du blandt de foruddefinerede kopistørrelser: 1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ). 2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan skalere kopien ved at indtaste skaleringsforholdet direkte: 1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ). 2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil Custom vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Angiv skaleringsforholdet, og tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Du kan annullere kopijobbet, mens maskinen er i gang. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), så stopper kopieringen. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver kopieringsindstillingerne, nulstilles alle de indstillinger, du har angivet for det aktuelle kopijob, og vender tilbage til deres standardværdier. Ellers indstilles de automatisk til deres standardværdier igen, når maskinen har afsluttet kopieringen. Når du formindsker en kopi, kan der forekomme sorte streger nederst på kopien. hKopiering | 33 ÆNDRING AF SCANNINGSSTØRRELSESINDSTILLINGERNE Du kan justere scanningsstørrelsen for originalpapiret. Hvis du for eksempel scanner en original i A4-størrelse og indstiller scanningsstørrelsen til A5, scanner maskinen kun A5-området (148 x 210 mm). Vi anbefaler, at du skifter til den rigtige scanningsstørrelse for originalpapiret. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan Size. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. ÆNDRING AF STANDARDINDSTILLINGERNE FOR KOPIERING Kopieringsindstillingerne, herunder mørkhed, originaltype og antal kopier, kan indstilles til de værdier, som bruges hyppigst. Når du kopierer et dokument, bruges standardindstillingerne, medmindre de ændres ved hjælp af de tilsvarende knapper på kontrolpanelet. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede konfigurationsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 til 5 efter behov. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. KOPIERING AF ID-KORT Maskinen kan udskrive 2-sidede originaler på ét ark papir i A4-, Letter-, Legal-, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5- eller A6-størrelse. Når du kopierer med denne funktion, udskriver maskinen den ene side af originalen på den øverste halvdel af papiret og den anden side på den nederste halvdel uden at formindske originalens størrelse. Denne funktion er velegnet til kopiering af små originaler, f.eks. navneskilte. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Id-kopi ( ). 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Place Front Side and Press[Start], vises på displayet. 4. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Maskinen begynder at scanne forsiden, og der vises Place Back Side and Press[Start] på displayet. 5. Åbn scannerlåget, og vend originalen om. 6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen. Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering. BRUG AF DE SPECIELLE KOPIFUNKTIONER Du kan bruge følgende kopifunktioner: Sortering Du kan indstille maskinen, så kopieringsjob sorteres. Hvis du f.eks. opretter 2 kopier af en original på 3 sider, udskrives der et komplet dokument på 3 sider efterfulgt af endnu et komplet dokument. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Indtast det ønskede antal kopier på taltastaturet. 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Collation. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Der udskrives et komplet dokument efterfulgt af det næste komplette dokument. Når du har brugt denne valgmulighed, vender maskinen automatisk tilbage til standardindstillingen. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver kopieringsindstillinger, annulleres de valgte indstillinger, og standardindstillingerne gendannes. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis originalen er større end det område, der kan udskrives på, er det ikke sikkert, at alle dele af originalen kan kopieres. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.34 | Kopiering 2- eller 4-op-kopiering Maskinen kan udskrive 2 eller 4 originalbilleder formindsket, så de kan være på ét enkelt ark papir. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil indtil 2-Up eller 4-Up vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Plakatkopiering Maskinen kan udskrive et billede på op til 9 ark papir (3 x 3). Du kan derefter føje de kopierede sider sammen til ét dokument i plakatstørrelse. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Poster Copy vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Originalen deles op i 9 dele. Hver af disse dele scannes og kopieres en efter en i følgende rækkefølge: Klonkopiering Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt side. Antallet af kopier på siden bestemmes automatisk af originalen og papirstørrelsen. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clone Copy vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Sletning af baggrundsbilleder Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive et billede uden den tilhørende baggrund. Denne kopifunktion fjerner baggrundsfarven og kan være praktisk, når du f.eks. kopierer en avis eller et katalog med farve i baggrunden. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Adjust Bkgd. vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion. • Auto: Optimerer baggrunden. • Enhance 1~2: Jo højere værdien er, jo mere naturtro er baggrunden. • Erase 1~4: Jo højere tallet er, desto lysere er baggrunden. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Bogkopiering Funktionen Book Copy giver dig mulighed for at kopiere en hel bog. Hvis bogen er for tyk, skal du løfte dækslet, indtil det bremses af hængslerne, og derefter lukke dækslet. Hvis bogen eller magasinet er tykkere end 3 cm, er du nødt til at kopiere med låget åbent. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Book Copy. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion. • Left Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive venstre side af bogen. • Right Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive højre side af bogen. • Both Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive begge sider af bogen. Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen med knappen Formindsk/Forstør ( ), når du bruger 2- eller 4-op-kopiering. 1 2 1 2 3 4 Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen ved hjælp af knappen Formindsk/ Forstør ( ), mens du opretter en klonkopi.Kopiering | 35 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Margenskift Funktionen Margin Shift giver dig mulighed for at oprette en indbindingskant for et dokument. Billedet kan justeres op eller ned på siden og/eller forskydes mod højre eller venstre. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Margin Shift. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Denne funktion er deaktiveret. • Auto Center: Kopierer automatisk midt på papiret. • Custom Margin: Indtast venstre, højre, top- eller bundmargen fra taltastaturet. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes. 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Slet kant Med Slet kant kan du slette mærker, borehuller, foldemærker og mærker efter hæfteklammer langs alle fire sider af et dokument. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Edge Erase. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Angiver ikke indbindingsindstillingen. • Small Original: Sletter kanten af originalen, hvis den er lille. • Hole Punch: Sletter mærkerne efter bogbindingshuller. • Book Center: Sletter den midterste del af papiret, der er sort og vandret, når du kopierer en bog. • Border Erase: Sletter en bestemt mængde af kanten af udskriften. 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Justering af gråtone ved kopiering Når du kopierer en original i sort/hvid, kan du justere gråtoneskalaen og optimere kvaliteten af kopien ved hjælp af denne funktion. Funktionen er udelukkende tilgængelig i forbindelse med gråtonekopier. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Gray Enhance. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes. 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. UDSKRIVNING PÅ BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du få adgang til at udskrive dokumenter på begge sider af papiret. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Hold knappen left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Kopierer i normal tilstand. • 1->2Side Short: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på en notesblok. • 1->2Side Long: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog. • 2 ->1Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark. • 2 ->2Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver siderne på begge sider af papiret. Med denne funktion udskrives kopierne Funktionen Margin Shift kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration. - Auto Center: Scannerglasplade - Custom Margin: Scannerglasplade, DADF Funktionen Edge Erase kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration. - Small Original: Scannerglasplade - Hole Punch: Scannerglasplade, DADF - Book Center: Scannerglasplade - Border Erase: Scannerglasplade, DADF X Y X Y36 | Kopiering som en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalerne. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. INDSTILLING AF TIMEOUT FOR KOPIERING Du kan indstille det tidsrum, maskinen venter, før den genopretter standardkopieringsindstillingerne, hvis du ikke begynder at kopiere efter at have ændret indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Timeout vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises. Hvis du vælger Off, betyder det, at maskinen ikke gendanner standardindstillingerne, før du trykker på Black Start eller Color Start ( ) for at starte kopieringen, eller Stop/Slet ( ) for at annullere. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. X YScanning | 37 scanning Du kan scanne billeder og tekst på maskinen, så de kan gemmes som digitale filer på computeren. Kapitlet omfatter: • Grundlæggende om scanning • Scanning fra kontrolpanelet • Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse • Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob • Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse • Konfiguration af adressekartoteket GRUNDLÆGGENDE OM SCANNING Du kan scanne originalerne på maskinen via et USB-kabel eller netværket. • Dell Scan Manager: Du skal blot gå hen til maskinen, scanne originalerne fra kontrolpanelet, hvorefter de scannede data gemmes i mappen Dokumenter på den computer, der er sluttet til maskinen. Når installationen er fuldført, er Dell Scan Manager installeret på computeren. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se næste afsnit. • TWAIN: TWAIN er et af de foruddefinerede programmer til billedbehandling. Når du scanner et billede, startes det valgte program, så du selv kan styre scanningsprocessen. Se afsnittet Software. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se Software section. • Dell SmarThru Office: Denne funktion udgør den software, der følger med maskinen. Programmet kan bruges til scanning af billeder eller dokumenter, og funktionen kan bruges via en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se Software section. • WIA: WIA er en forkortelse for Windows Images Acquisition. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal computeren være sluttet direkte til maskinen via et USB-kabel. Se Software section. • E-mail: Du kan sende det scannede billede som en fil vedhæftet en email. Se side 39. • FTP: Du kan scanne et billede og overføre det til en FTP-server. Se side 40. • SMB: Du kan scanne et billede og sende det til en delt mappe på en SMB-server. Se side 40. SCANNING FRA KONTROLPANELET Maskinen giver dig nem adgang til at scanne fra kontrolpanelet og sende det scannede dokument til mappen Dokumenter på den tilsluttede computer. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal maskinen være sluttet til computeren via et USB-kabel, eller de to enheder skal være forbundet via netværket. Med det medfølgende program Dell Scan Manager får du endvidere adgang til at åbne scannede dokumenter med det program, du tidligere har konfigureret. Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR kan eksempelvis føjes til programmet. Se ”Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager.” på side 37. Det er muligt at gemme scannede billeder som BMP-, JEPG-, TIFF- eller PDF-filer. Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager. Du kan finde oplysninger om programmet Dell Scan Manager og om status for den installerede scannerdriver. Du kan også ændre scanningsindstillinger samt tilføje og slette de mapper, hvor de dokumenter der scannes og sendes til computeren, gemmes, i programmet Dell Scan Manager. 1. Tryk på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager. Dell Scan Manager Administration vises. 2. Vælg den relevante maskine under Dell Scan Manager. 3. Tryk på Scan Property. 4. Set Scan Button giver dig adgang til at ændre scanningsindstillinger og det sted, hvor filerne gemmes, samt til at tilføje eller slette programmet og formatere filer. Du kan foretage ændringer på scannerenheden ved hjælp af Change Port. Lokal forbindelse eller netværk. Tryk på OK, når indstillingen er fuldført. Scanning til programmer 1. Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet med hinanden. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du kan finde flere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 37. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. Ready to Scan vises på den øverste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan to PC vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Der vises forskellige meddelelser, afhængigt af portforbindelsen. Kontroller, hvilken af følgende meddelelser der vises, og gå videre til det angivne trin. • Scan Destination: Tilsluttet via USB. Gå videre til trin 7. • Id: Forbindelsen er blevet oprettet via netværket, og brugeren er blevet registreret. Gå videre til trin 8. • W Local PC X: Vælg USB eller netværk til scanning. Hvis du opretter tilslutning via USB, skal du gå til trin 7. Hvis du opretter tilslutning via netværk, skal du gå til trin 8. • Not Available: Er ikke hverken tilsluttet via USB eller forbundet via netværket. Kontroller portforbindelsen. 7. Hold left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede port vises i displayet. Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af forskellige faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig diskplads, hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og indstillinger for bitdybde. Alt afhængigt af systemet og af, hvad du scanner, kan du muligvis ikke scanne ved bestemte opløsninger, især ikke, hvis du bruger forbedret opløsning. Programmet Dell Scan Manager kan udelukkende bruges sammen med Windows.38 | Scanning 8. Indtast det registrerede bruger-id og PIN-koden, og klik på OK. 9. Under Scan Destination skal du trykke på left/right arrow, indtil programmet vises. Tryk derefter på OK. Standardindstillingen er Dokumenter. 10. Du kan scanne fra standardindstillingen ved at trykke på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 11. Scanning påbegyndes. SCANNING VED HJÆLP AF EN NETVÆRKSFORBINDELSE Hvis din maskine er tilsluttet et netværk, og du har valgt de rigtige netværksparametre, kan du scanne og sende billeder over netværket. Klargøring til netværksscanning Inden du begynder at bruge maskinens netværksscanningsfunktioner, skal du konfigurere følgende indstillinger afhængigt af scanningsdestinationen: • Der skal oprettes autoriserede brugere, så der kan scannes til e-mail, FTP og SMB. • Der skal oprettes en SMTP-server, så der kan scannes til e-mail. • Der skal oprettes FTP-servere, så der kan scannes til FTP. • Der skal oprettes SMB-servere, så der kan scannes til SMB. Brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning Du skal registrere lokale brugere eller godkendte netværksbrugere ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne sende en e-mail, til FTP eller SMB. • Hvis brugergodkendelsen er aktiveret, er det kun godkendte brugere på lokale databaser eller serverdatabaser (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos), der kan sende scannede data til netværket (e-mail, FTP, SMB) ved hjælp af maskinen. • Du skal registrere godkendelseskonfigurationen til netværket eller den lokale godkendelse ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne bruge brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning. • Der findes 3 typer brugergodkendelser: ingen godkendelse (standard), netværksgodkendelse og lokal godkendelse. Registrering af lokale autoriserede brugere 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings. 3. Vælg Local Authentication på General Setup på User Authentication-websiden. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg det indeksnummer, hvor den tilsvarende indtastning skal gemmes, fra 1 til 50. 6. Indtast dit navn, dit godkendelses-id, din adgangskode, din e-mail-adresse og dit telefonnr. Du skal indtaste det registrerede bruger-id og adgangskoden, når du begynder at scanne til e-mail fra kontrolpanelet. 7. Klik på Apply. Registrering af godkendte netværksbrugere 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings. 3. Vælg Network Authentication på General Setup på User Authentication-websiden. 4. Klik på Apply og OK. 5. Vælg den Authentication Type, du ønsker. 6. Konfigurer en korrekt værdi for hver tjeneste, på følgende måde: 7. Klik på Apply. Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af Kerberos 1. Indtast den ressource, der bruges til Kerberos-login. 2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 88. 5. Du kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin. 6. Klik på Apply. Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af SMB 1. Indtast det domæne, der bruges til SMB-login. 2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Standardportnummeret er 139. 5. Brugeren kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin. 6. Klik på Apply. Netværksbruger, der er godkendt af LDAP 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og LDAP Server Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 389. 6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet. 7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server. Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service). Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i Embedded Web Service. 8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN. • Id'et er det samme som det id, der er registreret for Dell Scan Manager. • PIN-koden er det firecifrede tal, der er registreret for Dell Scan Manager. Du kan tilføje eller slette den mappe, hvor den scannede fil gemmes, ved at tilføje eller slette programmet i Dell Scan Manager → Set Scan Button. • De scannede billeder gemmes i mappen Dokumenter → My Pictures → Dell på computeren. • Du kan foretage en hurtig scanning i programmet Dell Scan Manager ved hjælp af Twain-driveren. • Du kan også foretage scanningen ved at trykke på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager → Hurtig scanning i Windows. Brugeren kan tilføje op til 6 alternative domæner.Scanning | 39 9. Vælg Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute mellem CN, UID eller UserPrincipalName. 10. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi. 11. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker. 12. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options. 13. Klik på Apply. Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto Hvis du vil scanne og sende et billede som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive netværksparametre. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 25. 6. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet SMTP Requires Authentication, så der kræves godkendelse. 7. Indtast logonnavn og adgangskode til SMTP-serveren. 8. Klik på Apply. Oprettelse af en FTP-server Hvis du vil bruge en FTP-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og FTP Setup. 3. Klik på Server List. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20. 6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen. 7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 21. 10. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer skal kunne få adgang til FTP-serveren. Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard. 11. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden. 12. Indtast Scan File Folder under FTP-mappen til lagring af det scannede billede. 13. Klik på Apply. Oprettelse af en SMB-server Hvis du vil bruge en SMB-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og SMB Setup. 3. Klik på Server List. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20. 6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen. 7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Standardportnummeret er 139. 10. Indtast Share name for serveren. 11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer skal kunne få adgang til SMB-serveren. Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard. 12. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden. 13. Indtast SMB-serverens domænenavn. 14. Indtast Scan File Folder under delt mappe til lagring af det scannede billede. 15. Klik på Apply. Scanning til e-mail Du kan scanne et billede og sende det som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail. Men først skal du oprette din e-mail-konto i Embedded Web Service. Se ”Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to Email på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast modtagerens e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. Hvis du har oprettet et adressekartotek, kan du hente en adresse fra hukommelsen ved at trykke på en genvejstast, hurtigopkaldstast eller gruppeopkaldstast. Se ”Konfiguration af adressekartoteket” på side 41. 6. Hvis du vil indtaste flere adresser, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises og derefter gentage trin 5. Hvis du vil fortsætte til næste trin, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og derefter trykke på OK. 7. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil sende en e-mail til din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK. 8. Indtast et emne til e-mailen, og tryk på OK. LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren, hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver. Denne indstilling vises kun, når du har valgt indstillingen Netværksgodkendelse i indstillingen for brugergodkendelse. Hvis du vil søge efter oplysninger i en standard-e-mailadressegruppe, skal du markere denne indstilling. Hvis godkendelsesmetoden for SMTP-serveren er POP3beforeSMTP, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet for SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication. a. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. b. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 25. Denne prompt vises ikke, hvis du har aktiveret indstillingen Send til selv i opsætningen af e-mail-kontoen.40 | Scanning 9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter e-mailen. 10. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil logge af din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK. 11. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Scanning til en FTP-server Du kan scanne et billede og derefter overføre det til en FTP-server. Du skal angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til FTPservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en FTP-server” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to FTP på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede FTP-server vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede filtype vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne server. Scanning til en SMB-server Du kan scanne et billede og derefter sende det til en SMB-server. Du skal angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til SMBservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en SMB-server” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to SMB på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede SMB-server vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne server. ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVERT SCANNINGSJOB Du kan tilpasse scanningsjob ved at bruge følgende indstillinger på maskinen. • Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen. • Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type. • Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen. • Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. • Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Den valgte scanningstype bestemmer, om denne indstilling vises eller ej. Sådan tilpasser du indstillingerne, før du begynder at scanne: 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. ÆNDRING AF STANDARDSCANNINGSINDSTILLINGER Du kan undgå at skulle ændre indstillingerne, hver gang du scanner. I stedet kan du angive standardscanningsindstillinger, der for hver scanningstype. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil ændre andre indstillinger. 8. Hvis du vil ændre standardindstillingerne for andre scanningstyper, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ) og gentage vejledningen fra trin 4. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. AUTOMATISK UDSKRIVNING AF SCANNINGSBEKRÆFTELSE Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m. Rapporten viser scanningsjobbet, og sender det via SMB og FTP. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Send Report. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. • On-Error: Maskinen udskriver kun rapporten, hvis der opstår en fejl. • On: Rapporten udskrives, uanset om et job fuldføres eller mislykkes. • Off: Der udskrives ingen rapport efter fuldførelse af et job. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.Scanning | 41 KONFIGURATION AF ADRESSEKARTOTEKET Du kan oprette et adressekartotek med de e-mail-adresser, du oftest bruger, via Embedded Web Service og derefter angive en e-mail-adresse hurtigt og nemt ved at indtaste det nummer, den har fået tildelt i adressekartoteket. Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 3. Klik på Individual Address Book og Add. 4. Vælg et nummer i adressekartoteket, og indtast det brugernavn og den e-mail-adresse, du vil gemme. 5. Klik på Apply. Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 1. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 2. Klik på Group Address Book og Add. 3. Vælg et gruppenummer, og indtast det ønskede gruppenavn. 4. Vælg de hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser, der skal indgå i gruppen. 5. Klik på Apply. Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAPserveren Du kan ikke blot bruge lokale adresser, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse, men også adresser på LDAP-serveren. Hvis du vil kunne bruge globale adresser, skal du først konfigurere LDAP-serveren via Embedded Web Service: 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 389. 6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet 7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server. Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service). Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i Embedded Web Service. 8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN. 9. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi. 10. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker. 11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options. 12. Klik på Add. Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket Du kan hente en e-mail-adresse fra adressekartoteket på flere måder: Hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, kan du indtaste det hurtignummer, hvor du har gemt den pågældende e-mail-adresse. • Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på ét ciffer, skal du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede. • Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke på den eller de første taltaster og derefter holde den sidste taltast nede. Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser Hvis du vil bruge en e-mail-adresse, der er gemt i et gruppenummer, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Globale e-mail-adresser Hvis du vil bruge en global e-mail-adresse, der er gemt på LDAPserveren, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket Du kan søge efter en adresse i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge systematisk i alfabetisk orden eller søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til adressen. Systematisk søgning i hukommelsen 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og den ønskede adresse vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden. Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk derefter på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan også klikke på Importer og hente adressekartoteket fra computeren. LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren, hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.42 | Scanning Udskrivning af adressekartoteket Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af displayet. 2. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en liste over dine genvejstastindstillinger og hurtig/ gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser. SCANNING AF BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du indstille den til at scanne begge sider af papiret. 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Udskriver i normal tilstand. • 2 Side: Scanner begge sider af originalen og udskriver siderne på begge sider af arket. Med denne funktion er udskriften en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalen. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Scanner begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. X Y X Y X YGrundlæggende udskrivning | 43 grundlæggende udskrivning Dette kapitel forklarer almindelige udskrivningsopgaver. Kapitlet omfatter: • Sådan udskriver du et dokument • Annullering af et udskriftsjob SÅDAN UDSKRIVER DU ET DOKUMENT Du kan bruge maskinen til at udskrive fra forskellige Windows-, Macintosh- eller Linux-baserede programmer. De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver et dokument, kan være forskellige, afhængigt af hvilket program du benytter. Detaljerede oplysninger om udskrivning finder du i Softwareafsnit. ANNULLERING AF ET UDSKRIFTSJOB Hvis udskriftsjobbet venter i en printerkø eller en printspooler, f.eks. gruppen Printere i Windows, skal du slette jobbet på følgende måde: 1. Klik på menuen Start i Windows. 2. I Windows 2000 skal du vælge Indstillinger og derefter Printere. I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder. I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd → Printere. 3. Dobbeltklik på ikonet Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP. 4. Vælg Annuller i menuen Dokument. Du kan også annullere det aktuelle job ved at trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på kontrolpanelet. Du får adgang til dette vindue ved at dobbeltklikke på printerikonet i nederste højre hjørne af skrivebordet i Windows.44 | Fax fax I dette kapitel får du oplysninger om, hvordan du benytter maskinen som faxmaskine. Kapitlet omfatter: • Afsendelse af en fax • Modtagelse af en fax • Andre måder at faxe på • Faxopsætning AFSENDELSE AF EN FAX Indstilling af faxhovedet I nogle lande er det lovpligtigt at angive afsenderens faxnummer på alle faxer, der sendes. Maskinens ID, som indeholder telefonnummer og navn eller firmanavn, bliver udskrevet øverst på hver side, som afsendes fra maskinen. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine ID. 4. Indtast navn eller firmanavn ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan indtaste alfanumeriske tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet og indsætte forskellige tegn ved at trykke på knappen 0. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme id’et. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Machine Fax No vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast dit faxnummer ved hjælp af taltastaturet, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Justering af dokumentindstillinger Inden du begynder at faxe, skal du ændre følgende indstillinger, så de passer til originalens status. På den måde opnår du den bedste kvalitet. Opløsning Standardindstillingerne for dokumenter giver et godt resultat, når der anvendes almindelige tekstbaserede originaler. Men hvis du sender originaler, som er i dårlig kvalitet eller indeholder billeder, kan du opnå en bedre faxkvalitet ved at justere opløsningen. 1. Tryk på Opløsning ( ). 2. Tryk på Opløsning ( ) eller på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. 3. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. De anbefalede opløsningsindstillinger for forskellige typer originaler er beskrevet i tabellen nedenfor: Mørkhed Du kan vælge standardkontrasten og på den måde gøre dine faxer lysere eller mørkere. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på nederste linje i displayet. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Darkness. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Vi anbefaler brug af de traditionelle, analoge telefontjenester (PSTN: offentlige telefonnetværk), når der skal sluttes en fax til telefonlinjen. Hvis du bruger andre internettjenester (DSL, ISDN, VolP), kan du forbedre forbindelseskvaliteten ved hjælp af et mikrofilter. Mikrofilteret eliminerer unødvendige støjsignaler og forbedrer forbindelses- eller internetkvaliteten. Eftersom DSL-mikrofilteret ikke leveres sammen med maskinen, skal du kontakte din internetudbyder for at få flere oplysninger om brug af DSL-mikrofilteret. 1 Linjeport 2 Mikrofilter 3 DSL-modem / telefonlinje TILSTAND ANBEFALES TIL: Standard Originaler med tegn i normal størrelse. Fine Originaler med små tegn eller tynde linjer, eller originaler der er udskrevet på en matrixprinter. Super Fine Originaler med mange fine detaljer. Tilstanden Super fin kan kun aktiveres, hvis den maskine, der kommunikeres med, også understøtter denne tilstand. • Ved hukommelsestransmission er tilstanden Super Fine ikke tilgængelig. Opløsningsindstillingen ændres automatisk til Fine. • Når maskinen er indstillet til opløsningen Super Fine, og den faxmaskine, der kommunikeres med, ikke understøtter opløsningen Super Fine, afsender maskinen faxen med den højeste opløsningsgrad, der understøttes af den modtagende faxmaskine. Photo Fax Originaler med gråtoner eller fotografier. Indstillingen for opløsning anvendes på det igangværende faxjob. På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.Fax | 45 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk afsendelse af en fax 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.Der vises Ready to Fax på den øverste linje af displayet. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax, du skal sende. 4. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre. 5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). 6. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Når der er ringet op til nummeret, begynder maskinen at sende faxen, når modtagerens maskine svarer. Manuel afsendelse af en fax 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax, du skal sende. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan høre en klartone. 5. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre. 6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når du hører en skinger faxtone fra den anden maskine. Bekræftelse af en transmission Når den sidste side i originalen er afsendt korrekt, bipper maskinen og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis noget går galt under afsendelsen, vises der en fejlmeddelelse i displayet. Du kan finde en liste over fejlmeddelelser og deres betydning på side 71. Hvis der vises en fejlmeddelelse, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )for at slette meddelelsen og prøve at sende faxen igen. Maskinen kan indstilles til at udskrive en bekræftelsesrapport, hver gang den har afsluttet afsendelsen af en fax. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 49. Automatisk genkald Når det nummer, du har ringet op, er optaget, eller der ikke svares, når du sender en fax, foretager maskinen automatisk et genkald hvert tredje minut op til syv gange (i henhold til producentens standardindstillingerne). Når der vises Retry Redial? i displayet, skal du trykke på OK for at kalde op til nummeret igen med det samme. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), hvis du vil afbryde det automatiske genkald. Ændring af tidsintervallet mellem genkald og antallet af genkaldsforsøg. Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer Sådan ringer du op igen til det nummer, du senest har kaldt: 1. Tryk på Genopkald/Pause ( ). 2. Når originalen er lagt i DADF’en, begynder maskinen automatisk at sende. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive modtagne faxer på begge sider af papiret . 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Sender faxer i normal tilstand. • 2 Side: Sender faxer på begge sider af originalen. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Sender faxer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver af dem på separate ark, men oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. MODTAGELSE AF EN FAX Valg af papirbakke Når du har lagt de udskriftsmedier, du vil bruge til modtagelse af faxer, i maskinen, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til faxmodtagelse. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Fax Tray vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af modtagetilstand 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Receive Mode. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tilstand for faxmodtagelse vises. • I tilstanden Fax besvarer maskinen et indgående opkald og skifter øjeblikkeligt til fax-modtagetilstand. Indstillingen for mørkhed anvendes til det igangværende faxjob. På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen. Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen. Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen. X Y X Y46 | Fax • I tilstanden Tel kan du modtage en fax ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Du kan også løfte røret på den eksterne telefon og derefter indtaste koden til ekstern modtagelse. Se ”Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon” på side 46 • I tilstanden Ans/Fax besvarer en telefonsvarer, der er tilsluttet maskinen, et indgående opkald, så den, der ringer op, kan indtale en besked. Hvis faxmaskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, skifter maskinen automatisk til Faxtilstand for at modtage faxen. Se ”Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax” på side 46 • I tilstanden DRPD kan du modtage et opkald ved hjælp af funktionen DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 46. 6. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax Maskinen er forudindstillet til tilstanden Fax fra producenten. Når du modtager en fax, besvarer maskinen opkaldet efter et bestemt antal ring og modtager automatisk faxen. For at ændre antallet af ring, se side 50. Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel Du kan modtage et faxopkald ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter trykke på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ), når du hører en faxtone fra afsendermaskinen. Maskinen begynder at modtage en fax og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand, når modtagelsen er afsluttet. Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon Denne funktion fungerer bedst, når du anvender en ekstern telefon, der er tilsluttet EXT-stikket på maskinens bagside. Du kan modtage en fax fra en person, du taler med på den eksterne telefon, uden at skulle gå hen til faxmaskinen. Når du modtager et opkald på den eksterne telefon, og du kan høre faxtonen, skal du trykke på knapperne *9* på den eksterne telefon. Så begynder maskinen at modtage faxen. Tryk langsomt på tasterne i den angivne rækkefølge. Prøv at trykke *9* en gang til, hvis du stadig hører faxtonen fra den eksterne maskine. *9* er den eksterne modtagekode, maskinen leveres med fra fabrikken. Den første og sidste stjerne er faste, men du kan ændre det midterste tal. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du ændrer koden. Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax Hvis du vil bruge denne tilstand, skal der sættes en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis den, der ringer, efterlader en besked, gemmer telefonsvareren beskeden som normalt. Hvis maskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, begynder den automatisk at modtage faxen. Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Det nummer, som en person ringer til dig fra, identificeres med forskellige ringemønstre, der består af forskellige kombinationer af lange og korte ringelyde. Denne funktion bruges ofte af svartjenester, der besvarer telefoner for mange forskellige klienter, og som derfor har behov for at vide, hvilket nummer en given person ringer ind fra, for at kunne besvare opkaldet korrekt. Hvis du bruger DRPD-funktionen (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection), kan faxmaskinen lære at genkende den ringetonesekvens, som du angiver, at faxmaskinen skal besvare. Medmindre du ændrer den, vil denne ringetonesekvens fortsat registreres og besvares som et faxopkald, mens alle andre ringetonesekvenser dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller den telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan når som helst slå DRPDfunktionen fra eller ændre den. Du kan først bruge DRPD-funktionen, når tjenesten er oprettet på din telefonlinje af telefonselskabet. Hvis du vil opsætte DRPD, skal du have en anden telefonlinje på stedet eller få en person til at ringe til dit faxnummer udefra. Sådan opsættes tilstanden DRPD: 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil DRPD Mode vises, og tryk på OK. Waiting Ring, vises på displayet. 5. Ring til dit faxnummer fra en anden telefon. Det er ikke nødvendigt at foretage opkaldet fra en faxmaskine. 6. Når maskinen begynder at ringe, skal du ikke besvare opkaldet. Maskinen skal registrere adskillige ring for at lære mønstret. Når maskinen kan genkende sekvensen, vises der Completed DRPD Setup i displayet. Hvis opsætningen af DRPD mislykkes, vises der Error DRPD Ring. Tryk på OK, når DRPD Mode vises, og begynd forfra fra trin 4. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. • Når der ikke er mere plads i hukommelsen, kan printeren ikke mere modtage indgående faxer. Sørg for, at der er ledig hukommelse ved at fjerne data, der er lagret i hukommelsen, for at kunne genoptage funktionen. • Hvis du vil bruge tilstanden Ans/Fax, skal du sætte en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. • Hvis du vil undgå, at andre skal kunne se de dokumenter, du modtager, kan du bruge tilstanden til sikker modtagelse. I denne tilstand gemmes alle modtagne faxer i hukommelsen. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 47. • Hvis du har indstillet maskinen til tilstanden Ans/Fax, og telefonsvareren er slået fra, eller der ikke er sat en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket, skifter maskinen automatisk til tilstanden Fax efter et foruddefineret antal ring. • Hvis din telefonsvarer har en brugerindstillet ringetæller, skal du indstille maskinen til at besvare indgående opkald efter 1 ring. • Hvis du har valgt tilstanden Tel (manuel modtagelse), og telefonsvareren er tilsluttet maskinen, skal du slå telefonsvareren fra. Ellers griber meddelelsen fra telefonsvareren forstyrrende ind i telefonsamtalen.Fax | 47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand Du kan få brug for at forhindre, at uvedkommende personer har adgang til de faxer, du modtager. Du kan skifte til sikker modtagetilstand, så udskriften af modtagne faxer begrænses, når maskinen ikke er overvåget. I sikker modtagetilstand gemmes alle indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Når tilstanden er deaktiveret, udskrives eventuelle gemte faxer. Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på nederste linje i displayet. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Secure Receive vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast en adgangskode på fire cifre, som du vil bruge, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden igen for at bekræfte den, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Når en fax modtages i sikker modtagetilstand, gemmes den i hukommelsen og meddelelsen Secure Receive vises, så du ved, at der er modtaget en fax. Udskrivning af modtagne faxer 1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Print vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK. Maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen. Deaktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Off vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK. Tilstanden deaktiveres, og maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen. 4. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen Da maskinen er en multitaskingenhed, kan den modtage faxer samtidig med, at den kopierer eller udskriver. Hvis du modtager en fax, mens du kopierer eller udskriver, gemmer maskinen indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Så snart kopieringen eller udskrivningen er afsluttet, udskriver maskinen automatisk faxerne. Maskinen modtager også fax og lagrer dem i hukommelsen, når der ikke er papir i bakken, eller der ikke er toner i tonerpatronen. ANDRE MÅDER AT FAXE PÅ Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer Du kan bruge funktionen til afsendelse af fax til flere destinationer. Originalerne gemmes automatisk i hukommelsen og sendes til en ekstern maskine. Efter transmissionen slettes originalerne automatisk fra hukommelsen. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Multi Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på den første modtagerfaxmaskine, og tryk på OK. Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Indtast det næste faxnummer, og tryk på OK. Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet. 8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises, og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 10. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen begynder at sende faxen til de numre, du har indtastet, i den rækkefølge, du har indtastet dem. Afsendelse af en udskudt fax Du kan indstille maskinen, så den sender en fax på et senere tidspunkt, hvor du ikke selv er til stede. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delay Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på den modtagende maskine ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste • DRPD-funktionen skal konfigureres igen, hvis du tildeler faxnummeret igen eller slutter maskinen til en anden telefonlinje. • Når DRPD-funktionen er oprettet, skal du ringe dit faxnummer op igen for at bekræfte, at maskinen svarer med en faxtone. Derefter skal du sørge for, at der ringes op til et andet nummer, som er registreret på samme linje, så du er sikker på, at opkaldet dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan aktivere sikker modtagetilstand uden at angive en adgangskode, men så kan du ikke beskytte dine faxer. Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.48 | Fax gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Oprettelse af et adressekartotek” på side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet. 8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises, og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 10. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. Hvis du ikke ønsker at indtaste et navn, skal du blot springe dette trin over. 11. Brug taltasterne, og indtast klokkeslættet. Tryk derefter på OK eller Black Start. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 12. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Displayet minder dig om, at maskinen befinder sig i klar-tilstand, og at den er indstillet til at sende en udskudt fax. Tilføjelse af sider til en udskudt fax Du kan føje flere sider til de faxer, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse som udskudte faxer. 1. Læg de originaler, der skal tilføjes, i maskinen, og juster dokumentindstillingerne. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Add Page. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Maskinen scanner originalen ind i hukommelsen og viser både det samlede antal sider og det tilføjede antal sider. Annullering af en udskudt fax 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel Job vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. Den valgte fax slettes fra hukommelsen. Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax Du kan bruge denne funktion, hvis du vil sende en fax med høj prioritet før andre reserverede handlinger. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen og sendes med det samme, når den igangværende handling er afsluttet. Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax afbryder også afsendelse til flere destinationer midt mellem afsendelserne (dvs. når afsendelsen til maskine A er afsluttet, og før afsendelsen til maskine B starter) eller mellem opkaldsforsøg. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44. 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Priority Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. 8. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 9. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen viser det nummer, der ringes op til, og begynder at sende faxen. Videresendelse af faxer Du kan videresende indkommende og udgående faxer til en anden fax eller email-adresse. Videresendelse af afsendte faxer til en anden fax Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til en nærmere angivet destination ud over de faxnumre, du har indtastet. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til, og tryk derefter på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine. Videresendelse af faxer til e-mail-adresser Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til en angivet destination ud over de e-mail-adresser, du har indtastet. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. 8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse. Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer. Hvis du angiver et klokkeslæt, der ligger før det nuværende tidspunkt, sendes faxen på dette tidspunkt dagen efter. Fax | 49 Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til en anden fax Du kan indstille maskinen til at videresende modtagne faxer til et andet faxnummer inden for et givet tidsrum. Når maskinen modtager en fax, gemmes den i hukommelsen. Derefter ringer maskinen til det nummer, du har angivet, og sender faxen. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print 7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til, og tryk derefter på OK. 8. Indtast starttidspunktet, og tryk på OK. 9. Indtast sluttidspunktet, og tryk på OK. 10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere modtagne faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine. Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til e-mail-adresser Du kan indstille din maskine til at videresende indgående faxer til den indtastede e-mail-adresse. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print 7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. 8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse. FAXOPSÆTNING Ændring af faxindstillingerne Maskinen er udstyret med forskellige indstillinger, som kan vælges af brugeren som et led i opsætningen af faxsystemet. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne, så de passer til det, du har brug for. Sådan ændres indstillingerne for faxopsætning: 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Sending eller Receiving, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede menupunkt vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, eller indtast værdien for den indstilling, du har valgt, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag om nødvendigt trin 4 til og med 5. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Sending-indstillinger Receiving-indstillinger INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Redial Times Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal forsøge at kalde op til et nummer igen. Hvis du indtaster 0, ringer maskinen ikke op igen. Redial Term Maskinen kan automatisk foretage genkald til en anden fax, hvis den var optaget første gang. Du kan angive et interval mellem forsøgene. Prefix Dial Du kan angive et præfiks på op til fem cifre. Maskinen vil så ringe dette opkaldspræfiks først, hver gang den ringer et automatisk opkaldsnummer. Dette er nyttigt, hvis du skal have adgang til en PABX-omstilling. ECM Mode Denne tilstand er en hjælp, hvis forbindelsen er dårlig. Den sørger for, at alle faxer, du sender, sendes uden problemer til en anden fax, der også er udstyret med ECM-funktion. Det kan tage længere tid at sende en fax med ECM-funktion. Send Report Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m. De tilgængelige indstillinger er On, Off og OnError, der kun udskriver en rapport, når transmissionen ikke lykkes. Image TCR Denne funktion underretter brugere om, hvilke faxmeddelelser der er blevet sendt, ved at vise sendte meddelelser i transmissionsrapporten. Første side i meddelelsen omdannes til en billedfil, der printes på transmissionsrapporten, så brugeren kan se, hvilke meddelelser der er blevet sendt. Du kan ikke bruge denne funktion uden at gemme data i hukommelsen. Dial Mode Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne indstilling er tilgængelig. Hvis du ikke kan få adgang til denne indstilling, understøtter maskinen ikke denne funktion. Du kan indstille opkaldstilstanden for maskinen til toneopkald eller impulsopkald. Hvis du har et offentligt telefonsystem eller et privat omstillingssystem (PBX), skal du muligvis vælge Pulse. Kontakt telefonselskabet, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvilken opkaldstilstand du skal bruge. Hvis du vælger Pulse, vil nogle af telefonsystemets funktioner måske ikke være tilgængelige. Det kan også tage længere tid at kalde op til et fax- eller et telefonnummer. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Receive Mode Du kan vælge faxens standardmodtagetilstand. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om modtagelse af faxer i de forskellige tilstande på side 45.50 | Fax Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne Faxindstillingerne, bl.a. opløsning og mørkhed, kan indstilles til de oftest brugte tilstande. Når du sender en fax, bruges standardindstillingerne, hvis du ikke har ændret dem ved at bruge den tilsvarende tast og menu. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Change Default vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Resolution. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede opløsning vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Darkness vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mørkhed vises, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer Du kan indstille maskinen, så der udskrives en rapport med detaljerede oplysninger om de foregående 50 transmissioner, bl.a. klokkeslæt og dato. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Report vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Oprettelse af et adressekartotek Du kan opsætte et adressekartotek med de faxnumre, du bruger oftest. Du kan bruge følgende funktioner, når du opsætter et adressekartotek: • Genvejstaster • Hurtig/gruppeopkaldsnumre Genvejstaster Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i de 15 genvejstaster på kontrolpanelet. Derefter kan du indtaste et faxnummer ved bare at trykke på en tast. Med tasten Shift kan du gemme op til 30 numre i genvejstasterne. Du kan gemme numre i genvejstasterne på to måder. Se fremgangsmåderne nedenfor, og brug derefter den metode, der passer dig bedst: Registrering, efter at du har trykket på en genvejstast 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 4. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske Ring To Answer Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal ringe, før den besvarer et indgående opkald. Stamp RCV Name Denne indstilling bevirker, at der automatisk udskrives sidetal samt dato og klokkeslæt for modtagelsen nederst på hver side af en modtaget fax. Rcv Start Code Denne kode giver dig mulighed for at starte faxmodtagelsen fra en ekstern telefon, der er sat i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis du tager den eksterne telefon og kan høre faxtoner, skal du indtaste koden. Fabriksindstillingen er *9*. Auto Reduction Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i papirbakken, eller længere, kan maskinen formindske originalstørrelsen, så den passer til det papir, der ligger i maskinen. Slå denne funktion til, hvis en indgående side skal formindskes automatisk. Hvis denne funktion er indstillet til Off, kan maskinen ikke formindske originalen, så den kan være på en enkelt side. Originalen opdeles og udskrives i den faktiske størrelse på to eller flere sider. Discard Size Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i maskinen, eller længere, kan du indstille maskinen, så der ses bort fra en bestemt længde fra slutningen af den modtagne fax. Maskinen udskriver den modtagne fax på et eller flere ark papir, minus de data, der ellers ville være udskrevet i det segment, der nu ses bort fra. Når den modtagne fax indeholder sider, der er større end papiret i maskinen, og Auto Reduction er aktiveret, formindsker maskinen faxen, så den passer til papiret, uden at der ses bort fra visse segmenter. Junk Fax Setup Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne indstilling er tilgængelig. Når denne funktion er aktiveret, vil systemet ikke modtage faxer, der er sendt fra eksterne faxer med faxnumre, der er gemt i hukommelsen som uønskede faxnumre. Denne funktion er nyttig, hvis du vil blokere uønskede faxer. Når du aktiverer denne funktion, kan du få adgang til følgende indstillinger og angive uønskede faxnumre. • Add: Giver dig mulighed for at angive op til 10 faxnumre. • Delete: Giver dig mulighed for at slette et uønsket faxnummer. • Delete All: Giver dig mulighed for at slette alle uønskede faxnumre. DRPD Mode Denne tilstand sætter en bruger i stand til at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre via en enkelt telefonlinje. I denne menu kan du indstille maskinen, så den registrerer hvilke ringemønstre, den skal besvare. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om denne funktion på side 46. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Duplex Print • Long Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog. • Short Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på en notesblok. • Off: Udskriver den modtagne fax på en side af papiret. Inden du begynder at gemme faxnumre, skal du kontrollere, at maskinen er i faxtilstand. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSEFax | 51 tegn på side 21. 5. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme, og tryk på OK. Registrering, efter at du først har indtastet et nummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme. 3. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 6. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Brug af genvejstaster Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax: • Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 1 til 15, skal du trykke på den tilsvarende genvejstast og trykke på OK. • Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 16 til 30, skal du trykke på Shift og derefter på den tilsvarende genvejstast. Tryk derefter på OK. Hurtigopkaldstaster Du kan gemme op til 240 faxnumre, som du ofte bruger, som hurtigopkaldstaster. Registrering af et hurtigopkaldsnummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial. 4. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 239, og tryk på OK. Hvis det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vælger, allerede er i brug, vises navnet på displayet, så du kan ændre det. Hvis du vil begynde forfra med et andet hurtigopkaldsnummer, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ). 5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 6. Indtast det ønskede faxnummer, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Redigering af hurtigopkaldsnumre 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial. 3. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk på OK. 4. Ret navnet, og tryk på OK. 5. Ret faxnummeret, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Brug af hurtigopkaldsnumre Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et destinationsnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax, skal du indtaste det hurtigopkaldsnummer, som du gemte det ønskede faxnummer under. • Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på ét ciffer (0-9), skal du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede. • Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke på tasten eller tasterne med det eller de første cifre og derefter holde tasten med det sidste ciffer nede. Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 51. Gruppeopkaldsnumre Hvis du ofte skal sende det samme dokument til flere destinationer, kan du gruppere disse destinationer og angive dem under et gruppeopkaldsnummer. Du kan derefter bruge gruppeopkaldsnummeret og sende dokumentet til alle destinationerne i gruppen. Du kan angive op til 200 (0 til og med 199) gruppeopkaldsnumre ved at bruge destinationens eksisterende hurtigopkaldsnumre. Registrering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Indtast et gruppeopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 199, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når hurtigopkaldsoplysningerne vises korrekt. 7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 8. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil indsætte flere hurtigopkaldsnumre i gruppen. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Redigering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer Du kan slette et bestemt nummer fra en gruppe eller indsætte et nyt nummer i den valgte gruppe. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast det gruppeopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil tilføje eller slette, og tryk på OK. Hvis du har indtastet et nyt hurtigopkaldsnummer, vises Add?. Hvis du indtaster et hurtigopkaldsnummer, der er gemt i en gruppe, vises der Delete?. 5. Tryk på OK for at tilføje eller slette nummeret. 6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises, hvis du vil tilføje eller slette flere numre, og gentag derefter fremgangsmåden fra trin 4 og 5. 7. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Brug af gruppeopkaldsnumre Hvis du vil bruge et gruppeopkaldsnummer, skal du søge efter det og vælge det i hukommelsen. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se nedenfor. Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket Du kan søge efter et nummer i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge systematisk i alfabetisk rækkefølge, eller du kan søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til nummeret. Hvis du trykker på en genvejstast, hvor der allerede er gemt et nummer, vises en meddelelse på displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil overskrive det gemte nummer. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte Yes og fortsætte. Hvis du vil starte forfra med en anden genvejstast, skal du vælge No.52 | Fax Sekventiel søgning i hukommelsen 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og nummer vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden. Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk derefter på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Sletning af en post i adressekartoteket Du kan slette numre i adressekartoteket ét ad gangen. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Delete på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede søgemetode vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Vælg Search All, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at blade gennem alle poster i adressekartoteket. Vælg Search ID, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at indtaste de første par bogstaver i navnet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Eller indtast de første bogstaver, og tryk på OK. Tryk på venstre/ højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at bekræfte sletningen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Udskrivning af adressekartoteket 1. Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af displayet. 3. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en oversigt over dine genvejstastindstillinger og gemte hurtig- og gruppeopkaldsnumre.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 53 brug af USB-flash-hukommelse I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du bruger en USB-hukommelsesenhed sammen med maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Om USB-hukommelse • Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Sikkerhedskopiering af data • Håndtering af USB-hukommelse OM USB-HUKOMMELSE USB-hukommelsesenheder fås i flere forskellige størrelser, så du får tilstrækkelig plads til lagring af dokumenter og præsentationer og download af musik og hele videoer, fotografier med høj opløsning og et utal af andre filer, som du vil gemme eller overføre. Du kan bruge en USB-hukommelsesenhed til flere forskellige ting på denne maskine. Du kan f.eks.: • Scanne dokumenter og gemme dem på USB-enheden. • Udskrive data, der er gemt på USB-enheden. • Sikkerhedskopier Adressekartotek /Phone Book-poster og maskinens systemindstillinger. • Gendanne sikkerhedskopifiler i maskinens hukommelse. • Formatere USB-enheden. • Kontrollere, hvor meget hukommelse der er til rådighed. TILSLUTNING AF EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED USB-porten foran på maskinen er beregnet til en hukommelsesenhed af typen USB V1.1 og USB V2.0. Maskinen understøtter USB-hukommelsesenheder med FAT16/FAT32 og en sektorstørrelse på 512 byte. Kontroller USB-hukommelsesenhedens filsystem hos en forhandler. Du må kun bruge en godkendt USB-enhed med et tilslutningsstik af type A. Brug kun en USB-hukommelsesenhed af metal eller med afskærmning. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen. SCANNING TIL EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED Du kan scanne et dokument og gemme det på en USB-hukommelsesenhed. Der er to måder at gøre dette på: Du kan scanne til enheden ved hjælp af standardindstillingerne, eller du kan vælge dine egne scanningsindstillinger. Scanning 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når der vises USB. Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det, den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54. Maskinen begynder at scanne originalen, og du bliver derefter spurgt, om du vil scanne en side til. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil scanne flere sider. Læg en original i maskinen, og tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). • Du må ikke fjerne USB-enheden, mens maskinen er i gang, eller mens der skrives til eller læses fra USB-hukommelsen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af brugerens forkerte brug. • Hvis USB-enheden har visse funktioner, f.eks. sikkerhedsindstillinger og adgangskodeindstillinger, er det ikke sikkert, at den kan registreres automatisk af maskinen. Du kan finde flere oplysninger om disse funktioner i brugerhåndbogen til enheden.54 | Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det, den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54. Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK. Når scanningen er udført, kan du fjerne USB-enheden fra maskinen. Tilpasning af scanning til USB Du kan angive billedstørrelse, filformat og farvetilstand, hver gang du scanner til en USB-enhed. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises USB Memory 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan angive følgende indstillinger: • Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen. • Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type. • Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen. • Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. Hvis du vælger Mono her, kan du ikke vælge JPEG i Scan Format. • Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Hvis du vælger JPEG her, kan du ikke vælge Mono Scan Color. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne for scanning. Se side 40, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. UDSKRIVNING FRA EN USBHUKOMMELSESENHED Du kan udskrive filer, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, direkte. Du kan udskrive TIFF-, BMP-, JPEG-, PDF- og PRN-filer. Følgende filtyper understøttes af funktionen til direkte udskrivning: • PRN: Dell PCL 6-kompatible. • Du kan oprette PRN-filer ved at markere afkrydsningsfeltet Udskriv til fil, når du udskriver et dokument. Dokumentet gemmes som en PRN-fil i stedet for at blive udskrevet på papir. Kun PRN-filer, der oprettes på denne måde, kan udskrives direkte fra USB-hukommelsen. Læs i Softwareafsnittet, hvordan du opretter en PRN-fil. • BMP: BMP, ukomprimeret • TIFF: TIFF 6.0-baseline • JPEG: JPEG-baseline • PDF: PDF 1.4 og tidligere versioner Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USBhukommelsesenhed 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. Hvis enheden allerede sidder i porten, skal du trykke på USB-udskrivning ( ). Maskinen registrerer automatisk enheden og læser de data, der er gemt på den. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller mapper i den markerede mappe. 3. Hvis du vælger en fil, skal du gå videre til næste trin. Hvis du vælger en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede fil vises. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives, eller indtast antallet. 5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ) for at starte udskrivning af den valgte fil. Der er to muligheder: • OK eller Color Start ( ): Farveudskrift • Black Start ( ): Sort/hvid udskrift Når filen er udskrevet, bliver du i displayet spurgt, om du vil udskrive et andet job. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil udskrive et andet job, og gentag vejledningen fra trin 2. Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. SIKKERHEDSKOPIERING AF DATA Data i maskinens hukommelse kan slettes ved en fejltagelse i forbindelse med et strømsvigt eller lagerfejl. Sikkerhedskopier hjælper dig med at beskytte posteringerne i adressekartotek og systemindstillingerne ved at lagre dem som sikkerhedskopifiler på en USB-hukommelsesenhed. Sikkerhedskopiering af data 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Export Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises. • Adressekartotek: Sikkerhedskopierer alle posteringer i adressekartotek. • Setup Data: Sikkerhedskopierer alle systemindstillinger. 6. Tryk på OK for at begynde at sikkerhedskopiere. Dataene sikkerhedskopieres til USB-hukommelsen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Gendannelse af data 1. Sæt den USB-hukommelsesenhed, som de sikkerhedskopierede data er gemt på, i USB-porten. 2. Tryk på Menu( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Import Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede datatype vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, der indeholder de data, du vil gendanne, vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 7. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at gendanne de sikkerhedskopierede data på maskinen. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Can choose paper size and tray when printing. Se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type” på side 31.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 55 HÅNDTERING AF USB-HUKOMMELSE Du kan slette billedfiler, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, en ad gangen eller alle på én gang ved at omformatere enheden. Sletning af en billedfil 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Delete. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Hvis du har valgt en fil, vises filstørrelsen i displayet i ca. 2 sekunder. Gå videre til næste trin. Hvis du har valgt en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, du vil slette, vises. Tryk derefter på OK. 7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Format vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus Du kan kontrollere mængden af hukommelse, der er tilgængelig til scanning og lagring af dokumenter. 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på den nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Check Space vises, og tryk på OK. Den ledige hukommelse vises i displayet. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstanden. Når du har slettet filer eller omformateret en USBhukommelsesenhed, kan filerne ikke længere gendannes. Inden du sletter filerne, skal du derfor være helt sikker på, at du ikke længere har brug for filerne. Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller mapper i den markerede mappe.56 | Vedligeholdelse vedligeholdelse Dette kapitel indeholder oplysninger om, hvordan du vedligeholder maskinen og tonerpatronen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Udskrivning af rapporter • Justering af farvekontrasten • Brug af Advarsel om lav toner • Sådan slettes hukommelsen • Rengøring af maskinen • Vedligeholdelse af patronen • Udskiftning af tonerpatronen • Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet • Vedligeholdelsesdele • Styring af maskinen fra webstedet • Kontrol af maskinens serienummer UDSKRIVNING AF RAPPORTER Du kan få vist forskellige rapporter med nyttige oplysninger, som du har brug for. Der findes følgende rapporter: Udskrivning af en rapport 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Report vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du får vist den rapport eller liste, du vil udskrive, og tryk på OK. Hvis du vil udskrive alle rapporter og lister, skal du vælge All Report. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte udskrivningen. De valgte oplysninger udskrives. JUSTERING AF FARVEKONTRASTEN Farvemenuen giver dig mulighed for at justere farveindstillingerne. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Color vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk derefter på OK. • Custom Color: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille kontrasten farve for farve. Default optimerer farver automatisk. Manual Adjust giver dig mulighed for manuelt at justere farvekontrasten for hver patron. Nogle rapporter vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSE Configuration Denne liste viser status for de brugerdefinerbare indstillinger. Hvis du har foretaget ændringer, kan du udskrive denne liste for at få bekræftet ændringerne. Supplies Info På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for maskinens forbrugsstoffer. Address Book På listen kan du se alle de faxnumre og e-mailadresser, der aktuelt er gemt i maskinens hukommelse. Send Report Denne rapport viser faxnummeret, antallet af sider, hvor lang tid jobbet tog, den benyttede kommunikationstilstand og kommunikationens resultater for et bestemt job. Du kan indstille din maskine til automatisk at udskrive en rapport, der bekræfter transmissionen, efter hvert faxjob. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49. Sent Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt afsendte faxer og e-mails. Du kan indstille maskinen, så rapporten automatisk udskrives, hver gang der har været 50 kommunikationer. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49. Fax RCV Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt afsendte faxer. Schedule Jobs Denne liste viser de dokumenter, der aktuelt er gemt til udskudt faxtransmission, sammen med starttidspunktet og handlingstypen. Junk Fax Report Denne liste viser de faxnumre, der er angivet som uønskede faxnumre (junk). Hvis du vil føje numre til eller slette numre fra listen, skal du åbne menuen Junk Fax Setup Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49. Network Info. Denne liste viser oplysninger om maskinens netværksforbindelse og konfiguration. NetScan Report Denne rapport viser oplysninger vedrørende Netværksscanningsposter, inklusive IP-adresse, tidspunkt og dato, antal sider, der er scannet, og resultater. Rapporten udskrives automatisk, når der har været 50 netværksscanningsjob. User Auth List Denne liste viser de godkendte brugere, der har tilladelse til at bruge e-mail-funktionen. PCL Font List Du kan udskrive PCL-skrifttypelisten. PS3 Font List Du kan udskrive PS3-skrifttypelisten. Stored Job På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for gemte job på harddisken. Completed Job Siden Gennemført job indeholder en liste over fuldførte udskriftsjob. Listen indeholder op til 50 filer fra de seneste udskriftsjob. Net Auth Log Denne liste viser de brugere, der er logget på domænet, og deres id’er. RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSEVedligeholdelse | 57 Default indstillingen er anbefalet for at få den bedste farvekvalitet. • Auto Color Reg.: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille placeringen af farvetekster eller grafik, så de svarer til den originale fil på skærmen. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. BRUG AF ADVARSEL OM LAV TONER Hvis toneren i patronen er brugt op, vises der en meddelelse til brugeren om, at tonerpatronen skal skiftes. Du kan angive, hvorvidt denne meddelelse skal vises eller ej. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Toner Low Alert vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Off. 5. Tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. SÅDAN SLETTES HUKOMMELSEN Du kan slette selektivt blandt de oplysninger, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clear Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det element, du vil slette, vises. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 5. Tryk på OK igen for at bekræfte sletningen. 6. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5 for at slette endnu et element. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. RENGØRING AF MASKINEN Hvis du vil bevare udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten, skal du følge nedenstående procedurer, hver gang tonerpatronen udskiftes, eller hvis der opstår problemer med udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten. Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt Gør maskinens kabinet rent med en blød fnugfri klud. Du kan fugte kluden med lidt vand, men pas på, at vandet ikke drypper på eller ind i maskinen. Indvendig rengøring af maskinen Under udskrivningen kan der samle sig papir-, toner- og støvpartikler inde i maskinen. Denne ophobning kan give problemer med udskriftskvaliteten, så som tonerpletter eller udtværet skrift. Rengøring af maskinen indvendigt udbedrer eller formindsker disse problemer. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk netledningen ud. Vent, til maskinen er kølet ned. 2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. Hvis du har flyttet maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt at betjene menuen manuelt. Før du rydder hukommelsen, skal du kontrollere, at alle faxjob er udført. Ellers går disse job tabt. Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE All Settings Rydder alle data, der er gemt i hukommelsen, og nulstiller alle indstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Fax Setup Gendanner alle faxindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Copy Setup Gendanner alle kopieringsindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Scan Setup Gendanner alle scanningsindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. System Setup Gendanner alle systemindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Network Gendanner alle netværksindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Address Book Sletter alle faxnumre og email-adresser i hukommelsen. Sent Report Sletter alle fortegnelser over afsendte faxer og e-mails. Fax RCV Report Sletter alle poster over modtagne faxer. NetScan Report Sletter oplysninger om netværkscanningssessioner i hukommelsen. • Rengøring af maskinens kabinet med rengøringsmidler, der indeholder store mængder alkohol, opløsningsmidler eller andre stærke kemikalier, kan medføre misfarvning eller anden skade på kabinettet. • Hvis maskinen eller dens omgivelser er tilsmudset med toner, anbefaler vi, at du bruger en klud fugtet med vand til at rense den. Hvis du bruger en støvsuger, bliver toneren hvirvlet op i luften og kan være skadelig for dig. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPC-tromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE58 | Vedligeholdelse 3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. 4. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre papiroverførselsbæltet. Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet, og løft bæltet ud af maskinen 5. Fjern støv og spildt toner fra området omkring tonerpatroner og deres hulrum med en tør og fnugfri klud. 6. Find det lange stykke glas (LSU) i den øverste del af sektionen til tonerpatronen, og tør forsigtigt glasset af for at se, om den hvide bomuldsklud bliver sort af snavs. 7. Placer de forskellige enheder i maskinen igen, og luk frontlågen. 8. Sæt netledningen i, og tænd for maskinen. Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive høj og kan beskadige huden. Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet. Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Vedligeholdelse | 59 Rengøring af scannerenheden Regelmæssig rengøring af scannerenheden er med til at sikre de bedst mulige kopier. Vi foreslår, at du rengør scannerenheden hver morgen samt i løbet af dagen efter behov. 1. Fugt en blød fnugfri klud eller et stykke køkkenrulle med lidt vand. 2. Åbn scannerlåget. 3. Tør overfladen af scannerglaspladen og DADF glaspladen af, indtil den er ren og tør. 4. Tør undersiden af scannerlåget og den hvide flade af, indtil de er rene og tørre. 5. Luk scannerlåget. VEDLIGEHOLDELSE AF PATRONEN Opbevaring af tonerpatroner Hvis du vil have mest muligt ud af tonerpatronen, skal du være opmærksom på følgende: • Tag ikke tonerpatronen ud af emballagen, før den skal bruges. • Undlad at genopfylde tonerpatronen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af en genopfyldt tonerpatron. • Opbevar tonerpatroner i de samme omgivelser som maskinen. • For at undgå beskadigelse af tonerpatronen må den ikke udsættes for lyspåvirkning i mere end et par minutter. Forventet patronlevetid Tonerpatronens levetid afhænger af, hvor meget toner udskriftsjobbene kræver. Det reelle tal kan også variere afhængigt af den udskriftstæthed, der bruges, ligesom antallet af sider kan være påvirket af driftsmiljø, udskrivningsinterval, medietype og mediestørrelse. Hvis du udskriver meget grafik, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte patronen oftere. Fordeling af toner Når toneren er ved at være opbrugt, kan der optræde svage eller lyse områder. Farvebilleder kan blive udskrevet med forkerte farver på grund af forkert blanding af tonerfarver, når en af tonerpatronerne er ved at være tom. Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den resterende toner. • Tonermeddelelsen om, at der er meget lidt toner tilbage, vises muligvis på displayet. 1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 2. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. 1 Scannerlåg 2 Scannerglasplade 3 Hvid flade 4 ADF-glas • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive høj og kan beskadige huden. Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.60 | Vedligeholdelse 3. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side for at fordele toneren ligeligt. 4. Skub tonerpatronen ind i maskinen igen. 5. Luk frontlågen. Kontroller, at lågen er ordentligt lukket. UDSKIFTNING AF TONERPATRONEN Maskinen benytter fire farver og har en tonerpatron til hver farve: gul (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) og sort (K). • Statuslampen og den tonerrelaterede meddelelse på displayet angiver, hvornår hver enkelt tonerpatron skal udskiftes. • Indgående faxer gemmes i hukommelsen. Så er det nødvendigt at udskifte tonerpatronen. Kontroller, hvilken type tonerpatron der bruges til maskinen. Se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af. 2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område.

Adresses complètes sur CD ROM,  téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI